TALKS ON THE PATH OF OCCULTISM- VOL. 3
A Commentary on " Light on the Path"
ANNIE BESANT, D.L.
AND
Rt. Rev. C. W. LEADBEATER
1947.
THE THEOSOPHICAL PUBLISHING HOUSE
Adyar, Madras, India
First Edition, 1926 Second Edition, 1930 Third Edition, 1947
FOREWORD
This book is merely a record
of talks by Mr. C. W. Leadbeater – now Bishop Leadbeater – and myself on three
famous books – books small in size but great in contents. We both hope that
they will prove useful to aspirants, and even to those above that stage, since
the talkers were older than the listeners, and had more experience in the life
of discipleship.
Annie Besant
CONTENTS
Foreword
Light on the Path: Part I
1. Introduction
2. The Four
Preliminary Statements
3. The First
Rule
4. Rules 2 to
4
5. Rules 5 to
8
6. Rules 9 to
12
7. Rules 13 to
16
8. Rules 17’to
19
9. Rule 20
10. The Note on Rule 20
11. Rule 21
Light on the Path: Part II
1. The Preliminary Comment
2. Rules 1 to 4
3. Rules 5 to 8
4. Rules 9 to 12
5. Rule 13
6. Rules 14 to 21
PART I
LIGHT ON THE PATH
CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
1.
A.B. – Light
on the Path is one of a number of different occult treatises which
are in the care of the great Teachers and are used in the instruction of
disciples. It is a part of The Book of the Golden Precepts, which
contains many treatises which were written in different ages of the world, but
have one characteristic in common, that they contain occult truth, and have
therefore to be studied in a different way from ordinary books. The
understanding of these treatises depends upon the capacity of the reader, and
when any one of them is published to the world only distorted views of its teaching
will be acquired, if it is taken literally.
2.
Definitely
intended for the quickening of the evolution of those who are on the Path, this
book puts forward ideals which people of the world are rarely prepared to
accept. Only as far as a man is able and willing to live the teaching, will he
be able to understand it. If he does not practise it, it will remain a sealed
book to him. Any effort to live it will throw light upon it; but if the reader
makes no effort, he will not only gain very little, but he will turn against
the book and say that it is useless.
3.
This treatise
falls naturally into certain divisions. It was given to the Western world by
the Master Hilarion, one of the great Teachers belonging to the White Lodge – a
Master who played a great part in the Gnostic and Neoplatonic movements, one of
the great persons who made attempts to keep Christianity alive. His
incarnations have run very much in Greece and Rome, and He takes special
interest in guiding the evolution of the Western world. He obtained the book as
we have it, without the notes, from the Venetian Master, one of the greater
Teachers whom H.P.B. spoke of as Chohans.
4.
Fifteen of the
short rules that you find in the first part of this book, and fifteen in the
second part, are exceedingly old, and were written in the most ancient
Sanskrit. To these short sentences which are used as a basis for the
instruction of the disciple, the Chohan added other sentences, which now form
part of the book, and are always to be read along with them, to supply
complementary ideas without which the reader might be led astray. All the rules
in both parts of the book, except the thirty short aphorisms, were written by
the Chohan who gave it to the Master Hilarion. The following table shows the fifteen
short rules in Part I as they existed in the exceedingly ancient manuscript;
the number at the beginning of each is the original one, but the number at the
end is that which appears in the modern book.
|
I II III |
Kill out ambition. Kill out desire of life. Kill out desire of comfort. |
1 2 3 |
|
IV V VI |
Kill out all sense of
separateness. Kill out desire of sensation. Kill out the hunger for
growth. |
5 6 7 |
|
VII VIII IX |
Desire only that which is
within you. Desire only that which is
beyond you. Desire only that which is
unattainable. |
9 10 11 |
|
X XI XII |
Desire power ardently. Desire peace fervently. Desire possessions above
all. |
13 14 15 |
|
XIII XIV XV |
Seek out the way. Seek the way by retreating
within. Seek the way by advancing
boldly without. |
17 18 19 |
5.
It will be
noticed from the above table (which covers only Part I of the book) that rules
4, 8, 12, 16, 20 and 21 are absent from the list. That is because they do not
belong to the most ancient part of the book. Those rules and the preliminary
and concluding comments are the portion added by the greater One who gave it to
the Master. In addition there are notes, which were written by the Master
Hilarion Himself. The book as originally published in 1885 contained these
three portions: the aphorisms from the ancient manuscript, the additions of the
Chohan, and the notes of the Master Hilarion. All these were written down by
Mabel Collins, who acted as the physical instrument, as the pen that wrote it. The
Master was Himself the translator of the book, and He impressed it upon her
brain. His was the hand that held the pen. Then there subsequently appeared in Lucifer
under the title of “Comments” a few articles which were written by Mabel
Collins under the influence of the Master, and which are exceedingly valuable,
worth reading and studying.
6.
Now, taking up the
book itself, we first find the following statement:
7.
These rules
are written for all disciples: Attend you to them.
8.
A distinction is
made here between the world and the disciples; this is not a book intended for the
world in general. The word disciple is to be considered in two senses – the
uninitiated and the initiated. In reading the book carefully we can trace the
two distinct lines of teaching clothed in the same words; each sentence
contains a double meaning, one intended for the more and the other for the less
advanced. We will try to trace them out when we come to the preliminary
statements. The second part of the treatise appears to be intended entirely for
the initiated disciple, but this duality runs through the first part.
9.
Many persons not
yet approaching discipleship entirely misunderstand these rules, and often
criticize them as holding up^ an ideal which is hard and wanting in sympathy.
This is constantly the case when an ideal is presented which is too high for
the reader. No person is helped by an ideal, however noble in itself, which to him
is not attractive; it is a practical lesson for dealing with human beings that
we should put before them only such ideals as may attract them. With all books
of this kind that which a man gets out of them is what he brings to them; his
understanding depends upon his own power to answer to the thoughts which they
contain. Even material things exist for us only if we have developed the organs
which can respond to them; hence at the present time there are hundreds of
vibrations playing upon us to which we are incapable of giving heed. Sir
William Crookes once illustrated this very well when he was trying to show how
circumscribed was our knowledge of electricity, and how great therefore was the
possibility of progress in electrical science. He said that it would make an
enormous difference to us, would in fact revolutionize our ideas, if we had
organs answering to electrical vibrations instead of eyes sensitive to light
vibrations. In dry air we should not be conscious of anything, for it does not
conduct electricity. A house made of glass would be opaque, but an ordinary
house would be transparent. A silver wire would look like a hole or tunnel in
the air. What we know of the world thus depends upon our response to its
vibrations. Similarly, if we cannot answer to a truth, it is not truth for us.
So, when dealing with books written by occultists we can only catch their
thought in proportion to our own spiritual advancement. Any part of their
thought which is too subtle or too high simply passes by us as if it were not
there.
10.
Much more can be
got out of this book by meditation than by mere reading; its greatest value is
that it gives directions to our meditation. Pick out a single sentence and then
meditate upon it; stop the working of the lower mind and awaken the inner
consciousness which comes directly in contact with the thought. One may thus
get away from images of the concrete mind to a direct perception of the truth. Meditation
thus enables one to obtain in the brain a large amount of the direct knowledge
of the truth which the ego has acquired in his own worlds. Still, a man who
meditates, but does not read or listen to a teacher as well, although he is
sure to progress on the spiritual plane, will do so only slowly. If he had had
the additional advantage of reading or listening, he would advance far more rapidly.
The lecture or study can tune the brain of the student so that it will obtain
more knowledge through meditation. But for a man who only listens or reads, and
does not meditate, hardly any advancement is possible, and progress is
exceedingly slow. Both should be combined; much meditation and a little hearing
or reading will carry a man far indeed.
11.
C.W.L. – On the
title-page of the first edition of Light on the Path, published in 1885,
it is described as: “A treatise written for the personal use of those who are
ignorant of ‘ the Eastern Wisdom, and who desire to enter within its influence.”
But the book itself begins with the statement that these rules are written for
all disciples. The latter description is surely the more accurate one, as the
history of the book will show.
12.
As we have it at
present it was dictated by the Master Hilarion through Mabel Collins – a lady
well known in Theosophical circles, who at one time collaborated with Madame
Blavatsky in the editorship of Lucifer. The Master Hilarion had in turn
received it from His own Teacher, the Great One who among Theosophical students
is sometimes called the Venetian. But even He was the author of only a part of
it. It has passed through three phases; let us set them down in order.
13.
It is but a small
book even now, but the first form in which we have seen it is smaller yet. It
is a palm-leaf manuscript, old beyond computation; so old that even before the
time of Christ men had already forgotten its date and the name of its writer,
and regarded its origin as lost in the mists of prehistoric antiquity. It
consists of ten leaves, and on each leaf are written three lines only, for in a
palm-leaf manuscript the lines run along the page, not across it as with us.
Each line is complete in itself – a short aphorism – and the language in which
they are written is an archaic form of Sanskrit.
14.
The Venetian
Master translated these aphorisms from Sanskrit into Greek, for the use of His
Alexandrian pupils, of whom the Master Hilarion was one, in His incarnation as
Iamblichus. Not only did He translate the aphorisms, but He added to them
certain explanations, which we shall do well to take along with the original.
For example, if we look at the first three aphorisms, we shall see that the
paragraph marked 4, which follows them, is clearly intended as a commentary on
them; so we should read it thus: “Kill out ambition; but work as those work who
are ambitious. Kill out desire of life; but respect life as those do who desire
it. Kill out desire of comfort; but be happy as those are who live for
happiness.”
15.
In the same way
rules, 5, 6 and 7 form a group, followed by 8, which is a comment by the Chohan
– and so on far into the book. These groups of three are not put so by mere
coincidence, but intentionally. If we examine them we shall find that there is
a certain bond between the three in each case. For example, the three rules grouped
together above point to purity of heart and steadiness of spirit. One may say
that they indicate what the man must do with himself, what is his duty to himself
in the way of preparation for work.
16.
The second set of
three aphorisms (numbers 5 to 8) states that we are to kill out all sense of
separateness, desire for sensation, and the hunger for growth. They indicate
man’s duty to those around him socially. He must realize that he is one with
others. He must be willing to give up selfish and separate pleasures. He must
kill out the desire for personal growth, and work for the growth of the whole.
17.
In the next set
of three (numbers 9 to 12) we are told what to desire – that which is within
us, that which is beyond us, and that which is unattainable. These are clearly
a man’s duty to his Higher Self. Then follow aphorisms (13 to 16) on the desire
for power, peace and possessions. Those are all desires which fit us for the work
of the Path. The next group of rules (17 to 20) tell the aspirant how to seek
the way.
18.
The rules now
numbered 4, 8, 12, etc., are explanations and amplifications by the Venetian Master.
They, with the original aphorisms, formed the book as it was first published in
1885, for the Master Hilarion translated it from Greek into English and gave it
in that form. Almost immediately after it was printed. He added to it a number
of most valuable notes of His own. For that first edition those notes were
printed on separate pages, the backs of which were gummed so that they might be
attached at the beginning and the end of the little book which bad just passed
through the press. In further editions, those notes have been inserted in their
appropriate places.
19.
The beautiful
little essay on Karma which appears at the end of the book is also from the hand
of the Venetian Master, and was included in the book from the first edition.
20.
The archaic
Sanskrit manuscript which was the basis of Light on the Path was also
translated into Egyptian; and many of the explanations of the Venetian Master
have more the ring of Egyptian than of Indian teaching. Therefore, the student
who can enter to some extent into the spirit of that old civilization will find
it a great help to his understanding of this book. The conditions
which surrounded us in ancient Egypt were radically different from those of the
present day. It is almost impossible to make people understand them now; yet if
we could get back into the mental attitude of those ancient times we should
realize a very great deal which now, I am afraid, we miss. We are in the habit
of thinking too much of the intellect of the present day, and are fond of
boasting of the advance we have made beyond the old civilizations. There
undoubtedly are certain points in which we have advanced beyond them, but there
are other matters in which we are by no means at their level. The comparison is
perhaps a little unfair, however, because as yet ours is a very young civilization.
If we go back three hundred years in the history of Europe, and especially the
history of England, we find a state of affairs which seems very uncivilized indeed.
When we compare these three hundred years, including the one hundred and fifty
years of scientific development which have played so large a part in our
civilized history, with the four thousand years through which the Egyptian civilization
flourished practically unchanged, we see at once that ours is a very small
affair. Any civilization which has lasted as long as four thousand years has
had an opportunity to try all sorts of experiments and to obtain results which
we have not had yet, so it is not fair to compare us at our beginning with any
of the great civilizations at their zenith.
21.
Our fifth
sub-race has by no means reached its highest point or its greatest glory, and
that point when reached will be a definite advance upon all other
civilizations, especially in certain respects. It will have its own
characteristics and some of them may seem to us less pleasing than those of the
earlier civilizations, but on the whole it will be an advance, because the
successive races are like the tide when the waves are coming in. Each comes in
and recedes, and the next one comes in just a little further. They all have
their rise and climax, and their decay. With us the tide is still rising, so we
have not yet the settled order in certain respects that they had in some of the
older civilizations. We are, unfortunately, far as yet from the realization of
unselfishness – from the feeling that the community as a whole is the chief
thing to be considered and not the individual. That was attained in some of the
older civilizations to an extent which would make it seem to us now a kind of
Utopia, but on the other hand we are growing into possession of powers which
those older peoples did not possess. There was a short period in the early
history of Rome when “none was for the party and all were for the State”, as
Macaulay put it. Pythagoras, speaking to the people at Taormina, told them that
the State was more than father and mother, more even than wife and child, and
that every man should always be ready to give up his own thoughts, feeling and
wishes for the sake of unity – for the res publica, the original of ‘republic’,
the common weal or well-being of the whole, to which every one should be
willing to sacrifice his personal interests. In England, too, in the days of
Queen Elizabeth, there was a period of such true patriotic feeling and
activity.
22.
I do not mean
that in ancient Egypt or in ancient Greece, or anywhere else in the world, all
the people were unselfish. Not by any means, but all educated people took a very
much wider view, a much more communal view of life than we do. They thought
very much more of the State and much less of their individual welfare or
progress. We shall attain to that too, and when we do we ought to realize it
more fully than any of the ancient races, and also bring to it some development
which the older races had not.
23.
If, then, we
could get back into that old Egyptian outlook, we should understand Light on
the Path very much better. The student will do well to try to produce that attitude in himself
in his study of it, so that it may help him to put himself into the place of
those who studied it in the older times.
24.
It is easy for
some of us who have undergone the training that enables us to remember our past
lives. I remember my own last incarnation in Greece, where I took part in the
Eleusinian Mysteries, and another life much earlier in which the great
Mysteries of Egypt, of which some remnants still exist in Freemasonry, figured largely,
and that enables me to get more good out of such books as this than I could
without such memory. Even impressions from the past, giving a sense of atmosphere,
are a great help. Egyptian or Indian, there is no more precious gem in our
Theosophical literature – no book which will better repay the most careful and
detailed study.
25.
As already
explained, Light on the Path was the first of three treatises which
occupy an unique position in our Theosophical literature, as they give
directions from Those who have trodden the Path to those who desire to tread
it. I remember that the late Swami T. Subba Row once told us that its precepts
had several layers of meaning – that they could be taken over and over again as
directions for different stages. First, they are useful for the aspirants – those
who are treading the probationary path. Then they begin all over again at a
higher level for him who has entered upon the Path proper through the portal of
the first of the great Initiations. And yet again, when Adeptship has been attained,
it is said that once more, in some still higher sense, these same precepts may
be taken as directions for one who presses onwards to still higher
achievements. In this way, for the man who can understand it in the whole of
its mystic meaning, this manual carries us farther than any other. These books
which are definitely written for the quickening of the evolution of those who
are on the Path put forward ideals which men in the world are usually not prepared
to accept. Even among students there may be some who wonder at the form in
which the teaching is given. The only way to understand it is to take it for
granted and try to live it. In At the Feet of the Master it is said that
it is not enough to say that it is poetic and beautiful; a man who wishes to
succeed must do exactly what the Master says, attending to every word and
taking every hint. That is equally true of this book. The man who does not try
to live according to the teaching will constantly come up against points in it
which will ruffle him – with which he will find himself quite out of agreement;
but if he tries to live it, the sense in which it is to be taken will
eventually dawn upon him. Any honest effort really to live the teaching always throws
light on it, and that is the only way in which this priceless pearl can be
appreciated
26.
In such books
there is a great deal more meaning than the actual words convey. Therefore to a
large extent each man gets’ out of them what he brings to them-he brings the
power to assimilate a certain part of their message and obtains only that part.
Merely to read these books, even to study them, is therefore not enough; it is
necessary to meditate over them as well. If one takes the passages that sound a
little difficult-the cryptic, mystical, paradoxical statements-and thinks and
meditates over them, one gets a great deal more out of them, although often one
can hardly express it.
27.
I try to express
what occurs to me with regard to these different points, what they have meant
to me but I am conscious all the time that I am not at all fully conveying my
meaning. I know, very often, I cannot express the whole idea that is in my mind;
when I put it into words it sounds quite commonplace, and yet I can see for
myself a vast amount of higher meaning. I see that perhaps with my mental body.
The same thing is true at each level. In addition to what we can realize with the
mental body, there is still more that can be realized only with the causal body
and through intuition Whatever we express, there will always be something
deeper still budding and coming to flower within us. That man is only an
expression of the Eternal, and that nothing that is out of the Eternal can aid
us, is true, and it is the truth upon which the three writers of this book
constantly insist.
CHAPTER
2
THE FOUR PRELIMINARY STATEMENTS
28.
Before the
eyes can see they must be incapable of tears.
29.
A.B. – This
is the first of four statements which describe the four qualifications
preliminary to the Path proper. They describe true sight, true hearing, true speech
and true standing in the presence of the Master, that is to say, true ability
to serve mankind under His direction.
30.
This and the
following three statements are intended for two classes of disciples. In the
first class are those who are on the probationary path, and are therefore being
taught to get rid of all that we speak of as the personality; these preliminary
instructions are intended to show them that they must begin by eliminating the
lower self. In the second class are those who are already initiated. Something
more is demanded from them. They must get rid of their individuality, the
reincarnating ego, so that at the end of the Path their life will be entirely
under the direction of the Monad. We shall see therefore that each of these
four statements can be taken as affecting the personality or the individuality,
and according to the position of the student who is trying to live out their
teaching will be the point of view from which he will understand them.
31.
It is worth while
to notice and remember that these statements can be taken from two quite different
points of view in another way also. These teachings come from Masters of the White
Lodge, but exactly the same statements are made by those who follow the black
magic of the dark side of life, whom we sometimes speak of as the Brothers of
the Shadow or of Darkness. There are two ways in which the eyes may become
incapable of tears, and according to his motive will be the path along which
the aspirant will go. One way is that of the man who aspires to become a
disciple of the dark side; he will take this statement as teaching complete
indifference to pleasure and pain by means of hardening the heart and avoiding
all sympathy. Anyone who tries to become incapable of tears by killing out all feeling
will be going towards the dark path. The man on the other way is becoming incapable
of tears only as far as his own personal sorrows are concerned. His own lower
nature does not move him, but he is fully awake to the feelings of others. Only
at his peril can a man become indifferent to the sufferings of others.
32.
We may contrast
the two ways in a table:
|
Dark
Path |
White
Path |
|
1. Shuts out all feeling of sorrow. |
Increases the power of feeling until it responds to
every vibration of others. |
|
2. Puts up a wall round oneself, to shut out all sorrows. |
Throws down every wall or barrier that separates and
prevents one from feeling the sorrows of others. |
|
3. Fundamentally contracts the life. |
Expands the life, as one tries to pour oneself into
the lives of others. |
|
4. Leads to death, and destruction, and avichi. |
Leads to life, immortality, and nirvana. |
33.
The fundamental
difference between the two ways is that the first tends towards separateness
all the time, and ends up in a condition of absolute isolation, while the
second aims constantly at union, and ends in a state of perfect unity.
34.
The aspirant on
the white path has gradually to eliminate everything in himself which can receive
from the outer world anything which he feels as pain affecting himself,
anything which shakes him through his personality, any sorrow or trouble of any
kind which works upon him as concerning his personal self. He must reach a
point where he is incapable of feeling sorrows for his own separate interest.
In fact, he is to aim at making his kamic sheath entirely a vehicle of the
Higher Self, with no independent life of its own. It is to have neither
attractions nor repulsions, neither desires nor wishes, neither hopes nor fears
– the whole of that is to be eliminated. This should not convey the mistaken
idea that the sheath is to be destroyed; but it must cease to respond on its
own account to impressions from the outer world. Only the separated life must
be killed out, but the sheath must be kept for use in the service of humanity.
35.
This change that
the disciple must make in his own character is definitely shown in the constitution
of the sheath. In the ordinary disciple it is constantly changing its colours; but
when it is purified and all the separate life is purged away it remains a
colourless and radiant vehicle, only affected by the reflections that come from
the inner life; it has then no colour of its own, but only that which is thrown
upon it from the Higher Self, it resembles the appearance of the moon on water
– a pearly radiance, in which there is a certain play which can hardly be
called colour. This change takes place very gradually in the astral body of the
disciple while he is working at the difficult task of making himself responsive
to all the sorrows of his fellow-men, but more and more indifferent to all
which affects himself. It would be very easy for him to kill out every feeling,
but to become increasingly sensitive to the feelings of others and at the same
time not to permit any personal feelings to come in, is the much more difficult
task set before the aspirant. As he goes on with the work, however, he will find
that his selfish emotions quietly disappear as they become converted into unselfish
emotions.
36.
The disciple may
test the quality and genuineness of his sympathy by looking to see whether or
not he feels it when the suffering of others is not intruded upon his notice.
If you see a person suffering, or if you come across a case of gross ill-usage,
no doubt you feel pain, but do you feel the same pain when the person is not
before your sight? Our sympathy is an exceedingly poor thing if it is excited
only by the sight of suffering. Send a person out into a great city like
London, and he may be terribly affected by the suffering that he sees around
him; but take him away from it all and he will soon forget the miseries he has
witnessed and will become perfectly happy. The disciple has to learn to live as
if the whole of that suffering were present before him all the time; to relieve
it must be the motive of his work.
37.
No one has
reached the stage where he is responsive to the great cry of pain, spoken of in
The Voice of the Silence?1 (1 Ante.,
p. 424.) unless his motive in life is to help humanity whether
the suffering be before his eyes or not, for that is the real motive-power of a
disciple. The best way to get rid of personality, to grow indifferent to one’s
own personal joys and sorrows, to become incapable of tears, is to let the mind
think upon the sorrow of the world and the ways of helping it; that causes the
personal self to be seen in its true place beside the larger self of the great
orphan humanity.
38.
When the disciple
passes through Initiation and begins to develop the buddhic consciousness, this
incapacity for tears takes on a new character. He then begins to understand the
word evolution, to realize that in man it means the unfoldment of the higher
triad; then he begins to see the real use and object of all the suffering and pain.
He gradually becomes incapable of tears because he understands the value of the
suffering to those who are undergoing it, because he sees that when pain comes to
a man it does so as an absolute necessity for the higher development of his soul.
It is true that theoretically the man might have avoided that suffering if he
had acted wisely in the past, for it is the result of his past karma when it is
not produced by his present follies; but the practical aspect of the matter is
that the man has been foolish, has elected to learn through this kind of
experience instead of through wisdom, because he has not always chosen to
follow the best he knew, and now he is suffering, and the pain is bringing him
wisdom for the future, and is thereby promoting his evolution.
39.
Realizing this,
the disciple reaches a condition in which he may be described as full of the
most perfect sympathy but without regret. The sense of regret comes in only
when the consciousness is unillumined by the buddic life. When the buddhic
consciousness is felt, the disciple’s sympathy increases enormously, but his regret
disappears, and as he rises higher this wider view makes him incapable of
tears, because in the face of the bitterest suffering to which he is learning
to respond and to feel in himself, he feels also its object and end. He can
share in the suffering to the full, but without the slightest wish that it
should be anything other than it is. The absence of any wish to get rid of the
suffering before it has done its work, can only exist when the consciousness
has buddhic illumination. That is the condition which has been described as the
Christ state. The law is good and the will of the Supreme is perfect, and the
suffering works for a perfect end; therefore the disciple is filled with
content and satisfaction; he feels the suffering, but of grief and sorrow he
feels none at all.
40.
When the disciple
reaches this stage his consciousness has become part of the life of the world.
If he thinks of himself as “I” it is as part of that “I” in which all other “Is”
also exist. Now there is for him nothing which is outside or separate from
himself; he identifies himself with the one great life in whatever stage it may
be, whenever it is in need of help. He entirely loses the sense, which is so
common in the world, of some people being outside; he is in all and with all.
41.
This realization
of union makes an enormous difference to the help that the man is able to give
to the world. When he is helping any person he feels his troubles as his own,
not as the difficulties of another, separate from himself. He sees them exactly
as that person does; therefore instead of assisting him from the outside he is
helping him from within. There is a world of difference between the help given
by one from the outside and that which is given from within; the former is a
temporary and adventitious aid, but the inside help adds to the power of the
man’s life.
42.
The disciple can
reach this state only because he has cultivated sympathy, has learnt to
identify himself with the joys and sorrows of others, has made his own life a
life common to all. Without that, this loss of separateness would be
unattainable. The only incapability of tears that he has to know is that which
makes him indifferent to the things that touch the personal self, but leaves
him keenly alive to all that affects the other souls around him.
43.
C.W.L. – Our
President has explained with regard to the first four statements in this book,
beginning “Before the eyes can see they must be incapable of tears,” that they may
be taken in quite a wrong way, and are then as acceptable to the black magician
as to ourselves. He would understand them to mean that he must kill out all
feeling, build himself into a shell and shut the sorrows and the troubles of
the world outside it. That is exactly the opposite of the teaching given to the
pupil on the white path, who is taught to increase his power of feeling until
he attains perfect sympathy with the sufferings of his fellow-men.
44.
We hear a good
deal about the black magicians, but I fancy that few people know much about
them. I have met many specimens of the genus, and can therefore claim to know
something of their nature and methods. Some of them are very interesting
people, but by no means desirable acquaintances. There are many different types
who are classed under the general title of black magician. For instance, the
negroes in South Africa and in the West Indies, and probably the aborigines of
Australia, practise a good deal of petty black magic. It is a very poor thing;
even they themselves admit that it does not work on white people. One has heard
of certain cases in which they have succeeded in making white people
exceedingly uncomfortable, but one must add that it was made possible by the
kind of life those people led. Such magic depends for its success largely upon
the fear of the people upon whom the incantations are laid, yet it is a real
enough thing in its feeble way. These primitive people have certain drugs, they
know how to hypnotize, and they have power over some low-class earth-spirits
and similar entities. They contrive to cause sickness to a man, or in his family,
or among his flocks and herds, or to blast his gardens and fields so that they
will not bear crops; though in the latter case they are not above aiding their
magic sometimes by saltpetre as well.
45.
There is another
set of people, somewhat more dignified, who are pursuing occult power for their
own ends. They have learnt a certain amount of occultism – sometimes quite a
good deal – but they are using their power selfishly. They often contrive to
gain money and position by such means, and to maintain themselves in that
position until they die. After their death they sometimes make an attempt to
carry on the same general line, but it meets with indifferent success, and
their plans break down; every thing sooner or later fails them and they fall
back into a condition of considerable misery.1 (1 Ante., p. 501.) A life such as that means quite a definite step back
for the ego.
46.
Yet another and
more advanced type of black magician does not desire anything for himself. He
does not seek to obtain money or power or influence or anything of that sort,
and that at once makes him very much more powerful. He leads a pure and
self-controlled life, just as some of our own people might do, but he has set
before himself the goal of separateness. He wants to keep himself alive on
higher planes, free from absorption into the Logos; he looks with horror upon
that which for us is the greatest felicity. He wishes to maintain his own
position exactly as it is, and furthermore he claims that he can do it, that
the human will is strong enough to withstand the cosmic will up to a certain
point. I have met men like that, and our President, who is always trying to
save even the most unlikely souls, has set herself once or twice to convert
people who have got themselves into that condition, so as to bring them round
to our way of thinking – though not with very much success, I am afraid. She sometimes
says to them: “You know what the end will be. You know quite enough of the laws
of nature, and you are sufficiently intelligent to see whither your path is
leading you. It is quite certain that in the end you must collapse. When this manvantara
ends, when this planetary chain is over you will be absorbed, whether you will
or not, into the Logos at higher levels, and what will be your condition then?”
47.
“You do not
actually know that,” they reply, “yet we admit that that appears to be
what will happen. But we tell you frankly that we do not care. We are well
satisfied with our present position; we are able to maintain our individuality
against any effort to draw us into the Logos for a very long time, even till
the end of the manvantara. Whether we can hold it after that we do not know,
and we do not care. Whether we can or not, we shall have had our day.”
48.
That is an
arguable position, and the man who adopts it may be not exactly a good man, but
he need not be a bad man, in the ordinary sense of the word. He certainly has a
great deal of satanic pride in his composition, but he is not necessarily
spiteful nor evil-minded with regard to other people. Still he is absolutely
unscrupulous. Anyone who happened to get in his way he would brush aside with
far less consideration than we should give to a mosquito. But to a man who did
not stand in his way he might be quite a good friend, and there is not
necessarily any active evil in his composition. He is not at all a monster of
evil, but he is a man who has struck out a line for himself, and is following
it at the cost of all that to us means progress. That is all we have a right to
say against him. We are confident that he will end in great disaster; he is not
so sure of that, and in any case he is willing to face it.
49.
As a rule these
people are sufficient unto themselves, and they distrust and despise everybody
else. That is always characteristic of anyone who is on the dark path; he is
right and everybody else is wrong. He looks down on everybody else. People talk
sometimes about a black brotherhood. There is no such thing. There could not be
any true brotherhood among them, but they do occasionally join together in face
of an imminent peril or when something threatens any of their plans. At best it
is a very loose alliance, formidable only because of the tremendous power that
some of them possess. It does happen now and again that? the work that some of
our Masters are doing for the evolution of the world crosses their tracks, and
then they become formidable enemies. They cannot touch our Masters – I think
that must be very irritating to them – but they sometimes get hold of one of
Their pupils, and so cause Them a little trouble or some disappointment, if we
can suppose that a Master would feel disappointment.
50.
The reason of all
the warnings given to us to beware of these people is that we shall find them
trying sometimes to mislead us. Madame Blavatsky, who knew a great deal about
them and had a wholesome respect for them, rather gave the impression that they
were tempting demons who exult in evil for its own sake. This would be true
only of those at a lower level; the more powerful of them would consider it
quite undignified to exult in anything; but their plans, which are always entirely
selfish, may sometimes involve a great deal of harm to certain people. They are
as calm and self-contained and as passionless as any disciple of the Master; in
fact, they are more so, because they have killed out all feeling intentionally.
They would not injure a man merely for the sake of doing harm, but, as I said
before, in pursuit of some end of their own which his existence interferes with
they would not hesitate to sweep him out of their way. Those whose work it is
to assist people astrally sometimes come across their victims, and in that case
the man who tries to help often brings down upon himself also the determined
opposition of the black magician.
51.
To return to our
main topic. It is very difficult to learn to respond to feelings, and yet not
permit one’s personality to show itself in any way – to be in perfect sympathy
with the feelings of others, and yet have none our own. Many people are very
much disturbed by the sight of the suffering of others, but if they do not
actually see that suffering they forget it. Many of the richer people in a city
like London, for example, when taken to see the terrible misery in the slums,
are very much affected, and will at once do all they can to relieve the
particular cases that they see; yet the same people will go off to their
hunting and fishing and pleasure, and absolutely forget that there is any
misery. In that case the sorrow is only partly for the other person’s suffering;
it is largely merely the personal pain of having that suffering intruded on
their notice. That kind of sympathy is a poor thing – it is not real sympathy
at all.
52.
When we fully
realize the suffering of humanity we gradually lose sight of our own. We forget
that we have Personal sufferings because we see that the sufferings of humanity
are so great, and we realize that that which falls to our lot is after all only
our part of the general burden. A man who can get into that state of mind has already
very largely transcended his personality. He sorrows still for humanity, but no
longer for himself; he has become incapable of tears as far as his own personal
joys and sorrows are concerned.
53.
It is not an easy
matter to regard the sufferings of others accurately. The President and I some
years ago investigated the question of the influence of pain upon different people
undergoing what from the outside would be regarded as the same physical
suffering. We found that in an extreme case one person was suffering perhaps a
thousand times more than another, and that in ordinary life one might quite
often feel pain a hundred times more than another. If one.shows signs of
suffering and another does not, it must not be assumed that the latter is
necessarily braver or more philosophic. It may not be the case. We looked into
the question of the amount of suffering which was inflicted on different people
by the ignominies of prison life; to some persons they meant practically
nothing, to others the most intense mental and emotional suffering. So it is
futile to say: “I do not feel such and such a thing, and therefore other
persons ought not to feel it either.” One does not know to what degree or in
what proportion others are feeling. I have found that many things which do not
matter in the least to me may nevertheless cause serious pain to others; whereas
it has been quite the reverse as regards other things, such as unpleasant
sounds, for example which often cause acute suffering to those who are
developing their finer senses. I have seen our President in a condition of
positive agony when a great ammunition wagon went clanging by the house where
we were staying in Avenue Road, in London. This does not mean, of course, that
she lost control of her nerves. She has often explained that while the disciple
must increase his sensitiveness he must also control his nervous system, so as
to bear without flinching whatever pain or disturbance may come to him.1 1 Ante., pp. 172,
181.
54.
Before the
ear can hear it must have lost its sensitiveness.
55.
A.B. – The
disciple must become entirely indifferent to the opinions of others about
himself, as far as his own feelings are concerned. If they think and speak well
of him he is not to be elated; if ill, he is not to be depressed. Yet at the
same time he must not be indifferent to the opinions of others as they affect
the people who hold them. He is not, therefore, to be careless with regard to
the impressions which he makes upon others, for if he repels them by his
conduct he loses his power to help them.
56.
The disciple, in
the course of his progress, develops his psychic powers, and so becomes conscious
of what others are thinking about him; he is then living in a world in which he
may hear everything said about him, and may see every criticism in the mind of
another. He reaches this point when he has risen above all criticism, and is
not affected by the opinions of others. Some people are very anxious to develop
clairvoyance before they have reached this stage, but if they realized this fact
the astral consciousness which they so much desire would lose its attraction.
57.
C.W.L. – It must
not be thought that the developed person who hears uncomplimentary remarks
about himself and is profoundly indifferent to them deliberately nerves himself
against the feeling of irritation, and says: “That is all very dreadful, but I
refuse to care; I will not pay any attention to it.” He passes, no doubt
through a stage like that, but very soon he reaches a’ state where he absolutely
and utterly does not care when it is just like the twittering of birds, or like
the’ cicadas whistling in the trees – they may be a nuisance but that is all. He
does not pick out one particular cicada and listen to its tone alone, nor does
he single out the thought or the word of any one person who is saying something
silly.
58.
We must all try
to reach that stage. We are constantly putting ,t before people, because it is
the attitude of our Masters into whose “world” we are trying to go. They
may very properly think: “How can we hope to attain to the attitude of these
Great Ones?” Of course, no one can do it immediately, but we ought to be aiming
at it and trying to get as near to it as we can, and one of the ways of doing
that – a method which is really quite easy – is just not to mind in the least what
other people say.
59.
When we have
reached that attitude the next step is to think of the bad karma these people
are making in thinking or speaking wrongly about us. We may then regret it for
their sake, and for that reason it is well that we should endeavour not to give
more cause than we can help for foolish and depreciatory remarks – not in the
least because they matter to us, but because they make bad karma for the people
who indulge in them.
60.
Before the
voice can speak in the presence of the Masters it must have lost the power to
wound.
61.
A.B. – The
disciple must lose everything in himself which can give pain to another. In the
earlier stages he has to learn to eliminate from his speech all that can give
pain – not merely harsh criticism or unkind language, but every form of word
that hurts another by implying disparagement or drawing attention to a fault in
his character. It is true that some people are in a position in which it is
their duty sometimes to point out his fault to another; but it is a mistaken
view that he is justified in inflicting pain while doing so. When the fault is
pointed out in a perfectly friendly manner, the element of wounding is not
present. Whenever the speech wounds it is due to some imperfection in carrying
out the duty; the would-be helper has failed to identify himself with the
person addressed; he is giving advice only from the outside, and therefore it
hurts. If he had unified himself with the other person, and tried to help at
the same time feeling as he feels, he would have brought out the other person’s
emotion in a sympathetic way; through the consciousness of his sympathy the
other would have had his nobler and wider side awakened, and then the advice
would not have been wounding. If it is your duty to criticize another and you
find that it wounds him, look into yourself to find the imperfection that
caused the wound. If we are to lose the power to wound, the separate
individuality must go; when we feel ourselves as one life, it becomes
impossible for us to inflict suffering upon anything, as it is part of
ourselves. The way to reach that point of evolution is to begin by gradually
purifying the speech, taking the more salient faults first.
62.
C.W.L. – Anyone
who wishes to approach the Master must already have given up the desire to
wound others by his speech. But there is still the possibility of wounding
unintentionally and unconsciously, on account of want of sensitiveness. As we
go further and raise our consciousness to a higher level we shall more and more
understand how things strike others. Those who have been practising meditation
for many years will notice that they have become more sensitive, have made a
certain amount of progress towards unity, and therefore they understand the
people about them just a little better than those who have not made such an
effort. We hear someone make what we think an unfortunate remark, in all good
faith and without noticing that there is anything wrong with it and that they
have wounded somebody. We who have sharpened our senses just a little by
thought and study and the endeavour to live the higher life feel instinctively
how the third person will take that remark. We can see that it is an
unfortunate one, and wish it had been put in some other form.
63.
A Master could
not possibly say anything that would hurt another. He might find it necessary to
give something in the nature of a rebuke; but He would manage to put it in such
a way that the man would not be wounded by what He said. Sometimes a disciple
finds it in the line of his duty to act sternly, and he is tempted, through his
own feeling of sympathy, to avoid the task. But if the Higher Self asserts its
dominance he will, if it is absolutely necessary) speak sternly, but also
calmly and judicially, and without indignation.
64.
Before the soul
can stand in the presence of the Masters its feet must be washed in the blood
of the heart.
65.
A.B. – This
sentence has behind it a very long occult tradition, which has been given out
to the world in many ways. It has to do with the teaching of sacrifice, which
still appears in different religions in various forms, though they have
generally lost its true meaning. The expression used here is connected with
what is sometimes called the blood-sacrifice and the blood-covenant, of which
the strangest traces are to be found among the tribes which are descended from
very ancient races.
66.
In looking up
past lives we came across an incident which may be told to illustrate the idea
behind the blood-sacrifice and covenant. Very long ago He who is now the Master
Morya was a great king; he had an only son who was H.P.B., who as a boy was
placed in charge of the captain of the guard, who was Colonel Olcott. One day,
when the boy was alone with the captain, some conspirators who had plotted to
slay him rushed in and would have killed him, but the captain threw himself in between
and saved the boy at the cost of his own life. The youth was only stunned, but
the captain lay upon him dying, and as the blood poured from his death-wound he
touched it with his finger and placed it on the feet of the king. The king
asked: “What can I do for you who have given your life for me and my son?” The
dying captain replied: “Grant that your son and I may serve you in other lives
for ever.” Then the monarch said: For the blood which has been shed for me and
mine, the bond between us shall never be broken.” In the course of time the
king became a Master, and the bond between them remained and ripened into that
between Master and disciple, and it will remain for ever unbroken. In
sacrificing the life of the body the captain made a tie which gave him the true
life which the disciple gains from the Master.
67.
I mention the
story because it illustrates a great truth; just in proportion as we are strong
enough to sacrifice whatever to us is the life, to pour out the life-blood of
the lower at the feet of the higher, is the life really gained, not lost. All
evolution of young humanity is made by the voluntary sacrifice of the lower
life to the higher; when that sacrifice is completely made, it is found that
life instead of being lost is made immortal. The outer sign of the sacrifice
helped persons to understand the principle more readily, and drew attention to
the fundamental truth that it is only when the lower life is sacrificed to the
higher that it finds its own true fulfilment of evolution. On that truth the
sacrifices which are found in many religions were originally based; that is how
what is called the blood-bond is really made. The lower life is sacrificed for
the higher life, and the higher accepts the lower and lifts it up by the bond
that is never broken.
68.
The disciple must
wash his feet in the blood of the heart. He must make a complete offering of
everything, that he loves and values, of what seems to him his very life; but
he loses this only to find his higher life. It is not usually an actual
shedding of blood that is required, though that does become necessary
sometimes; it is symbolically the shedding of blood always so far as the pupil
is concerned at the time, because he feels the loss. He does literally
sacrifice what to him amounts to life, and it looks as though he were giving it
up completely, without any future possibility of regaining it. The great
testing of the completeness of the disciple’s sacrifice is made in order to
discover whether the soul is strong enough to throw itself voluntarily into
nothingness, to draw out the heart’s blood completely, without any hope of
reward. If the disciple is not strong enough to do that he is not ready to
stand in the presence of the Master. But if he can completely throw away everything
that he knows as his life, then all the testimony of the past and the truth of
the law declare that he will find that life again in a life stronger and higher
than that which be laid down. It is only when that sacrifice is made that the
disciple finds himself in the higher life, standing in the presence of the
Masters. Then the degree of his strength is the extent of his power to make the
sacrifice without feeling it.
69.
C.W.L. – The
meaning of this sentence is that the man who wishes to stand in the presence of
the Masters must have sacrificed the lower self to the higher. The feet of the
soul, the personality on earth, must be washed in the heart’s blood of the
emotions before the higher life can be gained.
70.
That is a general
law of life. The little child takes great pleasure in playing with its toys;
soon it grows up into boyhood, and the lower playthings have been outgrown and
put aside, in order that proficiency may be gained in the higher kind of
sports. When the youth goes to college he will many a time perhaps give up a
game in the fresh air, which he would very much prefer, in order to
work at his books. At other times he will put aside something he would very
much like to read, in order to slave at Greek verbs or other apparently
uninteresting and not very useful studies. If he goes into training for a race,
or for rowing, he has to sacrifice the enjoyment of good dinners, and live in a
frugal and rigid way until the race is over.
71.
On the occult
path many pleasures connected with the outer world are seen to be a waste of
time. There may be cases when it is a real effort to part with them, when there
is a call from the higher life, and the aspirant responds to that call at a
certain amount of cost to the lower nature. Then he must cast aside the lower
in order to have the higher; but later on the attraction of the lower will have
disappeared entirely. When a mart once fully realizes the higher, the lower
simply ceases to exist for him, but in many cases he has to cast aside the
lower before he really enters into the glory and the joy and the beauty of the
spiritual life.
72.
I have known many
whose opportunities were good but who shrank back just at that point, and
failed because they were not ready to give up all that they had previously
enjoyed, and apparently receive nothing in return for it. Sometimes a man is
afraid to let go of one thing until he can grasp the other, and so he holds
fast to the lower; but it does not satisfy him, because he has glimpsed the
higher. To give up everything at the Master’s call – one wonders whether one
could do it; one always thought and hoped that one would, but when it comes to
the point can you do it fully and cheerfully? Many have worked for years and
years, and wonder why they do not attain, why they are not among those whom the
Master is able to draw very close to Himself. The reason is always the same; it
is the personality in some form that keeps them back. This giving up of
everything is not a thing to be done with constant backsliding – giving up one
day, and grasping and trying to keep the next – nor is it to be done with
pride, with the pose: “I have given up everything.” That is quite the wrong
attitude; it should be done as a matter of course, and cheerfully. The person
who is going to succeed will feel that there is nothing else for him to do but
to make the great renunciation when the moment comes.
CHAPTER
3
THE FIRST RULE
73.
Kill out. ...
74.
A.B. – The
expression “kill out” appears at the beginning of the first six short rules. It
is important not to misunderstand it. There are two ways of getting rid of or
killing out an evil thought, an evil habit or an evil act. Let us consider the
thought first, because when that has been removed the other two very easily
follow. Suppose an evil thought comes into a man’s mind. He finds that it tends
to repeat itself. Then his first inclination is generally to fight with it to
throw his energy against it and violently turn it out, just as he would deal
with a physical enemy. He wants to get it out of the mind, so he takes it by
the shoulders and flings it out.
75.
That is not the
best way. It ignores the great law, which works throughout nature, that action
and reaction are equal and opposite. Take a ball and throw it against a wall;
it will rebound and strike you, gently if you have thrown it gently, but with
great force if you have flung it violently. The same principle is true
everywhere. Suppose you turn a thought out of the mind with violence; there
will be a decided reaction. The recoil will give you a definite sense of exhaustion,
and the thought may come back to you with increased force. The strength that
you have put out has then taken form as thought, and has come back to you
again, and you have to repeat the struggle. In that way a man may in some cases
fight for weeks and months and even years, and yet be none the better for it.
Still, in time it is possible to kill out evil thought by this means, though
with it you will also kill out a large amount of your own force and energy, of
your thought-power, so that a certain hardness and lack of responsiveness of
some area of the mental body will be the result of the struggle.
76.
The other way of
killing it out is to substitute for the bad thought a good thought of exactly opposite
nature. You first deliberately study the matter and decide what is the
opposite, the exact antithesis, of the evil thought. You formulate the new
thought quietly in your mind, and then, at the very moment when the evil thought
comes into your mind, you substitute for it the opposite good thought. Thus for
pride you might substitute kindness, for anger affection, for fear admiration,
and for low material desires thoughts of purity, dignity, honour, and the like;
or you might dwell with devotional thought upon the mental image of the Master
as having the good quality, and forget yourself in thinking of Him.
77.
The human mind
cannot concentrate on two separate things at once; so when you give your attention
to the good thought the result is that the evil thought is expelled without
your directing any force towards it. Thus no mental energy is wasted, no
vitality is lost. The good thought soon gains strength, and the mind becomes
impervious to the attacks of the bad thought, and irresponsive to its kind; so
you have practically killed out the evil by intensifying and vitalizing the
opposite good. It is as if we sucked the life out of the bad thought, and left
it a mere shell. Bad thoughts are most effectively killed by such
devitalization.
78.
We have thus two
ways of killing out; the former on the line of death, the latter on that of
growth. One is the plan which is chiefly used by those who are beginning to
tread the left-hand path, who are turning against the way of the divine Will.
The other is that of evolution in accordance with the divine Plan. We are free
to choose which we will follow of these two great roads. All the things of the
world are in evolution, moving on one or the other of these paths.
79.
Those parts of
the world in which Ishvara is developing His Image have a certain free will,
which consists-in their being able to work with the divine Will or away from it
as separate individuals. Those who work with Him ultimately tread the
right-hand path, but those who deliberately choose the separated self are
preparing themselves to tread the left-hand path. Speaking generally: all that
leads to isolation tends to turn a man’s direction to the left, and all that
tends to unity towards the right. People of the left-hand path kill out
sympathy, affection and love, because they find that those qualities bring
misery, and also stand in the way of their gaining power. The killing out
process is generally taken therefore by those who want to gain power and the
other things that they consider desirable in this life, for the firm
establishment and the enjoyment of the separated self, careless of the good of
the whole, entirely bent upon their own individual progress and gain. They will
kill violently all that side of their own nature the response to which would be
an obstacle in the path of power. They will kill out affection also, because it
is an avenue of pain, and it is far easier to become indifferent by killing out
affection than by becoming more and more sensitive.
80.
But the way we
have been taught is that of union, the path in which the disciple becomes responsive
to every cry of pain, as was so emphatically taught in The Voice of the
Silence.1 (1 Ante, Vol.
II, pp. 137-45) The disciple must intensify his
life, not minimize it; he must submit to the law, not fight against it. Then of
course the law will be with him. His method is something like that art of
wrestling which is taught in Japan, in which conquest is gained by yielding to
one’s antagonist; the man constantly yields to his opponent, but at the
critical moment he turns in such a way that the force of his antagonist tells
against himself. This is the nature of the yoga of the right-hand path; of it
Shri Krishna says in the Gita: “In this there is no loss of effort, nor
is there transgression.”2
2 Op.
cit., 11, 40.
81.
C.W.L. – Many
people, when they are told to kill out a desire, start making what may be described
as a violent raid upon it. They want to kill out a certain evil quality, so
they set themselves very strongly, angrily almost, against that quality. One
result of this is that one stirs up whatever forces exist, inside and outside,
which are tending in the opposite direction, into the most violent opposition
possible, and the consequence is a serious struggle. If a man is sufficiently
determined he will come out conqueror in the end, but in many cases he will
waste a large amount of his own force and energy and thought-power, and leave
himself much exhausted and depleted.
82.
I can testify
that the method of substitution works very much better, for I have tried both.
It is a sort of moral ju jutsu whereby you employ the force of the
hostile power to help you. You do not so much attack the foe as concentrate all
your attention on the opposite virtue. If for example, a man is inclined to be
readily upset and disturbed, he should not fight hard against that, but instead
should think constantly of calmness, of peace and philosophy. Presently that
thought will become established by habit, and he will find that the old worry
and lack of calmness have passed away without his making a desperate fight. If
he surrounds himself with thought-forms such as “Do not be irritable,” and so
on, they are still of the colour of irritability, and they react undesirably on
him. But if he thinks strongly, “Be calm, be gentle, be peaceful,” he sets up
vibrations appropriate to and productive of peace and harmony. We do not want
to set one vice to fight another vice, but we want to ignore all these things
and work up the opposite virtue; by doing that the effect will be just as good
and we shall achieve it with far less trouble.
83.
We say: “Kill out
desire,” but not, “Kill out emotion.”1 The higher emotions must be encouraged always, and
the stronger they are the better. Especially is this true of love and devotion,
which one should deliberately cultivate. When a man feels a great rush of such
an emotion as these his aura expands: his astral body becomes perhaps ten times
its normal size in the case of the ordinary person, and much more than that
when the man really knows how to use his higher vehicles. When the great
paroxysm of feeling is over the aura contracts again, but not exactly to what
it was before; having been much stretched it remains at least a little larger
than before. The first effect of the expansion is a rarefaction of the astral
body, but it very speedily draws in more astral matter to fill the larger
space, so as to make it up to about its normal density.
84. 1 See also ante. Vol. II, pp. 139-40.
85.
The astral body
is definitely needed in order that by means of it one may be able to sympathize
with people, and also because of its function as a reflector of the buddhic
body. In the case of a developed person there is no colour in his astral body
except what is mirrored from the higher planes; it only reflects and shows the
most delicate tints of colour.2
2 Ante, Vol. Ill, Chap, on The Four Preliminary Statements
86.
There are three
ways in which the higher Self is connected with the personality.3 (3
Ante. Vol. II, p. 333.) The higher mind is reflected
in the lower. The buddhi or intuition is reflected a stage lower than the mind,
in the astral body. There is also the possibility of connection between atma
and the physical brain. The last is the most difficult to understand; it shows
tremendous power of will, which moves without consideration of the means by
which its object is to be achieved. It is the method of the first ray, to which
Dr. Besant belongs. She has that great power of deciding that something shall
be done, without stopping to consider the methods to be employed until
afterwards. We do not know the limits of the human will. It has been said that
faith may remove mountains and cast them into the sea. I do not know whether
there would be any particular purpose to be served in doing that, if it can be
done, but I have certainly seen very wonderful results accomplished by the
human will and I do not know where the limits of that power are set. Incredible
things are done, more especially on the higher planes, by the mere action of
will. When I had to take up the study of materialization, for example, according
to my way of progress I had to learn exactly how it was to be done – a complicated
process involving a good deal of knowledge of the different materials to be
brought together and how they could best be arranged. But I have known a
person, who knew nothing whatever about it, to drive straight in by the
tremendous force of will and produce the same result, without gathering
together all the complicated things that were necessary, and without in the
least knowing how it was done. Such will is one of the divine powers latent in
all of us, but in very few does it ever come to the surface and
produce such a result without a long course of careful training.
87.
I think that for
most people the easiest of the three ways of making connection with the higher
Self is to bring together the higher and lower minds, by passing from concrete
to abstract thought, or from analysis to synthesis. But I have seen cases in
which a person has been able to reach the buddhic consciousness without
disturbing the relations between the mental and causal bodies at all. When it
can be done, I have heard on high authority that this unification of the
buddhic and astral bodies is the shortest of all roads to the goal, but the
capacity to do it is gained only as the result of much suffering in previous
lives. Those for whom that is the line raise themselves by the intensity of
their love of devotion into the buddhic vehicle and effect a junction there,
before they have developed the lower mind to anything like a level where it can
work in with the higher mind, and before they have developed the causal body
itself. Of course these two bodies must be developed, they cannot be overlooked;
the aspirant will work upon the lower mind from the astral body, developing it
and learning whatever has to be learnt, on account of his love and devotion.
The pupil loves his Master so intensely that for His sake he will learn what is
needed, and will thus develop whatever intellect is necessary. He also acts
upon the causal body from above, and pours into it the buddhic conception, and
so forces it to express that as far as it can do so in its own way.
88.
Kill out
ambition.
89.
A.B. – We
now turn to the first rule, dealing with ambition in particular. The undeveloped
man is strongly held by the attractions of the senses; he desires physical
luxury and bodily enjoyment. He does not feel ambition, which is the desire for
power, until the mind is highly developed and the intellectual power has grown strong.
The note of the intellect is “I”. It causes the man to feel himself separate, and
that invariably leads him to wish to exercise power, because that desire is the
self-assertion of the individual soul. He feels himself superior to all around
him, and that shows as a desire for physical authority. From that comes the temptation
to seek and grasp social and political power. In the political and social sphere
ambition is the great moving force; for the man who by his intellect has gained
influence over his fellow-men, stands out as their leader and this is a
position which is incense in the nostrils of the proud and superior man.
90.
Then the man
begins to despise outer power over the bodies of men, and there comes
into his mind the realization of a subtler form of power, which he now seeks to
obtain. He no longer wants to lay down laws with physical authority; he has the
subtler longing to dominate and rule the minds of men. That is intellectual
ambition – the ambition to be a leader of thought. It is not an ambition which
would move anyone who had not a largely developed intellect.
91.
Still later, when
that desire has been outgrown, ambition reappears in a yet subtler form, when
the man passes on into the spiritual life. He thinks of the spiritual progress
as made by himself for his own sake, because he wants to grow and
understand and progress; the old ambition is really still holding him, and it
is more dangerous because it is higher and subtler. That is why in the note to
this aphorism the Master makes the remarkable statement that the pure artist,
who works for the love of his work, is sometimes more firmly planted on the
right road than the occultist who fancies he has removed his interest from
self, but who has in reality only enlarged the limits of experience and desire,
and transferred his interest to things which concern his larger span of life.
The occultist is no longer confined to the ambitions of his present
incarnation, yet his ambition may not be dead. He no longer cares to be a
law-giver or ruler of mankind, nor even an arbitrator in the thoughts of men;
but he desires to be high in the spiritual world. He realizes that he is going
to live life after life, and his ambition extends to the whole span of that
greater life. He is still longing to be first, to be separate, to be what
others are not. Yet that too must be overcome.
92.
When one speaks
to those who desire to be part of the universal life, the very first thing that
one must tell them is to kill out that which makes for separateness. There
would, however, be no gain in putting such an ideal before the ordinary man. He
cannot leap at once from the worldly life into a spiritual life in which he is
in full activity, but nevertheless doing nothing connected with the personal or
the individual self. If you tell an ordinary man of the world to kill out
ambition, and if he does it, the effect will not be a desirable one, for he
will fall into lethargy and do nothing.
93.
Suppose a man is
further on than that, is on the probationary path; how should he read
this rule about ambition? Most wisely by applying the word kill to the lower
form of ambition; he should in fact understand it to mean transmute. He should
get rid of ambition for the things of the world, but put before himself
something higher for which he can be ambitious. That would be the desire for
spiritual knowledge and growth. At this stage a man does not get rid of
ambition totally; he enters an intermediate state, and will make great progress
if he puts before himself as his goal the attainment of spiritual knowledge and
the object of finding the Master and ultimately becoming a Master himself.
Really these are all ambitions, but they will help him to shake off many of the
lower shackles which enwrap his personality.
94.
This quality of
ambition which the disciple has to kill out had its uses in his earlier
evolution. It was a means to make the man’s individuality firm and steady. In
the earlier stages he grew by his isolation. It was then requisite for the
evolution of the physical and mental bodies that there should be competition
and fighting; all those stages of combat and fight were necessary in order to
build up the individual, to make him strong so that he could hold his own
centre. He had to have a place defended from outside aggression, in which he could
develop his strength. He also needed such worldly position as ambition seeks,
just as when you are building a house you need scaffolding. Ambition had many
uses in the earlier stages – to build up the walls and make them denser, to
strengthen the will, and to help to raise the man step by step. A man in whom
ambition predominates also kills out sexual and other lower desires, because
they hinder him in his intellectual growth and his search for power, and thus
he dominates his lower passions. In the early stage man thus needs ambition as
a means of growth.
95.
You would not say
to the man of the world: Kill out ambition,” because ambition stimulates him
and draws out his faculties. But when as a disciple the man is to grow into the
spiritual life, he must get rid of the walls that he built round himself in
earlier stages. As after a house is built the scaffolding must be taken away,
so the later part of the man’s evolution consists in rendering the walls translucent,
so that all life may pass through them. Therefore these rules are for
disciples, not for the men of the world.
96.
C.W.L. – Ambition
in the undeveloped man shows itself as the desire, let us say, to gain wealth
so that he may satisfy his craving for physical luxury and bodily enjoyment.
Later on, when he develops intellect, he becomes ambitious for power. Even when
a man has transcended the ambition for power and the prizes of this world, and
is working selflessly for the benefit of humanity, there still remains very
often the ambition to see the result of his work.
97.
Many people are
devoting their time quite willingly and quite earnestly to doing good work, but
they like others to know it, and to say what good and useful people they are.
That also is ambition; mild certainly as compared to some other kinds, but
still it is personal, and anything that is personal stands in the way of the
disciple. The lower self has to be eliminated entirely. It is hard to do it because
the roots are very deep, and when they are torn out the man is left bleeding,
and feeling as though all the heart were gone out of him.
98.
When we have got
rid of the desire to see the result of our work, we still have the desire for
recognition in a higher form. We still, perhaps, are ambitious for love; we
want to be popular. It is well and good for a man to be popular, to draw the
love of his fellows, because that very fact is an additional power in his
hands. It enables him to do more than he otherwise could, also it surrounds him
with a pleasant atmosphere which makes all sorts of work easier. But to desire
that in the sense of being ambitious for it is also a thing which we must
avoid. We may rightly be happy if love comes our way; that is well and good – it
is good karma; but if it does not, we must not be ambitious for it. We cannot
seize upon a person and say: “You shall love me, you shall appreciate
me.” If his feelings run that way he will; if not he cannot, and to pretend
would be worse than all.
99.
We have to rise
above all these stages of ambition which are still found in the ordinary world.
We must give for the joy of giving, whether it be work, or substance, or love
or devotion; whatever it is we must give freely and heartily, and never think
of any return; that is the only real love, not the sort of love which is always
saying: “How much does so-and-so love me?” The real attitude should be: “What
can I do to pour myself out at the feet of the one whom I love? Of what service
can I be? What can I do for him?” That is the only feeling that is worthy of so
grand a title. All that we know perfectly well, but we must put it into
practice. It seems to be difficult, sometimes, to do that, because there is
still a remnant of the lower self to be removed.
100.
For the ordinary
man – maybe even for the one who is approaching the Path – I think it would
perhaps be well to qualify this rule to some extent, and say: “Kill out the
lower ambitions.” It is not advisable to set before the man, who is just
beginning, a standard of conduct which he can only hope to reach after many
years of effort. If a man has worldly ambitions he cannot be expected at once
to drop them all and have nothing to fill their place; that would be scarcely
possible for him, and it is even doubtful whether so sudden a change would be
good for him. He must first transmute his ambitions. Let him, if he will, at
first desire knowledge earnestly, desire to make advance in occultism and
progress in unselfishness; let him desire to draw near to the Master, to be
chosen as a pupil.
101.
Most of us have
desires of that sort, but we call them aspirations; the change of name seems to
connote a total change in our attitude, but of course they are still desires.
We shall reach a stage when even those desires will disappear, because we shall
be absolutely certain that progress depends on our own efforts only; then we
shall no longer desire anything. The Master once said: “Do not desire a thing;
desire is feeble Will!”1 (1 Vol. I, Part V, Ch. 1: Liberation,
Nirvana and Moksha.) Do not think of some
quality you want to develop: “I should like to have it,” but say: “I will have it,” and go and develop it.
That is the only line for a man to take, because these things are absolutely in
his own hands to do or not, as he chooses.
102.
It is a case of
transmuting at first. The desire for spiritual growth is a thing that those who
are approaching the Path should no longer be encouraging in themselves, but
there is that intermediate stage when it is very natural. We who are students
ought to be getting to a stage at which we take our spiritual growth for
granted, and fix all our energies on trying to help others. At first a man does
need a personal motive; then he gradually comes to forget himself and to make
his advancement for the sake of the Master, for the sake of pleasing Him, and
eventually he learns that he is simply a channel for the great divine forces,
and that he must be a good channel and must have no anxiety whatever about the
result. His one care then is that nothing on his part shall hinder his being an
expression of the Divine – as perfect an expression as is possible for him. He
does not worry in the least about it; he does not desire that his force may be
used in this direction or that; he is simply a tool in the hands of God, that
he may be used as arid how and where God wills.
103.
Of course, we can
attain that attitude only by degrees; but we should set it before ourselves as
the state of mind at which we should aim. We must begin by forgetting
ourselves, by rigorously weeding the self out. What if we are not gaining the
advancement which we think to be due to us after so many years of thought and
study, or what if the people whom we help are not grateful for being helped – generally
they are not – all that does not matter.1
(1 Vol. I, Part III, Ch. 2: The One Good Desire.) Let us forget ourselves and do the work and let us
be entirely indifferent as to any return. Karma will look after that; we need
have no fear. The great laws of the universe are not going to be altered in
order to do an injustice to any one of us, we may be quite sure. They will work
with equal balance; justly they work, even though it be after many days. Forget
yourself; that is the first and the last word of advice on the occult Path
– there is no other way. However hard it may seem it has to be done, and has to
be done perfectly.
104.
We come now to
the first note of the Master Hilarion, which is attached to the first rule. I
will take it bit by bit. It begins:
105.
Ambition is the first curse; the great tempter of the
man who is rising above his fellows. It is the simplest form of looking for
reward.
106.
That is rather a
curious way of putting it, but it is obviously true. The first temptation that
comes to a man who knows he is
rising a little above the rest in some way is to think of himself as a great man, and this leads him to
resolve that he will rise still further, so that he may enjoy the pleasure of
his pride even more.
107.
Men of
intelligence and power are led away from their higher possibilities by it
continually.
108.
How true that is
no one can know who is not clairvoyant. Those who are pupils of the Masters
necessarily, I suppose, have the habit of regarding all the people they meet
more or less from the point of view of their possible discipleship. One sees a
man who is in some ways obviously a good man; the first thought that comes into
one’s mind about him is: “How near is he to the point when he can become a
pupil of the Master?” To us it is the greatest reward, the most precious piece
of advancement that can come to any man, that he should reach the stage where
he is worth taking in hand by one of these Great Ones, so that his future
evolution may be assured. Attainment is after that merely a matter of time and,
of course, of perseverance and much hard work.
109.
Though it is
quite true that for every human being progress is merely a question of time,
for many human beings it is clearly a matter of so very much time that they may
be taken en bloc, so to speak, dealt with in the mass; but the moment
that a man comes near to the stage when conceivably a Master might take him in
hand, he also becomes an object of very keen interest to the pupils of the
Master, and their desire is always to try to help him to the point where
definite contact may become possible. It should always be remembered that it is
merely a question of the man’s deserts in the matter; there is no favouritism
of any kind. The moment it is worth the Master’s while to expend as much energy
as would be required to teach that man He will do so, but it is only worth His
while when He will be able to do more work through the man than He Himself
could do with the same energy devoted to other work.
110.
We meet a large number
of people who seem as though they were not far from that point. They are so
good in one way or another, and some are so hopeful all round, that it seems to
us that surely with a very little more of the right direction of their energies
they would be fit for discipleship – and then we are disappointed to find that
it all comes to nothing and they spend their lives in the ordinary way. Most
especially I have noticed that with boys and girls, among whom it has always
been my lot to have to look for hopeful cases. There are many young people who
are quite near the point where, if their energies were just turned in the right
direction, they would make very good subjects indeed for such progress, and yet
they fail to grasp the opportunity. They get drawn into the competition of ordinary
school life, and are swept into a world of lower thought. It is not bad
thought, I do not mean that – though that may happen sometimes – but they are
swept into a sort of whirlpool of comparatively worldly thought. The goal put
before them is generally that of success in some material way – to become great
engineers or great lawyers, or to succeed at the head of some mercantile house.
111.
Not only is a
worldly career expected of them by their parents, but the general trend of
public opinion also influences them in that direction, and it is very hard to
escape from the effect of public opinion. It is pressing upon us all the time
in all directions, and so it comes about that these young people, who seem so
nearly ready for the higher thing, seldom reach it. Instead they take up a very
estimable and useful career, but it is just not that higher thing. I have
followed up some cases that seemed to me specially likely, and I have found
that the same thing has sometimes occurred to egos for a number of
incarnations. For a dozen or twenty incarnations they have been very nearly
ready, within measurable distance of taking that great step, but each time they
have turned aside from it, and practically always it has been worldly ambition
that has led them away from their higher possibilities.1 1
Vol. I, Fart II, Ch. 3: Right and Wrong.
112.
When the Master
Hilarion says that men of intelligence and power are continually led away from
their higher possibilities by ambition, I think He must have had cases in mind
very similar to those which I have just described, because those to whom the
higher possibilities lie open must necessarily be men of intelligence and
power, not mere ordinary men. He does not say that ambition ruins their lives,
but only that higher possibilities exist for them from which it leads them
away. It is surely not bad for a boy that he should wish to be a great
engineer, a great lawyer, or a great doctor. These are all fine professions,
but there are other things which are even more useful, and if he could see and
choose the more useful line it would surely be better for him. We cannot say
that the worldly work is bad, but only that there is better work. When one says
better work one is not depreciating any of these professions or their value to
the world; one means that most well-educated men with ordinary capacity could
take up those duties and make more or less of a success of them, whereas only
those who have a history behind them from the occult point of view can take up
with success the narrow and difficult path of occult training. Those who follow
it can do more good even than the man who wins high distinction along any of
those other lines, so when there is a child who wishes to take it up, who
obviously would be able to do so, no one should stand in his or her way.
113.
Yet it is a
necessary teacher. Its results turn to dust and ashes in the mouth; like death
and estrangement it shows the man at last that to work for self is to work for
disappointment.
114.
The man who
attains that which he has so long and so earnestly desired, often finds later
that it is not quite what he hoped it would be. Men who scheme to obtain power
and high position find that the power is to a great extent illusory, that it is
hampered in all directions, as in the case of Lord Beaconsfield, which I
mentioned before. It is possible that he might have done more good by giving
all his energy to the pursuit and spread of occultism. His works are not very much
read, nowadays, but his occult knowledge shows through them as, for example, in
his wonderful tale of Alroyd.1 1
Vol. II, p. 292.
115.
But though
this first rule seems so simple and easy, do not quickly pass it by. For these
vices of the ordinary man pass through a subtle transformation and reappear
with changed aspect in the heart of the disciple.
116.
For the disciple
there are special temptations, special difficulties. The ordinary man is proud,
perhaps, of certain things he can do. The pupil of the Master knows full well
he must not be proud of any advancement that comes to him. Indeed, knowing the
Masters, he cannot well be proud, for all sense of pride falls away from any
man who really knows Them. He may be able to do many things that others cannot
do, but yet he is constantly, by the necessity of the case, in the presence of
one or of many who can do quite infinitely more than he can. And so pride, to
do them justice, is not often found in the pupils of the Masters. Yet the whole
thing is very subtle. The pupil, if he is not careful, will find that he is
proud of not being proud; proud to find how humble he is in spite of the
wonderful things he can do and think and say. Or he may try to elbow himself to
the front among those who are serving the Master, because in his pride he
thinks that he can do the work best and that his presence at the top is
essential. But Madame Blavatsky said in her First Steps in Occultism: “No one can think, ‘I am better or
more pleasing to the Master than my fellow-disciples’ and remain a pupil of the
Master.” And Dr. Besant once said: “One of the first rules for an occultist is
to be as unobtrusive as possible, so that his personality will attract the
smallest possible attention.”
117.
Those who are
students of occultism, but not yet pupils, may more easily fall into the error
of pride. It is a great difficulty for those who develop psychic powers. They
find that they can see so much that others cannot; so much is open to them that
is unknown to others, that they begin to feel themselves superior to their
fellow-men, and very often that leads to rather disastrous results. When we
find psychics who show great pride, I think we may generally take it for
granted that they are not as yet trained people, that though they are
developing the higher faculties they have not yet come into contact with the
Master, because the absence of pride is a sure sign of one who is learning his
lesson properly.
118.
It is easy to
say: “I will not be ambitious”; it not so easy to say: “When the Master reads
my heart He will find it clean utterly.”
119.
That is quite a
different thing. We can so easily persuade ourselves that we are not ambitious,
that we are never selfish, never irritable. We can persuade ourselves of many
things, but the Master sees with the all-seeing eye that discerns the facts and
not the gloss and the glamour we throw over them when we look at ourselves.
120.
The pure
artist who works for the love of his work is sometimes more firmly planted on
the right road than the Occultist who fancies he has removed his interest from
self, but who has in reality only enlarged the limits v of
experience and desire, and transferred his interest to the things which concern
his larger span of life.
121.
Cynical people
might remark that the true artist in that sense is unknown, but that is not so.
I have had a great deal to do with artistic circles both in England and in
France, and though there is much jealousy and want of generous appreciation
among artists in general, yet I also surely have known more than one artist who
did live and work for the love of his art and not for gain. Because he so
worked, he often threw away many obvious chances of worldly advancement,
thinking that to take advantage of them would involve disloyalty to his art. A
man who is willing to do that for the sake of his art has already made some
progress on the way to getting rid of the lower self. There may be a higher
form of selfish ambition at the back of it, but at least he has gone a long way
in eradicating the mere lower self when he has lost the ambition for worldly
wealth and success.
122.
There is a stage
at which the occultist has quite conquered all desires connected with the personality,
has risen above all the ordinary ambitions of men, but still has ambition for
his separate individuality or ego, and is thinking generally of its progress
instead of the good he can do to others. So it may well be that an artist who
did altogether sacrifice the thought of self, even though he knew nothing about
occultism, might have his feet more firmly planted on the right road than such
an occultist.
123.
The same
principle applies to the other two seemingly simple rules. Linger over them,
and do not let yourself be easily deceived by your own heart.
124.
The Master here
refers to Rules 2 and 3, which we shall deal with in the next chapter. These
tell us to kill out desire of life and of comfort. He warns us to be cautious
with regard to all three, for the mind is extraordinarily, even quite
diabolically, clever at making excuses for us, at finding all kinds of reasons
for doing what we want to do. We may not think of ourselves as particularly
clever or intellectual, but if we look back over the excuses we have invented
for doing things we have wanted to do, we usually have to admit that we have
shown amazing capacity in that direction.
125.
For now, at
the threshold, a mistake can be corrected. But carry it on with you and it will
grow and come to fruition, or else you must suffer bitterly in its destruction.
126.
C.W.L. – This
is the end of the Master Hilarion’s long note to Rule 1. The more a man
advances on the path of occult development, the deeper he will bury any fault
which has not yet been eradicated. Suppose it be selfishness, the greatest and
most common of all faults, because it lies at the root of so many others. He
may have got rid of all its outer evidences, and may imagine himself to be
entirely free from it, and yet the fault itself may still be unconquered. The
further he goes on the Path the more deeply it will be hidden. In the meantime
he is gradually raising the strength of the vibrations of his vehicles so that
all his qualities, whether bad or good, must be greatly intensified. If there
is an evil quality the existence of which may be quite hidden, both from the
man himself and his friends, it will be growing stronger and stronger, and
inevitably some time it must break through and show itself. Then just because
he has made considerable advance it will produce a much more serious disaster
than would have been the case at an earlier stage, and he certainly will suffer
a good deal in its destruction.
127.
A.B. – The
man on the path must do his work thoroughly. On the threshold mistakes can
easily be corrected. But unless the disciple gets rid entirely of the desire
for power while he is in the early stages of his spiritual apprenticeship, it
will become stronger and stronger. If he does not weed it out where it is based
in the physical, astral and mental planes, but allows it to take root in the
spiritual plane of the ego, he will find it very difficult to eradicate.
Ambition thus established in the causal body is carried on from life to life.
The’ physical, astral and mental bodies die, and he gets new ones, but the
causal body does not die till the end of the kalpa; so let the pupil beware of
permitting spiritual ambition to touch the causal body and build into it elements
of separateness which more and more encase the life.
128.
Work as those
work who are ambitious.
129.
A.B. – I
have taken this sentence out of its place in the book, where it occurs at the
beginning of Rule 4, and brought it in for consideration here, where it
specially applies. It is the comment of the Chohan upon Rule 1. In each case we
will take the rule and then the comment that the Chohan gave in explanation of
it. Put them together, and you get the sense. Thus you read: “1. Kill out ambition, but work as those
work who are ambitious. 2. Kill out desire of life, but
respect life as those who desire it. 3. Kill out desire of comfort, but
be happy as those who live for happiness.”
130.
Desire for power,
life and happiness forms the motive power of the world. These are the prizes
that Ishvara holds out before all beings, and the result is that evolution goes
on. All the struggles that a man makes for these things bring out his qualities
and cause him to evolve. Suppose the whole of this is suddenly removed – a man
loses all ambition, all desire for life and for happiness. That represents a
stage through which men pass before the longing for the spiritual life awakens
fully in them. It is called vairagya, and is the result of satiety.1 (1 Vol. I, Part I,
Ch. 7: The Four Qualifications. Part III, Ch. 1: The Removal of
Desire. Vol. II, pp. 56, 264-5, 314, 324.) The
man has enjoyed power and has found that it does not bring, happiness; he has
worked for it and grasped it, but has found that the effect of it on the inner ego
is only disappointment. It is not what he expected, and it does not bring
satisfaction. Take the case, for example, of the late Emperor of Russia, who
stood at the summit of human power, was thoroughly tired of it, and heartily
wished himself free of it. It is not an uncommon thing in history that a man
who wields absolute power gets a fit of vairagya and abdicates his position.
131.
The result of
that is a collapse, a lessening of all the motives that had animated him up to
that point. Then the man droops down, and says: “Why should I exert myself any
more? I do not want power; why then should I work? I do not want life; why then
should I continue to live? I do not want comfort; it gives me no satisfaction;
why then should I do anything to gain it?”
132.
The question for
us is: How may such a man be stimulated into renewed activity so that he may
continue to grow and may finish his evolution; how may he be aroused from his
state of collapse? Only by attracting into activity the divine life in him,
that lives by giving, not by taking. He is now at the critical point in his
career. If he is still to cling to the separated self his future lives will be
full of weariness and disgust. Is it possible to awaken in him the desire of
the true life, which consists in pouring oneself out in service, not in
indrawing into selfish idleness?
133.
In his present
state the man is a worthless creature in the world, useless to himself and
everybody else. Before he reached this condition he was a force that helped the
general evolution of the world, because he was affected by those things which
attract normal men and enable them to evolve. Into this condition of perfect
collapse and uselessness into which he has been plunged by the loss of ordinary
lower motives, there comes a special appeal – an appeal which meets him on the
three points where he had lost his motive.
134.
It is to the man
in this condition that the command comes: “Work as those work who are ambitious.”
That is joined to the first teaching: “Kill out ambition,” that taken alone
would lead to lethargy. The separated self being killed, the man has now no
motive for work, so the cry comes: “Work as those work who are ambitious.” Then
comes the second command: “Respect life as those do who desire it,” and the
third: “Be happy as those who live for happiness.” These are the three new
commands that are to begin the new life, the three new motives that replace the
three old ones. The man is lying there as dead. The life of the form is dead.
Now he has to waken up the life of the consciousness; that will be done by
these three appeals. He has to begin to work again, but now it must be the
spiritual man who lives and works, while the personality acts like a machine.
He has to live more than ever he did before, though the desires for life,
happiness and power have all been extinguished. This is the answer to his
question: “Why should I work?”
135.
If a man does not
find the answer, he will remain in the dead condition and will grow no further.
It is the point known to students of mechanics as a dead point, the point of
equilibrium, in which there is no force to push him on; the higher forces have
counterbalanced the lower ones and destroyed his former selfishness and
ambition, but are not yet strong enough in him to send him forth full of energy
and purpose in their cause. That equilibrium is not the object of evolution.
What new motives can be put before the man so as to arouse him from this state
and make him active? There is only one which can stir the soul from within – his
identifying himself with the life of Ishvara in the world, and acting as a part
of that life instead of with the desire for the fruit of action.
136.
There is no
better commentary on this sentence than that which you will find in the third
discourse of the Bhagavad-Gita, where reasons are given why a man should
work after he has lost the common motives, the desire for the fruits of action:
137.
But the man who
rejoiceth in the Self, with the Self is satisfied, and is content in the Self,
for him verily there is nothing to do;
138.
For him there is
no interest in things done in this world, nor any in things not done, nor doth
any object of his depend on any being.
139.
Therefore,
without attachment, constantly perform action which is duty, for, by performing
action without attachment, man verily reacheth the Supreme.
140.
Janaka and others
indeed attained to perfection by action: then having an eye to the welfare of
the world also, thou shouldst perform action.1 1
Op, cit., iii, 17-20.
141.
That which is
described here is a still higher stage than that of the man of whom we are now
thinking. We have been considering only the beginning of that Path which leads
to this full realization of the Self. But the motive which is given here
applies to him; he has realized the emptiness of the non-self, and is in a
position to respond to the appeal of the one Self. He is prepared to work with
the motive of benefit to the world. Such a man may now think of trying to gain
spiritual knowledge not in order that he himself may thereby become wise and
great, but because it will help the world; he is gradually making that his
object – something outside his own individual self.
142.
Finally he will
drop that motive of lofty desire also, and only wish that he may be an organ of
the higher, and may do that which Ishvara wishes. Then he will learn that he is
not even to desire spiritual knowledge, nor even to become a Master, but simply
to become an instrument for the higher Life. Thus being active as they who are
ambitious, but with the motive of being a channel for the higher Life, the man
will get rid of the last vestiges of ambition. His energy is now merged in the
Will of the Logos; that becomes the motive for his working.
143.
In the verses of
the Gita quoted above Shri Krishna explains how a. man should work in
order to reach the Supreme, to realize the presence and power of the Divine.
Then He goes on to show that such attainment and realization lead to fuller
activity than any ever known before. He explains that it is the active work of
Ishvara that sustains everything:
144.
There is nothing
in the three worlds, O Partha, that should be done by Me, nor anything unattained
that might be attained; yet I mingle in action.
145.
For if I mingled
not ever in action unwearied, men all around would follow My path, O son of
Pritha.
146.
These worlds would fall into ruin, if I did not perform action.1 1 Ibid., iii, 22-24.
147.
He works for the
welfare of the world, for the turning of the wheel of the universe, and the
sole motive of His activity is that the world may grow and develop till the cycle
is completed.
148.
Shri Krishna then
goes on to show the reasons for which a man should work – for the benefit and
maintenance of the world and of mankind. No longer identifying himself with the
separated forms, he has to identify himself with the one Life which is carrying
on separated lives in order to bring them to perfection. Thus identifying
himself with the one Life he should work entirely for the welfare and
maintenance of his fellows and of the whole world – that everything moving and
unmoving may reach its appointed end, may become that which is in the thought
of Ishvara, although in manifested life they have not reached that point. The
whole universe of Ishvara exists perfect in His thought, and gradually in many
stages He works that thought out in matter. Those who realize this as part of
His life must work as He works for the complete manifestation of that thought,
that is, in order to turn the wheel of life till the turning is complete.
149.
It does not
follow necessarily that the man who has this true and spiritual motive believes
in God or thinks about Him. But in any case he feels and responds to the divine
Life in the world, and serves it with utter devotion. Such, for example, was
the case with my old friend Charles Bradlaugh, who did not believe in God as
understood in his time, but was nevertheless always ready to face suffering and
danger, to lay his own body in the ditch if it could thus be useful as a bridge
over which others might walk to a higher life.
150.
Yet those who
have thus felt the Will of Ishvara so that it has become their motive in life
must not, unsettle the minds of others who are not yet able to feel this and are
acting from desire. Shri Krishna goes on to say:
151.
As the ignorant
act from attachment to action, O Bharata, so should the wise act without attachment,
desiring the welfare of the world.
152.
Let no wise man
unsettle the mind of ignorant people attached to action; but acting in harmony
with Me let him render all action attractive.1 1
Ibid., iii, 25-26.
153.
The spiritual man
must throw himself into the work of the world and set an example, because the
standard which is set up by the wise will be followed by others. A man who is
looked up to by the mass of the people sets a standard by which activity will
be carried on by the others; if he becomes indifferent to action they will also
fall into indifference. Though his indifference may come from a higher motive
they do not know that, and it is quite a natural thing for them to mistake his
motive. In them indifference would grow out of tamas, and that would prevent
their further evolution.
154.
A man might say: “I
don’t want results here or in swarga. Why then should I try to help other
people along the road which leads to those enjoyments; why should I try to make
them active on those lines that I deem to be useless, that they may gain what
is worthless? Why should I throw my activity on the side of giving that which
is undesirable?” The answer is perfectly clear. Those fruits of action are
absolutely necessary for the mass of the people. Unless they desire these
pleasures of the world, these comforts and ambitions, these things which move
them to action, their evolution will be stopped. If they do not want enjoyment
here, then swarga may be their motive. Somehow they must be encouraged to move,
grow, evolve. If you persuade them that these things are useless they will not
evolve.
155.
It is therefore
important for the evolution of mankind that an example should be set of work
done thoroughly and perfectly well. It is never done perfectly well while we
are men working from desire. Though in that case the man may show an admirable
example of energy and perseverance there will be the taint of selfishness in
his work, which will make his example imperfect. He may work with great
accuracy, but he is working for himself. He is not really doing his best, because
he is not thinking entirely of the work, but partly of a result for himself.
156.
The Lord works
perfectly so that the world may go on. We should, then, work in the same
spirit. We must work better than the best worldly man, because our motive is
that of service to God and man, and not our own gain. We will work for the
cause of humanity. We will not run about to find activity for the sake of being
active. Many men work thus for the enjoyment of action, because unless they are
busy they do not feel alive, but are bored. That condition is one very far
removed from the man who is content in the Self. He is never bored, never
searching for an outlet in activity.
157.
He works because it
is his duty, and has no desire for activity when there is no duty. Thus he realizes
inaction in action. In the fourth discourse of the Gita, Shri Krishna
remarks on action, wrong action and inaction:
158.
“What is action,
what inaction?” Even the wise are herein perplexed. Therefore I will declare to
thee the action by knowing which thou shalt be loosed from evil.
159.
It is needful to
discriminate action, to discriminate unlawful action, and to discriminate
inaction; mysterious, is the path of action.
160.
He who seeth
inaction in action, and action in inaction, he is wise among men, he is
harmonious even while performing all action.1 1
Ibid., iv, 16-18.
161.
Even the wise
people are confused, it is said, as to the limits of each of these things. The
right action is duty, that in which the man is expressing the life of Ishvara in
his own place. In that he is to be a channel or agency, working with the
knowledge, accuracy and completeness that the man who is not ambitious shows.
If you take his work and put it beside that of the man who is ambitious you
will see that it is equally well, nay, even better done, because it is done
with absolute self-surrender and perfect balance.
162.
If you find a man
who is not working in that way, having lost desire for the fruit of action, but
who is doing less than he ought to do, is working with less energy, less
interest and less punctuality because he has no longer personal motives, then
you see one who has not learned the duty of action before he took to inaction.
It was said to me regarding certain people: “These men are beginning inaction
before they have done action – by intellectual recognition of the worthlessness
of the fruit of action before they have reached the point where they could work
unselfishly. They are neither good men of the world, as they have stopped doing
that, nor are they spiritual men throwing their energy into the evolution of
mankind.”
163.
There are two
lives which a man may live who has reached the condition where the fruit of action
does not affect him. He may retire to the jungle to live in seclusion or he may
be busy amid the affairs of men.1 (1
Vol. I, Part V, Ch. 2: Love in Daily
Life. Ch. 6: Service.) If he
is sufficiently evolved to work energetically in the mental or in the spiritual
plane, that life of physical inaction may be the best; that man is helping the
world much more than he could do amid the bustle of the world. Yet such a man
will often be sent back by his Master to lead his last life in the world. He
will then live a life untainted by action, will show in the world the example
of true action, will lead a life of perfect activity with all the energy that
the most ambitious man can show.
164.
When a man is
living the spiritual life in the world it is not possible usually to tell by
external means whether he is moved by desire or by duty. But there is one test
which never fails by which one may always judge one’s own motive. How are you
affected when the fruit of action is before you? If the slightest element of
ambition enters into a man’s work he will show disappointment if it fails or
elation if it succeeds. If there is no suffering for him in his failure, no
element of personality has entered into his work; for if he has been working
because Ishvara works, for the welfare of mankind, he will know his failure is
not the failure of Ishvara, but that the failure is part of His Plan. From the
standpoint of Ishvara failure is impossible, and often in human life failure is
quite as necessary for ultimate success as success is necessary for ultimate
success. His people may be sent sometimes to play the part of the failure so as
to become stronger, to realize that where there is failure there is also
success.
165.
Whether a man is
really working as part of His Life will be shown by his perfect contentment
whether he succeeds or fails. If that contentment is perfect, without a shadow
of dissatisfaction, he has been working absolutely for the maintenance of
mankind; then the work does not bind him and he has solved the problem of
inaction in the midst of action. He has learned the use of the vehicles and the
gunas, without identifying himself with them. In ordinary cases the gunas work
the man, but the man on the Path works the gunas. Most men are carried about by
the energies of nature; they work as those energies are active. But the man on
the Path takes those energies as instruments of labour and, standing behind
them, utilizes them. The ambitious man is driven by the gunas when he thinks
that he is working, but the man who has transcended them is directing them
along the road of evolution traced by Ishvara, and does not identify himself
with them. This is thus taught in the Gita:
166.
Having abandoned
attachment to the fruit of action, always content, nowhere seeking refuge, he
is not doing anything, although doing actions.
167.
Hoping for
naught, his mind and self controlled, having abandoned all greed, performing
action by the body alone, he doth not commit sin.
168.
Content with
whatsoever he obtaineth without effort, free from the pairs of opposites,
without envy, balanced in success and failure, though acting he is not bound.
169.
Of one with
attachment dead, harmonious, with his thoughts established in wisdom, his works
sacrifices, all action melts away.1
1 Op.
cit., iv, 20-23.
170.
So the man who
finds himself at the point of balance, of indifference, must discover some
means to increase the higher influences within himself, so that these may spur
him into this life of spiritual action. He must use meditation; he must try to
utilize whatever emotion he may possess; he must deliberately take every
opportunity of service. He must move even without the desire to move, and even
against the desire not to move. He must move. If he can find anyone for
whom he has reverence, whose example inspires him to activity, that will be a
great help to his getting over this transitional stage, where otherwise he
might drop out of evolution for the time being. If the desire to please someone
whom he admires should arise in his mind, he may use that to urge himself on
until he is in a position to feel the impelling force of Ishvara’s Life, and
thus use the emotion to carry him over and out of his condition of collapse.
171.
C.W.L. – Having
put aside ambition for himself the man is then told to work as those work who are
ambitious. There are usually three stages through which men pass. There is,
first of all, the work for worldly result. Then comes the stage when the man
begins to work, still for a result, but for a heavenly result. That is put very
much before us by the different churches. We are to give up this world to live
for ever in heaven; we shall stand nearest to God’s throne, and so on. Most
people pass through these two stages of working first for the worldly result
and then for the heavenly result. Some of them somewhat improve upon that
second idea, because they work in order to please their Deity. Many Christians,
for example, work for the love of Jesus, and that is admirable because it is
unselfish; it is a higher stage than to work for a personal result, even though
it be a heavenly one.
172.
There is still a
higher stage, that of doing the work for the work’s sake, but most people do
not understand that yet. Many artists do; there are artists who work for the
sake of art in whatever their line may be. As one great poet said: “I do but
sing because I must.” He meant that he must express that which came through him
as a message to the world. Another, feeling the same thing, said that he-
valued his poems not because they were his own, but because they were not. So
there are some who work for the sake of art – not for themselves or for their
own renown, not to please other people, not even to please God as that idea
would be commonly understood, but because they feel the message coming through
them and they must give it. That is a high stage to have attained.
173.
Then there is the
highest stage of all, when a man works because he is part of the Deity and as
part of Him he desires the fulfilment of the divine Plan. People sometimes
delude themselves and think they are working for that when they have still a
considerable flavour of the lower ideas about them. We can always test
ourselves with regard to that – best, perhaps, when we happen to fail, which
occurs at times to all of us. As our great President has often explained, if we
are really working definitely and knowingly as part of the Deity, as part of
the whole, we are not in the least disturbed by any failure that comes to us, because
we know that God cannot fail. If for the time being a certain activity appears
to be a failure, that is in the scheme and so is a necessary thing, and
therefore is not really a failure. Nothing can be a failure from His point of
view, so we are not in the least distressed. The only question would be as to
whether it was our fault; but if we have done our best and the thing is still a
failure, we know that all is well.
174.
Such
considerations as these must not, however, cause us to become negligent or
indifferent to time. It is part of our work to convert others from the doctrine
of inertia to the path of service, and even one such gain means that some
distinct advantage has been achieved for the world. Whatever is, is best
certainly, but only when we have done our best. If there is anybody who has
failed to do his best in his share of that work, then whatever is, is not best,
because it might have been better. It is only when we have done absolutely all,
that we have the right to take refuge in that. “Well, I have done everything I
can. If after all I am not successful, I bow to a higher power than mine.” I am
very sure that that which has been done is after all not lost, and whatever
happens to all these people in the end is really what is best for them.
175.
It may be only an
illusion but it is a very powerful one – that high philosophical view that
whether you get anything now or in a million years does not matter. I feel it
matters to me; therefore I think it must matter to other people, and if we
could get them to take the earlier opportunity of advancing, we should be doing
a very great thing for them. What difference it makes in the long run to the
Logos in whom all this is moving, I cannot tell, but it is very likely His wish
that we should evolve and if He wishes that to be done, then also He must wish
that it should be done as soon as may be. We are clearly carrying out His will
if we try to press onward along the Path which leads to full unity with Him,
and if we help others along that Path, so I cannot sea that it is all the same
whether people enter the stream in this world period, or this chain period, or
wait till the next. I shall do all I can to help people to enter it in this
one.
176.
Perhaps another
test would be as to whether we are willing to take any work that is His
work – whether we are willing to help high and low alike. To Him there is
neither high nor low in the matter of progress, though some part of His scheme
may be at a higher and another part at a lower point in that progress. It is very
much like the turning of a wheel; some part of it is approaching the top as it
turns, but all of it alike is moving along as the wheel turns. Our work is to
help the whole forward, to push any part of the wheel. The life at all levels is
the divine life; it is more unfolded at some stages than at others – more
unfolded in the human than in the animal, in the animal than in the vegetable,
in the vegetable than in the mineral – but the life is the divine life
everywhere, and if we are helping forward any part of that we are helping the
divine plan. That which is higher or lower is the form in which the life is
cast; the form permits- of greater or lesser unfoldment, but the life is one
life. That certainly must be part of His point of view, which is very different
from our outlook – the idea that all life is in reality the same; there is no
high nor low from that point of view, because the whole is moving together.
That does not alter the fact that there may be some in whom the life is more unfolded,
who are capable of giving greater assistance, and others who may be capable
only of a lower grade of assistance; the point is that those who find that what
they can do best would commonly be called lower work should not be in the least
disheartened, because they also are pushing the same wheel – they are helping
the unfoldment of the same divine life.
CHAPTER
4
RULES 2 TO 4
177.
2. Kill out desire of life.
178.
Respect life as those do who desire it.
179.
A.B. – We
have already to some extent considered this aphorism and the next. The same
general principles that apply to the killing out of ambition yet the working as
those do who are ambitious apply to these two aphorisms also. The disciple must
get rid of the desire for personal life – everything which energizes the
personal self and responds to the gratification of his personal desire. He must
no longer rejoice in the mere pleasure of expanding his own life by taking into
it more and more of the outside things.
180.
All over the
world men are to be seen in eager search for a fuller life; they grasp it with
many varieties of greed, struggling and fighting for more and more of
everything that appeals to their hot and untutored imaginations, and thereby
bringing about great quantities of personal and social trouble. But the
disciple must get rid of that desire to increase and expand, his own individual
and separate life. He must enter into the higher Life, and have only the desire
to be wherever in the universe he is wanted at any time as an expression of the
one life. There are many things to do in this universe. When all desire for
separate individual life has been transcended, and all personal preferences are
gone, the need of the time guides the choice of the spiritual man. Wherever
help is wanted is the place of work for such a liberated soul; he cares only to
be an instrument, wherever the instrument may be wanted. His life is to him
only useful and valuable as it is part of the Universal Life.
181.
The man who has
lost his desire of life arrives at a point of danger – he may regard life as
worthless for all, because the things that it offers are worthless to him. He
may take up an attitude of contempt towards the world and his fellow-men. He
may look down upon and despise them; as foolish people, may speak of
them contemptuously, and consider their motives paltry. That attitude towards
them is very natural, but it is full of danger, and fundamentally evil. It
shows that he has not realized the Self, though he may have realized the
non-self as such. If he looks down upon any life, however Undeveloped, he
forgets that that manifestation is apart of Ishvara, and to him therefore the
message is necessary and urgent: “Respect life-as those who desire it.”
182.
If he asks why he
ought to look upon it with respect, the answer is: because it is divine. It, is
a stage in which Ishvara is working, a stage which to Ishvara is quite as
important as the higher stage in which he now is. When we speak of high
and low we speak from the standpoint of evolution and time – the succession of changes
which make up time. That is not the way in which Ishvara regards His world; to Him
there is nothing great nor small, hateful nor dear. Everything is at a stage on
a road on which all are travelling to the same goal; the lowly is just as
necessary for the scheme of evolution as the form we usually call higher. So
the disciple must not fall into the blunder of despising: and disregarding any
life, because it is in what we call a low stage of evolution. Each thing in its
place is right and good. The recognition of that fundamental truth means that a
man must love his fellow-men, must learn to care for them as part of the
Universal Life in evolution.
183.
Granted that a
man in a low stage is foolish, sensual idle, exceedingly unattractive; his lack
of attraction lies in the form, not in the Life. We are blinded by the form.
Because our looking down upon another, our turning aside from him, is a sign of
our, superiority, there follows a feeling of superiority, which breeds
contempt. But the truth is that the only thing in which we are superior is the
evolution of the form. The essence is the same; his possibilities are equal to
ours, and looked at from the centre he is as we are. The man who is on the Path
tries to see things from the centre as well as from the circumference. He must
therefore respect Life, and realize that the Life of Ishvara is the only Life;
the form is that in which Ishvara chooses to manifest for a certain time, and
if it is good enough for Ishvara it is quite good enough for us.
184.
In the universe
there must be form in all stages of growth. No one is higher or lower; all are equal.
There
is difference when we ourselves are in process of evolution; but no difference
when we have outgrown it. When we have given up interest in it and thrown aside
all question of forms and fruit, then we can respect Life in all its
manifestations. The partially evolved man, bound up by the forms, is willing to
help those who are comparatively near himself and who can repay his trouble. He
will not be inclined to help those who are low down. But the man who helps from
the standpoint of Ishvara helps all. His duty is to help them wherever they
are. His activity is to be the activity of Ishvara. He helps those who come in
his way, whether they be high or low, and he respects the Life in each of them,
and helps that where help is required. He does not allow himself to be confused
by the fact that the whole of the Life is not present in the man. He knows that
the work of Ishvara is carried on so that that life may be brought out, and he
works to unfold it into manifestation. He is not led astray by thinking that to
be in the Self is everything. He works for manifestation, respecting and loving
Life. And so he utterly avoids the danger of contempt, which would otherwise
hinder the unfolding of the Life in himself by producing a wall of separateness.
185.
There is in this an immense difference between the way
in which Life is regarded by an ordinary man and by one who lives in the
Eternal. The latter sees the Life in its full possibilities, those possibilities
to him being in view now, even though undeveloped; for he lives in the Eternal,
and when Life is looked at from that standpoint it is seen in the beauty of its
fulfilment. Below that state we see it only in a particular stage, in time and
not in Eternity, and therefore we do not respect it as we ought to do. But the
liberated soul who lives in Eternity sees it as it is, and although he looks at
the -stage at a particular time in which it has arrived, he cannot feel
repulsion, because he knows that that stage is perfectly normal.
186.
The practical outcome of it is that the higher a man
stands the more is he tolerant of all Life, and the greater is his compassion
with all, approaching as it is the compassion of the Logos Himself. As a man
destroys in himself the desire of Life, that is the desire of the separated
self, and yet respects Life as those do who desire it, he begins to acquire
that sense of Eternity which enables him to respect life in whatever way it may
be manifested. For him then any contempt for those who are below him becomes
impossible; he recognizes each in its place as an expression of the Perfect
Life.
187.
C.W.L. – Here, as in the
case of the former rule, we may take the teaching at two different levels.
Undoubtedly the beginner has to kill out the desire for one kind of outer life
rather than for another, such as would interfere with the work to be done. A
man who becomes a pupil of the Master must be absolutely willing to do whatever
is put in his way, to go here or there, to leave this thing or that, and have
no feeling about it. If he thinks: “I am doing this kind of work and I am doing
it well, and I want to keep on doing it,” he may come to harm because he is
becoming conceited. Suppose he is taken away from the work he feels he can do
and is put to something which is new to him; he must accept it with perfect
cheerfulness. The change may be made because this other work is more necessary,
or because, since he has learned to do that one thing, he must now learn to do
something else.
188.
Quite outside the special training of the pupil, we
frequently find that the evolutionary forces work in that way. Every man likes
to do what he feels he can do well, but the evolutionary forces want to develop
the man all round, and very often they take him away from what he can do and
put him to something else that he cannot yet do well, because they want him to
develop some new power. If at first he cannot do it, he must work at it until
he can. That is the way that evolution in general works, and the same thing
applies to the training of the .pupils of the Master. If they can do a thing
well they may be kept at it for some time, but then quite suddenly they may be
sent along some other line, and they must be equally willing to do that other work
also. So, certainly, the desire for one kind of physical life more than for
another will have to be killed out.
189.
At the higher level the same thing is true with regard
to the life of the ego. The disciple knows, if he looks back on past
incarnations, that his ego has come along certain lines, but he has developed
certain qualities and can, from the point of view of the individuality, do well
along those lines, He may be suddenly taken away from them.: The individuality,
the ego, must accept that which comes to it in the course of its training, and there
also we must be free from any feeling that this work or this way is better than
that: This is brought home to us when we meet with people of other ray& or
types. We feel that our ray and type is the best one. In theory we would admit
that the others must be just as good as our own, but very few of us can feel
really hearty sympathy with them. Thus, for example, one who has been working
along philosophic or scientific lines might find it a little trying to have to
turn his activities to art or ceremonial service. It is difficult to turn our
sympathies round and let them flow freely along another line, but that is one of
the things we must learn to do if necessary.
190.
As soon as a man feels unity he gains the dispassionate
view of things. All lines of work are then, in effect, the same to him – not
that he can equally easily take up all, but he sees that, they all lead to the
same point. The undeveloped man never understands this. Always he thinks that
the man taking the, higher standpoint is cold and hard and unsympathetic; that
is because the lower man is thinking of himself and is wanting all sorts of
personal satisfactions, whereas the other man is thinking only of the work to
be done and is putting all his energy; into that. When once the Plan of work of
the Logos dawns upon a man’s horizon he sees that to the exclusion of every
thing else, and throws his energies into it, and whatever is best for that work
he tries to do, even as regards the smallest detail of every-day life.
191.
He hitches his wagon to a star. He puts before himself
ideals very high and very remote from the ordinary understanding, and it is
quite inevitable that the people who still look on things from the personal
point of view will misunderstand him. If he suffers because of that
misunderstanding, there is still a little personal touch in that; he still
wants to be understood, but even that he must give up. He must give up hoping
that his efforts will be appreciated, and realize that it does not matter
whether they are appreciated or not. All that matters is that the work shall be
done. If people will not give us credit for our work, no matter; let it be done
as perfectly as possible. We shall have the appreciation of the Master – that
much is sure – but even that must not be our reason for doing it. Our reason
for doing it is that it is God’s work and as we are one with Him what He wills
is our will, what He would have done it is our highest pleasure and privilege
to try to do.
192.
When we realize that all Life is divine Life, of
course we shall respect all the manifestations of it. We, who see partially, do
not always respect life in all its forms and in all its manifestations. We see
that many of them would be eminently undesirable for us, and therefore there is
a tendency to regard those particular manifestations with contempt. That is
always a mistake. We see a great deal around us which from our point of view is
going very wrong, and often it really is going wrong. All the expressions of
selfishness and greed and uncontrolled desire that we see in the world are certainly
wrong in the sense that it would be very much better if they were different. It
is not at all a mistake for us to think that, because it is a fact; but when we
allow ourselves to feel contempt for the people who are at that stage, we are
going further than we have any right to go. Their state of development accounts
for these manifestations, and they are very often the only expressions possible
for them at that stage, and it is through them that they will learn.
193.
When we see a man showing selfishness and greed and
lack of self-control, we say: “What a pity!” Yet it is a pity only in the same
sense that we might say that it is a pity that a little child of four has not
grown up to be a man. If we allow ourselves to be uncontrolled, or to show
greed and selfishness we might feel a sort of contempt for ourselves, because
we know better, but it would be wrong to feel that for any other man. If it
seems that he ought to be doing better, probably he has not taken advantage of
his opportunities; then we should feel sorry for him and try to help him, when
we can, to see the better side, the higher possibilities, but it is the
greatest mistake to draw away from him, though we cannot always help feeling
repugnance towards the things that he does. For example, if a man gets drunk it
is because he is at that stage. He is a younger soul, therefore it is possible
for him to yield to temptation of that kind instead of making a stand against
it, as he ought to do. In many cases he has tried, perhaps, but be has so far
failed. All that we can do to help him should be thoroughly and entirely at his
disposal, but we must not feel repugnance for him. It is the old Christian
idea; we may hate the sin but we must be sorry for the sinner, otherwise we are
doing worse than he, because we are losing the sense of brotherhood and
destroying our power to help.
194.
The one Life is behind all and we must respect it even
in manifestations which we dislike and feel to be undesirable. We must never
forget that it is divine. It is difficult to remember that sometimes when the
things that are done are so very ungodlike; nevertheless we must try. It is the
old idea of the hidden Life, which was taught to us in the Egyptian mysteries
thousands of years ago. The hidden Life was in every man, and however deeply it
was buried and however little it showed forth, we were always to remember that
it was there, even when we could not see it. The hidden light in us could not
shine upon and evoke the hidden light in another at once, but if we were sufficiently
patient and sufficiently forceful we must call forth a response, sometime and
somehow. In these days we put the teaching in somewhat different terms, but it
is equally true now as then.
195.
The man who lives in the Eternal sees what will
be as well as what now is, and when he looks at a manifestation of Life which
is eminently undesirable he says: “Yes, at present, from the point of view of
time, that is what I see it to be – a low and unworthy manifestation; but the divine
Life in sit will some day blossom out.” Many people do not think how very
illusory a thing the present is. No sooner have we thought of it than it has
passed. We say: “Such and such a thing is in existence at present,” and while
we are uttering the words that present moment has become the past. In reality
there is no such time as the present; it is a kind of knife-edge between the
past and future; it is merely a term which we use for convenience – the thing
itself is shifting every second of time. v- We must read the future into
the present, and see what will be. If we could only get out of these bodies and
these brains for a few moments into an altogether higher life and look down
upon it, we should understand this matter exactly. We should see that by
thinking of that future we make it more easily attainable for the present. If
we look at a man who is definitely sinning, and think of his sin, we fold that
sin more closely about him, but if we look at him and think of the future, when
he will have risen out of it, we open the way to that future for, him, and
bring it more within his reach.1 1 Ante. Vol I, Part V, Chap. 3: Gossip.
196.
3. Kill out desire of comfort.
197.
Be happy as those are who live for happiness.
198.
A.B. – In the early
stages of growth a man puts out all his efforts pf brain and body in order to
gain the means which will make him comfortable; the desire of comfort forms the
motive of the majority of mankind. It is a very useful stimulus to bring out
certain qualities of man. It teaches him that he must control his body, that he
must dominate his lower nature, and that he has also to develop his bodies, so
that they may subserve his purposes, of enjoying comfort in them.
199.
The desire for comfort gradually disappears as the things
that attract the man rise higher and higher in the scale. A man may get rid of
desires for physical comfort and enjoyment by throwing his interest into the
mental life, for example. At first there will be a sense of effort, a certain
feeling of pain and loss; but the man prefers the mental to the physical
pleasures because he knows that they will last longer. Then, as he practises
self-denial, he finds that the feeling of loss becomes less and less as the
joys of the intellect attract him more and more, until the lower desires do not
attract him at all.
200.
At first there is deliberate self-denial at each
stage, and then comes the loss of the power of attraction in the physical
object of the desire. Later on, the same change will come with regard to the joys
of the intellect. When the man is looking up to the spiritual life his great
attraction for intellectual things will gradually diminish, and he will be less
and less attracted by the enjoyment of the powerful intellectual force; he will
deny himself the joys of the intellect and rejoice in those of the spirit; he
will withdraw himself from the intellect and fix his consciousness on the
spiritual level.
201.
The destruction of the desire for comfort also brings
its danger. This is the third great danger. The first was inactivity, the
second was contempt, and the third is the tendency not to be happy, but to be
neither happy nor unhappy, neither one thing nor the other.
202.
How shall the man become happy? The answer is: by
realizing that the Self is bliss. It is said in the Brahma Sutras that Brahman
is Bliss, Brahman is Ananda. The man has now to realize this. He is no longer
moved by pleasure nor by pain. They have ceased to attract him; they came from
contact between forms, but he has reached equilibrium. He is therefore likely
to sink into the condition of being neither happy nor unhappy. But he must
learn to be happy as those are who live for happiness.
203.
It is the bliss of the Self, that deep abiding bliss,
the sense of contentment and joy, which is an essential part of the spiritual
life, and the most difficult part of that life to realize in consciousness. It
is a very marked fact about the great Mystics and Saviours of men that the side
of sorrow has shown itself very much in their lives. Jesus was a man of sorrow.
Gautama, the Buddha, left his splendid palaces and gardens and loving friends
to seek the cure for the sorrow of the world. The same is true when we look on
the lives of all the great leaders of mankind. Sorrow touched them very deeply.
But they were not overcome by the sorrow. In those men there was an abiding
joy, and the sorrow is profoundly exaggerated by the man who looks upon them
from outside. As grief hovers over them, as anxiety, harassments, troubles,
worries, and woes rain upon them from all directions, naturally they are judged’
by men to be sorrowful. But that does not follow. They are not worried,
harassed or distressed by these things, however much they may attend to them,
and may do whatever may be necessary for the sake of the world. Underneath it
all there is the heart of peace. Therefore you always find them saying: “My
peace remaineth.”
204.
The disciple feels the sorrow of the world. That he
cannot escape; it will throw a shadow over him – an unavoidable shadow. The
whole of the world’s sorrow has to find its echo in him. He feels sorrow, and
continues to feel pity for the ignorant and the suffering, for their rebellion
and revolt. At the stage we are considering there is danger for him – that he
may cease to feel for others; then just in proportion as he ceases to feel he
loses his utility. The Great Ones feel helpless pity for those under the sway
of karma; pity because of Their own inability to help them, for there are
places where They cannot help, where men must go through their experiences by
themselves. Despite the knowledge that it should be so, and despite Their
absolute contentment with the Law, They are standing aside and watching it
work; still there is this pain and sympathy – pity, which has in it a certain
element of sorrow.
205.
That will always remain as something of a shadow. In
losing the power to sympathize a man would lose the power to help. Just as his
life flows into the ignorant he feels the pleasure and pain of the ignorant,
and he lightens their trouble by feeling it himself.
206.
With all this pressing upon him it is ever necessary
that the disciple should be reminded that the Self is bliss. He must keep the
heart of joy, must deliberately cultivate in himself the spirit of contentment
and happiness. One way to do this is to practise meditation upon the divine
bliss – deep, intense bliss, not equalled by anything belonging to this earth,
because it is the very essence and nature of the Self. A man can develop that aspect
only by the deliberate cultivation of joy and contentment, and by looking at
the world and recognizing that evil is avidya, unwisdom. In the midst of
sorrows he is to be happy; he must teach himself that pain is in the vehicle
while the life is ever joy.
207.
C.W.L. – This rule does
not mean that people may not be comfortable, though many have taken it in that
sense. Yogis, hermits and monks have taken similar statements in other
scriptures in that way, but it is absolutely wrong and foolish. Some monks in
the Middle Ages wore hair shirts; and some Indian yogis sit on spikes and sleep
in the hottest weather in the midst of a circle of fire, all with the object of
making themselves uncomfortable. That is, the result of choosing one text and
running it to death. It is particularly stated in the Bhagavad-Gita that
those who torture the body torture the Divine One seated in that body, and
their way is not the way of progress.1 (1 Op.
cit., xvii., 6.) So this rule does not mean that we may not be comfortable, but simply
that we must never let our desire for comfort stand in the way of any work
which we have to do. If to do what ought to be done will cause us great
discomfort, we must not on that account refrain from doing it.
208.
To make ourselves unnecessarily uncomfortable only
puts difficulty in our way. People talk much about the virtue of suffering and
the extent to which progress is made through it; but if we look at the cold
facts we shall find that the progress is made after the suffering is past. It
is not actual suffering itself which causes the progress, but in many cases
that wakens a man to conditions which otherwise he would not have sufficiently
noted. It sometimes weeds out of him qualities which made progress difficult
for him, but it is only after the suffering is over that the progress is made,
because only then is he in a fit state of mind to attend to higher things.
209.
We must not think that there is any virtue in making
ourselves uncomfortable. On the contrary, when the physical body is comfortable
we are much better able to think of higher things. Yet I have known people who
would persist in doing it. For example, in India where meditation is best understood,
it happens to be the custom to sit cross-legged. I have known scores of white
people who would weary themselves out and even cause themselves pain by trying to
follow the Indian custom in meditation, not understanding that that is merely
an outer detail and the Indian only adopts that position because he has been
accustomed to it from childhood. It is exceedingly futile for people who are
not accustomed to it to force themselves into what is to them a position of
discomfort. Patanjali’s direction is to take a posture “easy and pleasant”.
210.
There are two objects with regard to the position of
the body during meditation. First, it should be comfortable, so that one can
easily forget it, for that is what one wants to do. Secondly, it should be such
that if in meditation we leave the body – which may happen at any time – it
will not hurt itself. In such a case the effect on the body will be as though,
we had fainted. The Indian who is sitting on the floor simply falls backwards,
and no harm is done. When we meditate we shall do well, therefore, to sit in
some sort of armchair, so that we may not fall out of it, if the body loses consciousness.
The recumbent position is not good if it increases the tendency to sleep.
211.
There are joys of the emotions and of the intellect,
and many people who would despise the idea that their physical comfort mattered
to them in the least, are yet exceedingly unhappy when they are not emotionally
comfortable, that is to say, when they imagine that they are not getting the
response they deserve to their emotions. Many people are painfully sentimental
and expect the rest of the world to be equally so, and are much hurt because it
is not. They pour out what they call affection, but it is often tinged with
selfishness. They will create all kinds of disturbance, and even do things
which harm those whom they profess to love, all for the sake of what they call
the return of their affection. They do not understand that there are different
types of affection, and that it may be absolutely impossible for the person
concerned to return it in their particular way. This difficulty comes from the
insistence of the desire for emotional comfort, which should never be permitted
to interfere with our own progress or that of those whom we love.
212.
In the same way there is intellectual comfort. People
want others to think exactly as they do, so that they may rest mentally
content, without disturbance. Constantly we come up against that difficulty. There
will be some promising young person deeply interested in Theosophy, for
example, who wants to join the Society, but his parents vigorously oppose him.
They would not be intellectually comfortable if they thought that their son or
their daughter were adopting a line which they could not share. They feel sure
that they are right and that there can be no real wisdom outside the limits of
their own particular opinions. Therefore if a son or a daughter thinks
differently from them they are quite outraged, not realizing that the fact that
an ego happens to be born in their family does not necessarily mean that he is
of the same temperament as themselves.
213.
Each ego has his own way, his own power of
appreciating the truth; he must receive it along his own line. For others to
try to force him to take it along their line, which is not his, is a mistake;
the whole inner Self revolts against it. The result, in hundreds of cases, when
children have been intellectually pressed, is that they fall away altogether
from their parents’ beliefs. Again and again, for example, the son of a
clergyman ends as an atheist, because the father and mother have unwisely tried
to force him to think along their lines. This harm is done only because they themselves
want to be intellectually comfortable. The disciple must always be careful that
his desire to be emotionally or intellectually comfortable does not make him
interfere with other people’s rights, and that he does not let it stand in the
way of duty or of help that he might give.
214.
It is essential that we should be happy, as the Chohan
says here, although certainly we do not live for happiness. I think many forget
the duty of happiness. They do not regard it as a duty, although most emphatically
it is that. It is a necessary part of progress. The person who is always
mournful and depressed about what is happening is making no progress, and it is
well that he should understand that. As I have said before, it is necessary
that we should become more and more sensitive, because unless we bring
ourselves into that condition we cannot answer in a moment to the slightest
signal from the Master. It is unquestionably difficult to be very sensitive and
at the same time radiantly happy, yet that’ is what we must be. There is a
great deal that calls for the deepest sympathy, and it is difficult to feel
sympathy with those who are suffering, without also feeling sorrow; yet, as I
have explained, the Master sympathizes far more than we can, but certainly does
not feel the sorrow as sorrow.1
215.
1
Ante, Vol. II, p.
329.
216.
There might be very much less suffering and very much
less sorrow if the people to whom the sorrow and suffering are coming now had
lived quite differently in other lives, perhaps thousands of years ago, but considering
that they lived as they did, that which is now happening is the best that can
happen for their progress. We cannot help being sorry that it is not better,
but our sorrow is not for what is going on now, but for the previous happenings
which made this necessary. Possibly that sounds a little cold, but when we
understand how utterly the result is part of the cause, we can see that what is
happening now is actually part of the causes which the people themselves set in
motion long ago, and it could not be other than it is while the divine law of
cause and effect is operating.
217.
All this suffering can only be altered now by bringing
in new forces. We can sometimes relieve sorrow and suffering to a certain
extent. Whenever we do that, it is not in the least that we abrogate the
working of the law, it is not at all that everything does not flow in harmony
with that law, but that we introduce a new force which also comes within the
operation of the law, and mitigates much which otherwise would have been the
effect of what went before. But though we can sometimes relieve and help, it
is, as I explained before, quite difficult for many of us to get always into
the attitude of being perfectly sympathetic and yet recognizing the necessity
of the suffering, though we can do it quite well in certain things. Suppose
some friend whom we love very much has to undergo a surgical operation. Of
course we are sorry that it should be so, but it does not occur to us to say
that it ought not to be so, because we recognize that the operation is intended
to do good, and we trust that its result will be an improvement in his health.
Therefore however sorry and anxious we may be, we regard it is an unfortunate,
a regrettable, necessity. All sorrow and suffering are nothing but that – operations
to remove dangerous growths.
218.
Much of the sorrow of the world can be avoided,
because a great deal of it does not come from the past but is the result of men’s
present foolishness. They take things in a wrong way. For example, we
frequently allow ourselves to be hurt or offended or worried. That is not karma
from the past. In many cases seven-eighths of the trouble which comes to people
is not from without at all; it is due entirely to the way in which they take
their experiences. The karma that comes to us from without is only a small
amount, but we magnify it very greatly; that is our present fault, and it can
be remedied.1 1 Ante.,
Vol. I, Part I, Ch. 1: The Occult Path and the Interests of the World;
Part IV, Ch. 1: Control of Mind; Ch. 4: Cheerfulness; Vol. II,
pp. 141, 218, 244,
219.
Most people who live for happiness seek to attain that
happiness in various ways: by surrounding themselves with the people with whom
they feel happy, by going where they expect to find enjoyment, and so on. That the
disciple should not do, because he ought to be in the position of being perfectly
happy in himself, without reference to particular outer conditions. That is
difficult for us, because, through many lives we have been very largely the
sport of circumstances. If we observe people we shall find that most of them are
in that condition still. The majority of people in the world make very little
effort to change the conditions in which they find themselves. If they find themselves
depressed or readily offended and therefore unhappy, they should set to work to
change those conditions. Instead of doing that they grumble about those who
offend them, and say that it is quite impossible to get on with such people. Yet
those others are probably people very much like the rest of the world. Our
happiness depends upon how these people are taken, upon our attitude towards
their attitude. If our study of occultism has brought any fruit we will say: “I
do not mind what position they take up; that is their business, not mine; my
business is to take care that I am not offended and worried, that I preserve a
peaceful condition, whatever these other people do or think.”
220.
One may say that it is very difficult to do that, if
other people are aggressive or insulting. But is it not obvious that the effect
produced by the insulting and aggressive attitude depends upon the way in which
it is met? If we allow ourselves to be affected by it, a great deal of
disturbance is set up. We on our side show something of the same nature, and to
the onlooker it would seem that some of that aggression is justified. But if we
are perfectly calm, the man who abuses us puts himself in the wrong, and the
outsider can see that we are not in the wrong. Of course, we should not remain
calm in order to appear in the right, but we should adopt a philosophical
attitude, because we do not feel these attempts to attack us or to interfere
with us; and thus we can be happy.
221.
That seems a sort of negative happiness, to avoid pain
or suffering. We can do a great deal more than that; we who are trying to live
according to the precepts of occultism – students of the inner life – must be
doing something of the world’s work. Assuredly no one can see the Plan of the Logos,
and the work that is to be done to carry out that Plan, without trying to do as
much as he can for it, and the fact that he is engaged in that work keeps a man
busy and happy. We should have no time for depression, no time to worry about
all these outer things. If we are all the time busily engaged in pouring out’
good thought, in sending strong wishes, strong currents of goodwill to all
around us, we are fully occupied, and are happy in the work itself.
222.
It is sad to see the way in which people all about us
are constantly talking about doing things “to pass the time”. They do this or
that for the sake of having something to do. It is both ludicrous and pitiable,
because the world is full of opportunities to do good and noble deeds, and
these people are not even looking for the opportunities. They are just trying
somehow or other to amuse themselves, that they may get through the time – a
most extraordinary attitude to take.
223.
The student of occultism finds that he cannot get time
enough to do all that he would like to do. All those who are really willing to
work are overwhelmed with work; there is always more to be done than they can
possibly do. Dr. Besant works indefatigably from early in the morning until
very late at night without any rest, and hers is a very different thing from
the ordinary man’s idea of work. Some men who are in business are certainly
closely occupied the whole time, but most people’s idea of work is to do a
little and have a rest, and then take the matter up again and spend a little
more time at it. They would call that very close attention to work. That is not
the way in which she works. Even while she is listening to some story that is
being told to her, she will continue writing and still know every word of what
one is telling her, and be perfectly ready at the end of the story to give help
or advice. She loses no single moment. She is always prepared, if she happens
to be waiting at a railway station, to take out a little dispatch box and begin
writing articles or letters at once. It is not given to every one – and think
of the age which her body has now reached – to do that, especially as a great
deal of the work is of a very searching character, and calls for quick decision
in many different directions. People who are paid for work do not do it in that
way. It is precisely because all that she does is done for the love of it that
she is able to do so much. Certainly she is happy in her work, always ready to
meet people with a friendly smile, and is thus a great inspiration to all those
who come into contact with her. We would do well to follow in her steps as far
as we can, remembering always the duty of happiness. If we are not happy, then
we are not doing enough; it is a sure proof that we are wasting time. We should
get to work and do something, and at once the unhappiness will vanish, because
there will not be time for it. The interest in the work is so keen and the
amount to be done so great, that we shall find ourselves thinking of that, and
we shall have no time to think of anything in the nature of unhappiness.
224.
Seek in the heart the source of evil and expunge it.
It lives fruitfully in the heart of the devoted disciple as well as in the
heart of the man of desire. Only the strong can kill it out. The weak must wait
for its growth, its fruition, its death. And it is a plant that lives and
increases throughout the ages. It flowers when the man has accumulated unto
himself innumerable existences. He who will enter upon the path of power must
tear this thing out of his heart. And then the heart will bleed, and the whole
life of the man seem to be utterly dissolved. This ordeal must be endured; it
may come at the first step of the perilous ladder which leads to the path of
life: it may not come until the last. But, O disciple, remember that it has to
be endured, and fasten the energies of your soul upon the task. Live neither in
the present nor the future, but in the Eternal. This giant weed cannot flower
there: this blot upon existence is wiped out by the very atmosphere of eternal
thought.
225.
C.W.L. – This is the
remainder of Rule 4, the Chohan’s comment on the first three rules. The giant
weed is the heresy of separateness – the idea of the separated self – which is
truly the source of evil. We are directed to kill it out by stages. We are told
first to unify the lower and the higher self, that is to say, to merge the
personality in the individuality. For most of us the personal self is still so
near that it tends to shut out the higher things. We have to work our way
through that and gradually to transcend it, to get entirely rid of all selfishness.
Then we have to begin upon the individuality.
226.
Now, the individuality, the ego, is a very wonderful
thing – complex, exceedingly beautiful and marvellously adapted to its
surroundings, a glorious being indeed; yet eventually we must realize that even
that is only an instrument that we have created by the working of many ages for
the sake of the progress of the Monad. Because we have had to develop the idea
of the separated self in the earlier stages of our progress, the giant weed; or
the seed of it, is in the heart of everybody. That has to be killed out at one
time or another, yet only the strong can tear it out from themselves at the beginning
of their development. The weak must wait and let it go on growing while they
are developing sufficient strength to kill it out. That is unfortunate for
them, because the longer it is allowed to persist the more closely it becomes
intertwined with the nature of the man. Those who can summon the courage to
tear it out now will make rapid and much surer progress. Terrible as the
struggle is to get rid of this separated self at any time, it will be thousands
of times more difficult if we leave it until the later stages of our progress. Until
it is finally destroyed we shall be subject to all kinds of difficulties and
dangers from which we can escape only by getting rid of it here and now. Obviously,
therefore, it is best to kill it out in the beginning.
227.
All systems of occult teaching agree in advising
students to try from the very beginning to get rid of this illusion. The
difficulty in the way, apart from the habit of thinking of ourselves as
separate, is that this idea has been the source of all our strength in the
past. When the ego was first formed as an individual he was distinctly weak. He
had been, until then, part of a group soul, and the idea of separate identity
was not strong in him. It had to be intensified through the savage life. The
man’s strength gradually grew from the feeling, “I am I”. In the earlier days
it would be: “I am a great fighter and a swift runner; I am a mighty headsman;
I can lead armies; I can guide men; I can make them do as I will.” Later on, it
would express itself on a higher level as: “I have a mighty intellect; I can
trust myself; I am proud of myself; I am a great man; I can think more strongly
than other men and therefore I have power over their minds, and can sway them
to do this or that.” It is through the sense of separateness that we have
learnt to be self-reliant.
228.
Later there comes a stage when self-reliance means
reliance upon the Higher Self. The man no longer relies either on the skill of
his hand, the fleetness of his foot and the strength of his muscles, or on his
intellectual powers, but comes to realize that there is a strength of the
spirit which is greater far than all these outer manifestations, and when this
stage is reached he soon begins to see that the strength of his spirit is the
strength of the infinite that lies behind it, because it is one with God
Himself. Thus our self-reliance at last becomes reliance on Him – on the mighty
Power behind. We are He, and in relying on God we are relying on ourselves,
because each of us is a spark of the Divine, and the Godhead is in us. We only
need to realize that and to unfold it, and then the self on which we rely becomes
the great Self which is the All.
229.
This idea of the separated self is ingrained in us and
is part of the very ego which is the one permanent thing about us as far as we
know. We have still to learn that there is the Monad; that will seem the true
Self when we have laid aside the individuality. Yet when that time comes we
shall see far more clearly than we do now that those Monads are only sparks of
the Eternal Flame. We know it now theoretically, and true realization of it
will come to all in due course; it has come to some already. I have explained
before that when the consciousness is focused in the highest part of the causal
body it is possible to look up the line that joins the Monad and the ego. Looking
up that line into the Monad of which we know so little, and beyond it, we can
see and know with a definiteness and certainty that no words can express down
here, that all we have thought of as the Self and as belonging to us, is not we,
but He; that if we had any intellect, any devotion or affection, it was not we
at all, but it was the intellect, the devotion, the love which is God, which
was showing itself forth through us.1
(1 Ante., Vol. I, Part II, Ch. 2: The Life of the Bodies.) When a man has had
that experience he can never be quite the same again; he cannot come down again
in the same way to the personal point of view, because he knows with the
certainty that convinces. Some experience like that is needed to counteract the
result of the development of the separated self which at present is a great
trouble and causes us much sorrow and suffering by obscuring our view of Life. We
are in this curious position that our self-development is due to the idea of
separateness up to a certain point, and it is only when we have reached that
point that it becomes an evil, and we have to get rid of it. Humanity has now
reached a stage where it ought to be realizing that. That is why the duty of
unselfishness is impressed upon us so strongly by all occult and high religious
teaching. Humanity as a whole needs that. It is still in the selfish stage,
trying to grasp this and that for itself. The whole of our strength must be
turned against that tendency.
230.
At the same time we must try to be very tolerant about
it. We often feel impatient with the rampant, the brutal selfishness found
everywhere, but that is useless. These unfortunate people are only carrying on
now what was necessary for their development thousands of years ago. We should
help them, if possible; we should always be gentle and tolerant, but very firm
as to the necessity for getting rid of this point of view. Some of us find it
helpful to try to realize the progress of humanity as a whole and to make a
practice of thinking of ourselves as part of it. We try to act on the advice
given by one of our Masters who once put it thus: “If you succeed in taking a
step of some kind, if you succeed in making definite advancement, you should
not think: ‘I have done this, I am really getting on’. The better way to put it
is: ‘I am glad that this has happened, because humanity through me is just that
much nearer to finding itself – that much nearer to the final goal which God
means it to reach; humanity through me has taken this step, and the fact that
it has done so means a very little advance for every other unit.” One may thus
think of the whole of humanity, as a man thinks of the whole of his family, as
a unit, from the baby to the old grandfather, and so considers the welfare of
all.
231.
We are told that we should live neither in the present
nor the future, but in the Eternal. He who lives in the Eternal is the Logos,
the Deity. He, living in the Eternal, sees the future as well as the present,
sees the fulfilment of all these things. If we could raise ourselves up into
His point of view we should be able to live in the Eternal as He does. That is
not a thing that we can achieve to-day or to-morrow. We must fight our way
towards it. A divine dissatisfaction is a necessity for our progress towards
it. We must never be satisfied with the condition we have reached; that would
at once mean stagnation. We must always aim at doing better and better, and by
living in the future we shall learn how to do that.
232.
At the same time, while we are always reaching
forward, always striving upward, it is a mistake to allow ourselves to feel discontented
or worried with regard to transitory happenings to the temporary condition of
ourselves and others. It is wiser and better to project ourselves into the
future and live in it. We should say: “I am at the moment such and such a
person, with certain faults and failings. I am going to transcend these faults
and failings. Let me look forward to the time when they will no longer exist.”
It is a great thing to live for to-morrow and not for yesterday. The world at
large is living for the centuries which lie behind it and is clinging to old
prejudices. We should look forward to the future and live for that.
233.
Keep your thought hopefully on the future, not
regretfully on the past. The present is very largely an illusion; so we are not
really dissatisfied with what we are doing, but with what we have just done. If
we want to get on we must keep our eyes in front of us. To look behind is not
the way to make progress. If that course were persisted in on the physical
plane we should not go far without meeting with an accident, and the same thing
is true in these higher realms also. The more we think over it the clearer it
becomes that in the three aphorisms we have just been examining, viz., “Kill out ambition, kill out desire
of life, and kill out desire of comfort”, all that moves the ordinary man to
exertion has been absolutely cut away.
234.
A man’s life is first of all directed by the desire to
keep himself and his family alive, “to keep his head above water”; he has
always the ambition of rising to higher levels; he wishes for greater comfort
for himself and for his family. These are precisely the mainsprings which move
the ordinary man, and it is obvious that if all of them should be absolutely
removed from him, he would be left supine – he would be left without any reason
to bestir himself at all; he would be like a log. He would say: “If I am not to
have ambition of any sort, if I am to cease to desire either life or comfort,
why should I do anything? Why should I move at all?” He would be left without
any adequate motive for exertion of any kind, and all progress for him would be
at an end. It is obvious that for him the killing out of these things would
have a bad effect.
235.
Even the man who is nearly ready to tread the Path,
who has ceased to feel any interest in lower things, reaches a stage when there
is danger of his falling into a state of inaction. Intellectually he is
absolutely convinced that all these lower things are not worth pursuing, and
because they have ceased to attract him he does not feel inclined to put forth
energy in any direction. That is an experience which comes to nearly every one
in the course of his evolution, and is a very real trouble to numbers of
people. They have got rid of the lower and not taken on the higher. They are at
a transition stage between the two; they have not sufficiently realized the
unity for that to be the great motive power in life, but they have realized
enough of it to know that the desires of the separated self are not worth
following. So they remain in a condition of suspended animation. It is for some
students a very great difficulty to rouse themselves out of this state. Nothing
is worth while; nothing has any longer any interest for them. They want to die
and be done with it.
236.
The only way for a man to get beyond that
unsatisfactory condition is to go a little further, and then he will begin to
see that there is a higher and truer life which is infinitely well worth the living.
He will find that when he has glimpsed the divine scheme he wants to throw
himself into it – he cannot do otherwise. In identifying himself with the One
Life, and acting as part of that Life, he finds the one motive which can stir
him to action. When he takes that one step further and begins to realize the
Life of the Self, then instead of wanting to fall into annihilation and to be
done with everything, he will long to possess more and more energy in order to
throw it into this glorious work. The motive power of the One Self will stir
him to far greater activity than ever before, because it is infinitely more
powerful than any lower motive, and the man who works with it to fulfil the
high purposes of the Deity will gain infinite happiness and infinite peace.
CHAPTER 5
RULES
5 TO 8
237.
5. Kill out
all sense of separateness.
238.
Yet stand alone and
isolated, because nothing that is embodied, nothing that is conscious of
separation, nothing that is out of the Eternal, can aid you.
239.
A.B. – This teaching is
specially given in this book, intended for the disciple, because he has to
learn to stand utterly alone. Nothing that is embodied, that is out of the
Eternal, can aid him. All help that comes from the embodied is secondary help
and may fail him in the moment of his greatest need. The biographies of the
great Christian mystics show it to have been an invariable characteristic of
their lives that they felt forsaken by every one, and had to stand absolutely
alone. The same truth comes out also in the Christian Gospels, which contain in
the symbol of the life of Jesus an account of the experiences through which
every soul must go in the stages of discipleship. There are there two scenes which
are connected with this
statement; the first is that which is spoken of as the agony of Jesus in the
garden of Gethsemane, when He found that His friends and followers could not
watch with Him even for a little time, and He learned that He must go on alone;
the second was the cry from the cross: “My God, my God, why hast Thou forsaken
me?” These experiences are connected
with the fourth great Initiation, when the man is thrown back upon himself and
learns to rest upon the inner Self alone, to realize that he himself is only an
expression of the Eternal in the outer world. There is always a danger that in
this last great test the disciple will break down.
240.
A double task lies before the disciple. He must kill
out the sense of separateness, but he must learn to stand alone in order that
he may be strong with the strength of the divine within himself. He must be
like a star in heaven, that gives light to all but takes it from none. He can
learn that only from the experience of isolation. Yet the sense of isolation is
illusory, for he is in the Eternal. The illusion is due to the breaking away of
all the forms before the realization of unity – of being the Eternal – develops
in the consciousness.
241.
This aphorism with its comment also contains other
important thoughts. There is a stage at which the aspirant must stand aside
from the body of men, because of his weakness, not of his strength. Sometimes a man is so near the condition of other
men around him, who still lead the lower life that he has left, that he feels
that by keeping company with them he is likely to be- dragged down into their
vices. At that time the sentiment of repulsion is useful; and although it does show
that he is in a lower stage of development yet he will do well to follow it and
avoid their company.
242.
When a man speaks with horror of a certain vice you
may be sure that in the near past he has been in the grip of it. In the recent
past there has been a fight against that vice, and his inner consciousness,
from which nothing, disappears, now warns him against it. There is a stage when
a man has risen higher, when he need not seek such isolation from those who are
still sinning. But so long as that is not the case, so long as he is liable to
fall into vice on account of an impulse from outside, a man’s safety lies in
his running away from the temptation, until he is strong enough to go amidst
that vice without being attracted by it. Only when a man has got beyond the power
of falling into attraction by vice will he usually get over his horror and
repulsion.
243.
Then he has come to the stage at which he ought to
think of the sinner as in need of his help. The very thought of his own past
faults will now enable him to help others. We cannot help them as long as we
ourselves are liable to fall, but only when we are neither attracted nor
repelled, when we recognize our identity with those who are struggling. We then
remember that the sin of the world is our own sin-^-the profound truth that no
man can be perfectly clean while another remains unclean. While a man remains
part of humanity its life is his; to escape from that, he must go outside humanity.
The vice of any man is our vice, until he also has got rid of it. Upon that truth
the saving of the world entirely turns.
244.
That should be the thought of any disciple if he
should find himself under special temptation. He should realize that he must
not yield to the temptation, because in his fall there is a fall for the whole
of humanity. Such knowledge ought to be sufficient to keep him from evil.
Suppose you attempt to realize in consciousness the life of humanity, and then
try to conquer a particular weakness; you will then feel that your own conquest
is not a conquest for yourself, but for all. The whole of humanity is helped
because one part of it has struggled and conquered. This idea will very often
give you great strength. It is indeed worth while to struggle for the sake of
the whole, if not for your own personal self.
245.
C.W.L. – People sometimes
make these instructions harder for themselves than they need be, and perhaps
also a little unreal, by exaggerating them. We have to face the fact that there
is separation down here on the physical plane. We may feel as completely
fraternal as we can, but the fact nevertheless remains that in space our
physical bodies are separate. Sometimes people want to deny that fact; they try
to carry the idea of non-separate-ness to such a point as to make it unreasonable.
That can never be right in occultism. Occult teaching is always the very
essence of reasonableness and common sense, and whenever anything is put before
us which is obviously unreasonable, we may feel sure there is a mistake
somewhere. In some cases it may appear unreasonable because we are not in
possession of all the facts, but when the facts are all before us and the
statement still has an unreasonable appearance, we are justified in doubting it
and waiting for further enlightenment.
246.
Though our physical bodies are separate in space there
is really less separation than there appears to be. We all react upon one
another to such an extent that no man can in any sense really live to himself
alone. If one physical body has a certain disease, all the others near are
liable to contract it. If the astral body is diseased in the sense of being,
let us say, given to irritability, envy, jealousy, selfishness and so on, it is
also infectious, because it radiates out its vibrations, and other astral bodies
in the neighbourhood must be to some extent affected by such radiation. When,
for example, people sit together at a meeting their astral bodies
interpenetrate to a considerable degree, because the astral body of an ordinary
person extends about eighteen inches around the physical body – in some cases
still further – so that, although they are still quite separate, they must
react considerably on one another. The same is true of the mental body, and
even our causal bodies are separate in space and in condition. So we must
understand this killing out of the sense of separateness in conformity with the
facts of nature.
247.
There is no separateness on the buddhic plane. There
consciousnesses do not necessarily merge instantly at the lowest level, but
they gradually grow wider and wider until, when we reach the highest level of
the buddhic plane, and have fully developed ourselves through all its different
subdivisions, we find ourselves consciously one with humanity. That is the
lowest level at which the separateness is absolutely non-existent; in its fullness
the conscious unity with all belongs to the next plane – the nirvanic.
248.
Suppose that all of us could develop the buddhic
consciousness within ourselves simultaneously. Each one would realize that he
had risen to that level, and that his consciousness included that of all the
others, but he would still feel that inclusive consciousness to be his
consciousness. None of us would have lost his sense of individuality at all,
only in it he would include very much more than he had ever done before. He
would feel himself as manifesting through all these others as well. Really what
we are experiencing is the one consciousness which includes us all, the
consciousness of the Logos Himself.
249.
It is on the nirvanic plane that we realize most
intensely that all that we thought to be our consciousness, our intellect, our
devotion, our love, were in reality His consciousness, His intellect,
His love, His devotion, manifesting through us somewhat as a
light might shine through a lens. That realization does not come fully to the
man in the buddhic world, but it does so come to him in that next above.
250.
In the Stanzas of Dzyan it is said, referring
to man; “The spark hangs from the Flame by the finest thread of Fohat.”1 (1 The Secret
Doctrine, Vol. I, p. 66.) That, I believe, is applicable at various levels;
for us it may be taken to mean that the ego hangs from the Monad by the finest
thread, and that thread runs through the buddhic plane. The finest thread of
which you can think is all that represents the ordinary man at these buddhic
levels. As soon as he turns his attention to higher matters – when he is
regularly thinking of them and aiming at them – that thread begins to thicken.
It gradually becomes more and more like a cable, and later on it appears as a
funnel, because it widens out up above (I am speaking of it now as one would
see it clairvoyantly), and comes down into the causal body, which is a thing of
definite size for the time. Later on the causal body itself is enlarged by the
inrushing of forces, and the funnel becomes very much larger, widening out at
the bottom as well as the top. At the first Initiation (for many, this experience
comes before that), the man abandons the causal body and plunges into the
buddhic plane. At that time, as I have explained before, the causal body absolutely
vanishes – the one thing that has seemed permanent through his long line of
lives, since he left the animal kingdom, disappears.2 (2 Ante., Vol. I, Part II, Ch. 2: The Life of the
Bodies.) When that occurs this funnel shapes itself into a sphere. There are
more dimensions there, so that I cannot actually describe it, but this is how
it appears to one who is able to see it.
251.
After a man has taken the first Initiation the sense
of separateness is one of the failings which have to be entirely conquered
before he can take the second. It is the first of the ten sanyojana or
fetters which he has to cast off on his way up the steps of the Path. It is
made possible for ‘him finally and irrevocably to cast it off by the experience
which is part of that first Initiation. He gets then merely a touch of the
buddhic consciousness. It does not mean necessarily that he can go back into
that condition of consciousness whenever he will, but at least he has experienced
it, and having once felt the unity, he knows that it exists even though he may
be incapable of re-entering it without the aid of the Master. He knows,
therefore, that the sense of separateness is an illusion. It is practically
impossible for us down here in the physical body to grasp that really. We
constantly speak of it and we try to persuade ourselves that we feel it, but as
long as one is in a physical body and until one has had that higher experience,
frankly I do not think one can feel it. We persuade ourselves of it
intellectually but really to feel it is a different thing.
252.
When a man begins to function on the buddhic plane, he
enters it at its lowest level, but he is unable at first to make the most even
of that lowest sub-plane. He will feel an intensity of bliss which no words can
express, and an extension of consciousness which by contrast with anything
which he has ever felt before, will no doubt give the idea that the whole world
is included. Nevertheless it is not so at all. When he is sufficiently
accustomed to this higher level to analyze it, he will find that the extension
of consciousness, though a very great one, is by no means as yet full or
universal. Gradually he extends the sphere which he can effectively occupy. It
is somewhat like the way in which an army occupies a conquered territory. He
establishes himself first, and then gradually extends that part over which he
has definite power, until it includes the entire country. He then proceeds to
try to push his consciousness into the next sub-plane; but even after he has worked
his way through sub-plane after sub-plane until he reaches the highest, he has
not necessarily built the buddhic vehicle. The man who has the buddhic
consciousness within his reach by meditation or by effort can always raise himself
into that condition. The man who has definitely built a buddhic vehicle has
that consciousness all the time in the background of his lower physical, astral
or mental consciousness. That is another and separate achievement and a
difficult one, because to do that the causal body must be eliminated, must be
destroyed as a separating wall.
253.
One whose consciousness works on the buddhic plane
during meditation finds that although he is one with all the wonderful
consciousness of the plane, yet there is a little circle of emptiness shutting
him out from the rest. This little barrier is, of course, the causal body. In
order that the buddhic vehicle shall be developed, even that must disappear.
Then the man feels the reality of unobstructed Life in a way impossible to
describe down here. Madame Blavatsky expressed the idea as a circle with its
centre everywhere and its circumference nowhere – a very beautiful and
expressive description.1 (1 Ante.,
Vol. II, p. 67.) Of course it is a paradox, but all things that can be said about these
higher conditions must necessarily be paradoxical.
254.
When the unity is fully realized the man feels,
however paradoxical it may sound, as though his vehicle at that level filled
the whole of the plane, as though he could transfer his point of consciousness
to any place within that plane and still be the centre of the circle. It is an
experience which is quite indescribable. Along with that feeling, permeating
and accompanying it always, is a sense of the most intense bliss – bliss of
which we can have no conception at all on these lower planes – something vivid,
active, fiery beyond all imagination. Most bliss down here, at the rare moments
when we feel anything deserving of the name, consists chiefly in the absence of
pain. We are happy and blissful down here when, for a moment, we are free from
fatigue and pain, when we can relax and feel that we are taking in pleasant
influences. That is rather a negative feeling. The bliss of the buddhic plane
is the most intensely active, vivid feeling. I do not know in the least how to
express it. If you could imagine the most intense activity that you have ever
felt and then replace that vivid and strenuous activity by a feeling of bliss,
then somehow raise it – spiritualize it – to an altogether higher plane, to the
nth power, it would convey some idea
of what that feeling is.
255.
It is an active reality which is quite overpowering in
its strength. There is nothing at all passive about it; one is not resting.
Down here we live lives of so much strain and strenuousness that rest is always
a very prominent part of any ideal we may have; but there it is not in the
least a feeling that one is resting or wanting to rest. One is a tremendous
incarnate energy whose expression is to pour itself forth, and the idea of rest
or the need of rest is entirely outside one’s consciousness. What to us here
seems rest would seem a kind of negation up there. We have become one with the
expression of the divine power, and that divine power is active life. People
talk of the rest of nirvana – but that is from the lower point of view. It is
the intensity of power that is the real characteristic of this higher life – a
power so intense that it does not show itself in any sort of ordinary movement
at all, but rather in one vast resistless sweep which might look like rest when
viewed from below, but which means the consciousness of absolute power. It is
impossible to express all this in words. When we have achieved this we have
finally conquered the giant weed – the great enemy, the sense of separateness.
It is the hardest task, on the whole, that is before us, because it involves
everything else.
256.
It is only after the buddhic body is fully developed
on all the seven sub-planes that the man has the full fruition of the whole
plane, a complete power of identification with the whole of humanity, so that
he can learn through that relation what all these people think and feel. Before
that buddhic consciousness is gained we may labour to reduce the sense of
separateness and it may be done with great success intellectually, but we still
remain outside, in the sense of not understanding others. They will still be an
absolute mystery, for man is the greatest of mysteries to his fellow-man. We
may come into very close relations with people for quite a long time, and yet
not really know them inside. It may be that until the buddhic level is reached no
man ever really knows any other man thoroughly.1 (1 Ante., Vol. II, p. 67.) When a man
reaches that condition he is able to pour himself down into the consciousness
of others and see what they do and why they act in that particular way. There
all things are within him instead of outside, and he studies them as parts of
himself. It sounds impossible down here, but that is something of what he
feels. All the joy of the world is his joy; its suffering is his suffering.
When he chooses to put himself down through any one of the million tentacles – the
consciousnesses of other people with which he is one – then he can and does experience
all which that person is experiencing. In this way all the world’s suffering is
within his reach, but he knows with absolute certainty that it is a necessary
part of the plan and has no existence on those higher levels. He is in no way
less sympathetic with it, yet he knows that “Brahman is Bliss”, and that to be
one with the divine is a state of perpetual inner joy. It is only when one
gains that development that one can fully help others.
257.
When a man touches that consciousness he has for a
time withdrawn from these lower physical levels where he can be perturbed or
upset, and he is himself part of the divine joy. When he comes back again into
his mental, astral and physical bodies he may permit little troubles to annoy
him. This ought not to be so; but still there is a great gap between the higher
life and that lived in the physical body, where small things can still be very
irritating. The possibility of being momentarily annoyed by something on the
physical plane remains even when a very high level has been reached, but it is
then merely superficial. The things from which people really suffer in this
world are those which they feel to be hopeless. No one can ever have any
feeling of hopelessness after he has touched that higher consciousness, because
when we are absolutely certain that the reality is always joy, we know that all
suffering at lower levels is only temporary, and that even that would not come
to us if we were nearer to perfection.
258.
The power of identification is gained not only with
regard to the consciousness of people but with regard to everything else on the
buddhic plane. Everything is learnt from the inside instead of from the
outside. If we wish to study any subject, any organism, the working of any law
of nature – it does not matter what – up to and including the consciousness of the
causal body we have to study it from without, looking out at it. In the causal
body we are able to examine it with an enormously widened’ consciousness, with
the power of knowing vastly more about it than we could possibly know on lower
planes. But when we get to the buddhic plane the difference is a fundamental
difference. That which we are examining has become part of ourselves. We
examine it as a kind of symptom in ourselves. It is difficult to put into words
because down here we have nothing exactly like it, but this looking at things
from within instead of from without does give one a very great advantage. It is
so different in its characteristics that we are probably justified in saying
that that is the first glimpse we get of the way in which the Deity looks at
His universe, because He must have exactly that experience – that that at which
He looks must be part of Himself because there is nothing which is not part of
Him. Therefore His consciousness must be this buddhic consciousness raised to
the power, and with all the insight and glory and splendour of which we can
have no idea on any plane as yet. One can understand very clearly why that
world is spoken of as the real, and all these lower ones as the unreal, because
the difference is so great and the attitude is so entirely changed that any
other way of looking at things does seem unreal, even ridiculous when once one
has learned to see them from the inside.
259.
It is not so utterly impossible as many students think
to attain to that higher sight. A reasonable number of people have succeeded in
this incarnation, here and now, in gaining it. It is certainly within reach of
those who will try hard enough, if they are willing to follow the rules – willing
to adopt the utter selflessness which is required, because so long as there is
anything personal in the disciple’s point of view he cannot make any progress
with this buddhic consciousness, which depends on the suppression of the
personality.
260.
The idea of separateness shows itself in certain ways
in daily life, and it is well to watch against those manifestations. One way in
which people show it very much is by their desire for power over other
separated selves. One half of the world is everlastingly trying to interfere
with the other half. This habit is so ingrained in us that we do not notice it;
we usually regard it in the light of good advice. About one case in two thousand
may happen to be that, but in most of the others we are simply asserting our
separated self by endeavouring to impress ourselves upon the other people.
261.
Physically, we try to make other people do things our
way and to give way to us; we are perpetually trying to get them to adopt our
particular plan, whatever it may be. Because it is ours it is the best plan in
the world and we want to force it upon every one else. We find the same thing
at the intellectual level. People try constantly to force their opinions and
their ideas upon others. When a man has developed a keen intellect he begins
subtly, slowly, to want to dominate other people by means of that intellect.
Just because his thought becomes keener and stronger than that of others he
tries to mould their thought by his. It is well and good that we should want to
share with others all that we know; that we should set before them what we have
found so good for ourselves. But as a rule that is not the idea which exists
behind this desire to dominate other minds. It usually co-exists with a certain
amount of contempt for the other people. We think: “These people are like sheep;
we can sweep them along; we can make them think what we like.” It is to a large
extent true that a man who has learned to think, as we should be learning by
meditation and study, can dominate the thoughts of others very easily; but we
should not do it, because anything like domination is bad for the other man’s
evolution and not good for our own. So even this desire for intellectual
domination must be resisted. It is part of the vice of separateness.
262.
When we have got rid of that there is still a higher
possibility along that line – in the realm of the spiritual we may also try to
make people take our path. That is at the back of all endeavour to convert
people from one religion to another. It is perhaps not quite fair to put it in
that way, because Christianity at least starts with the gigantic delusion that
unless people believe its particular shibboleths they will have a very
unpleasant hereafter, therefore its attempt to convert others comes to have the
colour of altruism. It assumes: “Orthodoxy is my doxy and heterodoxy is your
doxy,” and: “What I believe is true and you must come into line with it.” When
we have developed spirituality, when we have learned many things that others do
not know, it is right and proper that we should preach our gospel, that we
should wish to tell others what we have found and give them every opportunity
to follow us into these realms of higher thought; but if that wish is tinged
with a desire to dominate them – a desire that is often found along with many
good qualities – there is still a touch of the old separated self about it, and
the “giant weed” is not finally uprooted.
263.
We must also get rid entirely of the wish to dominate
others because so long as a man is working for the separated self he belongs to
that great mass of separated selves which is such a terrible burden in
evolution. The moment he begins to realize the unity, he ceases to be part of
the weight which has to be lifted and begins to be one of the lifters.
264.
To stand alone and isolated means that one must not be
dependent on anyone outside oneself, because no separated person or thing can
really ultimately be of use to us. Help must be found within ourselves. The
Master can help us all the time in our efforts, but even He cannot do the actual
work for us. He is constantly suggesting things to us, pouring help into us in
every way, but at every step it is we ourselves who must do the work. As we go on
we must learn to stand apparently entirely alone, without the Master’s direct
help, but that is an illusion because no one can ever really be separated from
the Master, or from the Deity of whom that Master is a part. Still, we must act
as though we were alone, and at certain stages in our evolution we shall feel
absolutely alone; yet if we can bring the intellect to bear upon it, though it
is a difficult matter under such circumstances, we at once recognize that we
never can be really alone. We are part of God and cannot cease to be so, because
if we did we should altogether cease to be, we should be unconscious.
265.
We are part of something which can never cease to be,
and therefore the idea of loneliness is an illusion, though it causes great
pain and suffering. On the physical plane a man is often least alone when he
thinks himself most alone; when he is in the midst of a crowd the higher things
can touch him less easily, therefore he is more separated from them. But when
these separated selves are not so close around him the influences of the non-separated
Self can play upon him much more fully, and so it is really true to say that the
man is least of all alone when he thinks or feels himself most alone.
266.
It is hardly possible to form any conception of the
awful feeling of being absolutely alone in the universe – a point floating in
space. That is the condition called avichi, which means “the waveless state”.
It is a condition of consciousness in which a man appears to himself to stand
outside the vibrations of the Divine Life, and is said to be the most terrible
experience that can come to a man. That is the end of the black magician, who
for many lives has striven definitely and determinedly for separateness, who
has directly set himself against the unifying forces of evolution. The pupil of
the Master must learn to sympathize even with the black magician who suffers
avichi; therefore once in his development a man must experience that state of
consciousness. He touches it only for a moment but he can never forget it, and
henceforth he will always be able to understand the suffering of those who
remain for ages in. such a condition as that. When for us that moment comes, we
should remember that whatever is, is God, and that we cannot be separated from
Him even though we feel that we are – we must realize that it is a final
illusion which must be conquered.
267.
We all have to stand alone and isolated because each
of us must learn to depend upon himself and to realize that he is God, that the
divine spark in him is in truth part of the All. Until we can do that we are
not entirely reliable for the higher phases of the Master’s work. In the meantime,
for all our ordinary work in life, whether physical, astral or mental, the
knowledge that the Master envelops us and is close behind us all the time is a
very great strength and comfort. We do our regular work each night on the
astral or mental plane, as the case may be, and in doing it we know always that
the power of the Master protects us. If at any moment we encounter something
enormously stronger than ourselves which threatens to overwhelm us, just as on
the physical plane a great storm or earthquake might do, we always know that we
can draw indefinitely, infinitely, on His power. Even that the disciple must
learn to do without, when the time comes, but only in order that he may become
as strong a centre as the Master Himself.
268.
Do not fancy you can stand aside from the bad man or
the foolish man. They are yourself, though in a less degree than your friend or
your Master. But if you allow the idea of separateness from any evil thing or
person to grow up within you, by so doing you create karma, which will bind you
to that thing or person till your soul recognizes that it cannot be isolated.
269.
C.W.L. – This is the
first part of a long note by the Master Hilarion. Of course we all bold in
theory that humanity is a mighty brotherhood and is really a unity. The Master
here admits that there are degrees in this unity, and that there are therefore
degrees of separateness, that we are to some extent more separated from the bad
and the foolish than we are from our friend or our Master. The idea of the
brotherhood of man is often twisted to imply the equality of man, which it
really cannot mean. In any family of many brothers there must be considerable
differences of age among them, and there must similarly be differences of soul
age among these members of the greater human brotherhood. Again, just as in the
physical family it is the business of the elder to help and train the younger,
so in the family of humanity must the elder protect the younger and help them
in any way they can. Brotherhood implies variety; it requires this difference
of age, and also that many people shall be doing different kinds of work.
270.
One of the finest symbols of brotherhood that I have
come across was a vision of one of our members of an Eastern temple supported
by many hundreds of pillars. He said: “All these pillars are helping to support
the temple, and they are therefore symbols of individual souls who form a part
of the temple of humanity. Some of these pillars are on the outside, are seen
and admired all the time. They also face the sunshine and the rain. Others are
far away in the interior of the forest of pillars, never having the sun shining
directly upon them at all, never being admired by people as they pass. Some of
these pillars are in places where the worshippers gather round and sit leaning
against the plinth of the pillar all day long. Other pillars are in less
approachable places, but each one is an integral part of the temple and is
doing its work. That is like the brotherhood of humanity. Some people may feel
that they are doing a great deal; others may never know of a single opportunity
of help that comes to them, and yet they are all bearing their part and are
just as much pillars in the temple as those which are more prominent in the
public eye.”
271.
Many of our students are eager to claim unity with the
Master and the saints, and not so anxious to claim unity with the criminal, the
drunkard, the inefficient, the sensual, the cruel. But since humanity is one,
we must be one with the less evolved people as well as with the greater; in the
one case there is a part of ourselves towards which we must reach up, but in
the other case there is a part of humanity which we must try to help. How can
we help them? First of all by thinking in the right way about them. If we
shrink from them with horror, if we hate them, we are making their path more
difficult. If we allow the natural and justifiable feeling with regard to the
evil that is being done to influence our attitude towards the person who does
it, we are making an error. It is scarcely possible to avoid that sometimes,
but we can always to some extent reason ourselves out of it.
272.
Doctors meet with cases of the most loathsome and
horrible diseases – which in many an instance the man concerned has brought
entirely upon himself. But no doctor who is really earnest in his work thinks
of that when the patient is before him. He does not shrink from the man with
horror, but regards the disease as an enemy that has to be fought and
conquered. That is a very good example of the attitude that we ought to be able
to adopt when we have to deal with a degraded person. Undoubtedly the
probabilities are that we could not produce very much effect upon an absolutely
degraded drunkard, whose will is almost gone; but to shrink from him in horror
or to feel contempt is not the way to help him. In the same way when a man
commits a terrible crime we may have the greatest possible horror of the crime,
but not of the criminal. It is difficult for us to separate them, but we have
to do it.
273.
There is another curious little point about that. The
things which horrify us most are those to which we have a certain leaning
ourselves – from which we are conceivably in danger. When one is absolutely
free from the slightest tendency towards a particular crime one looks down on
it without horror; but if one feels oneself filled with horror at a particular
human failing, he may take it that it is a fault which has been a real danger
to himself not long ago – perhaps a life or two back.
274.
When we go among evil influences we sometimes have to
surround ourselves with a shell in order to keep them off. That is often the
best policy, since we are still very human; but to have to do that is to a
certain extent a confession of weakness.1
(1 Ante, Vol. I, Part V, Ch. 6: Service.) The absolutely
strong man walks straight into the middle of all these perils, certain that
they cannot affect him, but that would not be a wise thing for all of us to do.
Our force is limited and by making a shell we can save ourselves from using up
a certain amount of it unnecessarily. A man who is perfectly sure of his own
power can walk unharmed among all sorts of dangers, because he is sure
of himself. Perfect strength destroys all shrinking. We draw back from a case
of infectious disease because we are afraid we may catch it; if we were certain
we were immune from that disease the idea of catching it would not occur to us.
275.
The idea that we must not think of ourselves as
separate from the wicked or the, foolish man does not necessarily imply that we
must always be in close association with such people, though contact is
sometimes useful. There are many good people who endeavour, in a great city
like London, for example, to help the poor by going to live among them in the
slums. Some of our students hold the opinion that that is also our duty with
regard to the wicked and the foolish people. That is not always the best way to
help them. We may learn from the Masters’ conduct in that respect. The Great
Ones do not come down and live in the slums of our great cities. Why do They
not do so? For one reason, They would be unable to carry on Their work for
humanity. It would take nearly all the time of the Master to clear a place
where He could work at all, and the amount of work done would be reduced to
perhaps one hundredth part of what it would otherwise be.
276.
So with us; it is not in the least necessary that we
should put ourselves into the worst conditions. On the contrary we can often
help more effectively by not hampering ourselves in that way. If a man finds
himself in a peculiarly unpleasant crowd, perhaps filled with some savage
feeling or outburst of passion, he can throw a shell round himself and so
protect himself from the evil influence, but he cannot do very much with that crowd
while he is occupied in doing that. On the other hand, if he were away from it
he would be able to pour more force upon it. Even then, if a crowd of undeveloped
men is under the sway of some crude passion, very little can be done with it
from higher planes, because the force poured out could hardly affect it while
it was in that state. Therefore we need not enter evil surroundings unless we
see clearly that we can do definite good there, although we must do the best we
can if we find ourselves in such an environment. I have heard, for example of
preachers who have gone into drinking saloons and started a religious service,
and there have been cases where such a bold move as that was actually
successful. There would, of course, be many occasions when such a procedure
would end in a fiasco. In these things, as in war, a very bold and apparently
rash move may occasionally turn out well, but usually more can be accomplished
by working in a reasonable way.
277.
Remember that the sin and shame of the world are your
sin and shame; for you are a part of it; your karma is inextricably interwoven with
the great Karma.
278.
We do not realize that down here, but on reaching the
buddhic plane we see that it represents a real truth. There we feel: “I am part
of that which humanity cannot avoid; something exists in it which is a shame to
me” and we feel it so
because we as part of humanity have caused it. On the other hand we have our
share in every good that has been done. When one man has taken a step
forward we feel it as a triumph for all; through him all humanity has come a
little nearer to its goal.
279.
And before you can
attain knowledge you must have passed through all places, foul and clean alike.
Therefore, remember that the soiled garment you shrink from touching may have
been yours yesterday, may be yours tomorrow. And if you turn with horror from
it, when it is flung upon your shoulders, it will cling the more closely to
you. The self-righteous man makes for himself a bed of mire. Abstain because it
is right to abstain, not that yourself shall be kept clean.
280.
This passage, with which the Master Hilarion’s note
concludes, has often been misunderstood; some people have interpreted it to
mean that each individual at some time must have committed all possible sins.
It does not mean that, because the wise man does learn something from the experience
of others. When we have seen a person
burnt by putting his hand in the fire we need not put our own hand into it also
before we are sure it is not a good
thing to do.1 (1 Ante.
Vol. II, p. 106.) So we need not
commit all possible crimes in order to make up our minds about them. We have
all at some stage of evolution risen from a primitive human condition and have passed through the various
stages of life between that and our present condition, but there is no reason
to assume that we did badly in each stage. There is some reason to suppose that
most of us in the course of our long series of lives have sampled the different
types of mistakes which it is possible for a human being to make, but we
certainly did not go through every detail. When one form of a particular evil
is touched, that, I think, stands to the wise soul as experience of a wide
range of similar mistakes.2
2 Ante. Vol. II, p. 106.
281.
Then there is another consideration. Every man when he
reaches the buddhic consciousness looks out through that and experiences all
that others experience. We think of the glory and the wonder of the buddic
consciousness because it brings us into union with the Masters. We must not
forget that it also brings us into harmony with the vicious and the criminal. Their
feelings must be experienced, as well as the glory and the splendour of the
higher life. So when we are able to touch the buddhic plane we may gain
experience of the lower and more unpleasant aspects of life by entering into
the consciousness of the people who are going through those particular phases. We
do not require to do this as a lesson, because we already know by the
hypothesis that these are things which are impossible for us. But we must have
sufficient experience to be perfectly sympathetic, or we cannot give help to
others. The perfectly sympathetic person knows intuitively the difficulties and
temptations of others, and so is full of love even for the erring one. By
sympathy he makes the “soiled garment” his own. When we have finally abandoned
separateness and realized unity we shall find that we are merged in the divine Life,
and that the attitude of love is the only one which we can adopt towards any of
our fellow-men, whether they be high or low.
282.
6. Kill out desire
for sensation.
283.
Learn from
sensation and observe it, because only so can you commence the science of
self-knowledge, and plant your foot on the first step of the ladder.
284.
A.B. – The disciple
must observe the working of sensation in himself, so that he may gain some
self-knowledge from it. He can attain to such knowledge only by the deliberate
study of his own thoughts. The first effect of trying to study your own
thoughts is to stand away from them, to separate them from yourself. The very
fact of your studying them has drawn your life away from them, so as to destroy
for the time being the identification of yourself with your thoughts which
habitually exists. A man does not identify himself with the object of his
study, with the thing at which he is looking. It is a saying among the
followers of Shankaracharya that subject and object can never be the same. So
the very effort of study weakens the forms, and in that mere act you are
gaining freedom.
285.
Closely allied to this advice is the instruction to
test experiences, the object being that the man may experience the condition of
being no longer affected by them. When a man is observing his own sensation, in
order to learn from it, be may experience that sensation, but at the same time
he may do with it something higher – he may measure this force without yielding
to it. There will come times too, when the disciple who is practising this
observation of sensations will find that dormant sensations in himself are
being re-awakened.
286.
All of us have reminiscences of the past, which may be
said to hang about us as our dead selves, and are liable to be revivified from
outside. They may come to life again by contact with other men’s thought-forms
along the same lines, or they may be awakened by the deliberate action of some
power which is working for our purification, or is testing us either from the
dark or the white side. Suppose a man has that dead self vivified he will then feel
what is usually called the force of temptation. The disciple, having studied the
way in which these things work, recognizes what has happened; he measures the
power of the resuscitated thought and says to it: “You are not my living Self;
you are merely my ‘I’ of the past – so get away from me.”
287.
Sometimes in a moment of temptation it is helpful to
recognize that it is merely your past that has been revivified, and then you
are right to say: “This is not I.” Then you look on it as outside yourself, as
no part of your being or activity, and you know that it cannot hold you or
stain you.1 (1 Ante.
Vol. II, p. 154, 315.) The patient confidence that arises from this
knowledge has a great element of strength in it. You know that you are drawing
nearer the time when you will not even feel this temptation. Presently it will
not have the power to affect you at all.
288.
In the deliberate process of weighing, measuring, and
observing his own past feelings and thoughts, the disciple is killing the very
last possibility of life in that dead self. The Voice of the Silence means
this, when it says with regard to desire: “Take heed lest from the dead it
should again arise.” The old feelings and thoughts are done with, not when they
are merely buried out of sight, but when the very last fragment of them is
worked out to the end, when the man looks at them and sees with perfect
clearness just what they are and that they are no part of himself. In this
quiet study he then kills them beyond all possibility of recall to life.
289.
C.W.L. – We have first to
learn to observe the working of sensation in ourselves from outside. So long as
we are being swept away by it we cannot learn anything from it, because we are
then slaves to it, but if we can rise and look down upon it, and think of it as
something belonging to our past we are then in a position to observe and study
it.
290.
Waves of sensation are flowing all over the world and
we have to learn to understand them so as to be able to help others, but of
course we can do that only when we are no longer swayed by them. Doubtless it
is largely a matter of temperament, but for many it is one of the greatest difficulties
that sensations and emotions swirl them about, and as yet they do not
understand fully how to control them. It is like standing in the breakers and
trying to master them. A man cannot govern a thing which knocks him over again
and again and sweeps him away; but people do not realize that emotion is really
not an external force like that, but that it is within one-self and may be brought
perfectly within one’s control if one understands how to do it.
291.
The way is to get a firm grip on it in the very
beginning. A wave of anger, depression, jealousy, or any of these passions will
start in a moment and grow rapidly into a very big thing. It comes up so
suddenly and people are so accustomed to regard it as the self that they do not
for the moment recognize it, and so do not at once pull up and stop it, and say:
“This is not I; I decline to be swept away; I stand firm.” If we remember to do
that in time the emotion disappears promptly. Most people make the resolve not
to be overcome when they are quite calm, but unfortunately when the wave of
sensation arrives with a rush upon them they do not at the moment want to
resist it. The soul inside is not immediately awake to the danger, so it allows
itself to be swept away and to be identified with the emotion or sensation. We
must therefore learn to catch it exactly at the moment of its coming, for if we
let that slip it is a very difficult matter, when the sensation is in full
blast, to check it suddenly, though sometimes another person can do it for us.
Afterwards, when we remember, we regret it. The practical thing to do is to try
to control the sensation each time a little sooner, and if we can suppress it
once before it gets into its swing, the probability is that we shall be able to
do so invariably after that.
292.
It is difficult at first only because the man as a
Self has abdicated his rights on so many previous occasions that he has got out
of the habit of asserting them. But if he will once assert them at the critical
moment he will find that he can do it again and again, because the elemental
that is the cause of the difficulty will begin to be afraid, will begin to realize
that he cannot sweep everything before him. At first he is quite confident,
like a dog that rushes at a man, barking and snarling because he thinks him to
be afraid; but if the man does not turn and run away the dog hesitates and
begins to be a little doubtful about the enterprise. The elemental has not the
intelligence of a dog. He may or may not know that we are stronger than he, but
if he does not, it is only because we have not asserted ourselves. We should
let him know that we are his master; when once he feels that, he will hesitate
at the very beginning to start his wave. Check him at the beginning, and there
will be no further trouble.
293.
We have to learn from sensation by observing it in
others also. In this way we come to understand human nature. We can see how
other people make fools of themselves under the influence of emotion, and
seeing how bad it looks in them, and how much harm it obviously does them, we
learn to repress any touch of the same thing in ourselves. It is naturally much
easier to see things in others than in ourselves, when we are standing outside
as spectators. We should not, however, look at other people in order to
criticize them and pick out their faults, but only to see what we can learn
from them. When we see them distinctly not living up to their best and highest,
because of some passion or emotion or some feeling of repugnance, we can make a
mental note of that, without feeling in the least .that we are better than
they, and we can think: “Might not the same thing have happened to me? Let me
see that it shall not happen.” Thus without getting into the habit of
criticizing, which is always bad, we can learn from the mistakes of other
people. When we see another person come to grief, however sorry we may be for
him, there can be no harm in thinking: “Let me not fall over the precipice too;
it is enough that one person has done so.”
294.
Great waves of sensation flooded the world during the
war. Among them was a tremendous amount of repugnance and hatred against the
powers with whom we happened to be at war. I am not in the least meaning to
defend the atrocities committed by those powers. I know that they occurred,
because I have myself, astrally, seen a very great deal of them, that filled me
with shame for humanity. I do not for a moment wish to deny those facts, to
gloss them over, or to excuse them. But there was also great danger and harm in
the strong rush of feeling against those who committed the crimes. The people
responsible for the atrocities were those who committed them, and the individuals
by whose orders they were done – not the whole nation. Assuredly a great many
things were done by Englishmen in the past with which we should not like to
identify ourselves – and that has been the same in every nation. We must not
let ourselves be carried away into injustice in thought any more than into injustice
of speech or of action.
295.
Our enemies intentionally went to work deliberately to
stir up hatred against us. That may, perhaps, have been effective for the time,
as one of the tricks of the campaign. They may have found that it paid in
getting recruits and money, and so on; but it was a serious moral mistake. By
it they put themselves quite conclusively in the wrong, as far as all higher
aspects of the matter were concerned. But there is danger in such a case lest
we should feel hatred too. One has to be absolutely determined in the fight
against evil, to carry it through to the uttermost, and yet be entirely free
from anything like a thought of hatred. Remember how the Lord Buddha said: “Hatred
never ceaseth by hatred.” On the contrary, it is always stirred up by it.
296.
When one hears of terrible atrocities perpetrated upon
women and children, one cannot but feel intense indignation. There is no harm
in feeling indignant against such evil-doing. It is a terrible thing, and all
right-minded people will and should denounce it decidedly, without any sort of
palliation or excuse; but it would be a great mistake to hate the unfortunate
man who commits the crimes. He is to be pitied much more than blamed. It is not
our business to blame him, but it is our duty to make it impossible for him to
do these things again. Our attitude should be that which a man would take
towards some wild beast that is attacking his children. He would not dignify it
by hating it, but he .would put it out of the way. We should be exceedingly
sorry for the unfortunate people who did such things, because we see what the
karma of it must be.
297.
It is a terrible thing that women and children should
be massacred, more terrible, perhaps, for the relations than for the victims
themselves, but it is worst of all for those who commit the crime; it is they
who are most to be pitied, because their suffering in the end will be very far
more terrible.
298.
As far as lies in our power we will take steps to
prevent what has been done from being done again, but we must have no sense of
hatred. It is a case of noblesse oblige. We stand quite infinitely above
the sort of person who does that kind of thing; we are ages past him in
evolution and development; we stand as far removed from him as he stands from
the animal kingdom, and since that is so we ought to show our higher
development by not sharing that passion of hatred.
299.
We can study the effects of sensation only if we
dissociate ourselves from it, if we stand outside and try to control the
feeling and to learn from it. We must not be swept away in any such maelstrom
of popular feeling, but we must try to see where it is wrong, and do what we
can to put it right. Many people, who are under the influence of that sensation
of tremendous passion, think of us as rather apathetic, and cold; it is even
possible that they sometimes think of us as lacking in patriotism if we refuse
to hate. Of course that is not logical, but then people are not logical when
under the influence of these great waves of hatred. We can explain to them that
patriotism does not call on one to hate other countries, but they sometimes do
not see that we can love our own country without being obliged to hate another.
300.
Our attitude towards these things is very much that
which we should take towards the troubles of little children. A child breaks a
doll and is in a tempest of tears and a passion of regret over it; we do all we
can to sympathize with that child, but we are quite philosophical, we do not
share the passion of regret. We are not in despair because a doll is broken or
because this or that small matter may have happened in the school-life of the
child. We realize that there is a future, and that as compared to that future
all these little matters are only temporary and not of great importance,
although they are tremendously so to the child. We should be failing in our
duty if we did not give the sympathy, but we should be foolish if we felt as
much as that child felt – we should ourselves be acting in a childish manner.
It is exactly the same with the man who is learning to adopt a philosophical
attitude. He sympathizes with the people who are so passionately upset over
these things, but he himself is not disturbed. Just as one says to the child: “Oh,
well, never mind, it will be all right by and by,” so we should like to say to
those who are surging under these emotions: “If you would only believe it, everything
will come right and all will go well.” If we say that, we are considered unsympathetic,
but it is absolutely true. We often find it difficult to avoid wonder as to how
people can be so blind. We see them surging wildly about things that do not
matter in the least. They are often people with splendid possibilities, but
they do not see them, and they allow themselves to be overwhelmed by mad surges
of desire. We did the same thing ourselves thousands of years ago, perhaps.
Therefore we learn to be patient, understanding that it is a stage in
evolution, though a very undesirable stage. So those of us who are still in
danger of yielding to emotions of that sort must pull ourselves up and say: “Twenty
lives ago this was perhaps excusable, but now, the time for it is past.” If in
every-day life we see a man of mature age throwing away all his time in
pleasure we know that that may have been all very well twenty years ago, but
now he ought to be thinking about the more serious things of life. In the same
way we ought to have risen to a level where our emotions are the higher
emotions, where we have the one great idea of the work that God wills us to do.
301.
7. Kill out the hunger for growth.
302.
Grow as the flower grows, unconsciously, but eagerly
anxious to open its soul to the air. So must you press forward to open your
soul to the Eternal. But it must be the Eternal that draws forth your strength
and beauty, not desire of growth. For in the one case you develop in the
luxuriance of purity; in the other you harden by the forcible passion for
personal stature.
303.
A.B. – In the later
stage of growth the disciple will feel himself opening out into the Eternal and
realizing its beauty more and more. The wish to grow that he may be greater
than his brother then becomes impossible for him. Before that stage is reached
he is still in danger, because of the greatness of what he has already
achieved. If he thinks of his growth as belonging to the separated self, and
feels that he is himself becoming great, he is likely to fall. The only way to
avoid that danger is to get rid of the wish to be great, to yield not to the
desire for growth for one’s own sake. For when he is on the higher plane of
human growth the disciple must be indifferent as to whether he grows or not,
but must care only for the divine Life and the divine Will, and think only of
the joy that that can bring to all who welcome it into their lives.
304.
C.W.L. – We are to grow
as the flower grows. Why? Because the flower grows unselfishly, absolutely
altruistically. It grows not to display itself, but in order that its race may
become greater by its death. It exists not for the sake of obtaining fruit for
itself, because the fruit does not come until the flower is dead. Its entire
growth is not for itself, but for other plants yet to come. So it is not by
thinking of ourselves, but by striving for the good of others that we must
press forward. The one great idea – that of helping in the work of the Logos – must
draw us on. We must work for the attainment of all virtues and powers simply in
order that we may be of more use in His service; by forgetting ourselves in
unselfish work we grow as part of the whole and so “develop in the luxuriance
of purity”.
CHAPTER 6
RULES
9 TO 12
305.
C.W.L. – As far as we
have gone in this book we have had the negative side of things before us. We
have been told to kill out certain desires, but now we come to the positive
side and learn what we may, and indeed must, desire. It may strike us as
curious that we should be told to desire anything. Those who have studied the Indian
books will remember that this is a point on which even the Upanishads differ. One
Upanishad deprecates desire of all kinds; it argues that even to desire the right
must be avoided, because we must be absolutely without any preference for this
or for that. Another of those great scriptures directs that we must have the
desire for progress, and says that when all other desires are conquered but the
desire for the growth of the soul then there is for a man no more possibility
of grief. We can reconcile those two statements if we take the first one to
mean that if we have the desire to cooperate in even the higher work of the
world as a separate self, thinking of ourselves and of the great things we can
do, there is still a tinge of the idea of separation; but if we are able to
think of ourselves as a part of humanity and
as earning our advance on behalf of the humanity of which we are a part, and there
is no longer any thought of self, then we have raised and purified our desire
into an aspiration which is altogether desirable.
306.
9. Desire
only that which is within you.
307.
For within
you is the light of the world – the only light that can be shed upon the Path. If
you are unable to perceive it within you, it is useless to look for it elsewhere.
308.
The thought
expressed in this comment is common to all religions, though they put it in
different ways. We get it in Christianity, but as a rule only the Christian
mystics seem to have understood it. We have it in the beautiful verse:
309.
Though Christ a
thousand times in Bethlehem be born,
310.
But not within
thyself, thy soul shall be forlorn;
311.
And on the cross
of Calvary He hangeth but in vain,
312.
Unless within thy
heart it be set up again.
313.
It is easy to see
what that means. If a man does not believe in his own inherent divinity there
is no hope of progress for him, because he would then have nothing within him
on which he could work; nothing within which would lift him to anything higher;
but if he knows that there is within him the wonderful Christ principle, then
he recognizes that to, unfold that divinity is only a question of time, and
that his share in the work is to bring his outer vehicles into harmony, so that
this inner glory may shine through. That is the meaning of the words: “Christ
in you the hope of glory.” The hope that we have within us is this divine
spark; the man who refuses to believe he has that within him places an
insuperable obstacle in his own path, until he realizes his mistake.
314.
It is indeed true
that salvation can be gained only through the Christ – not a man who lived and
died, but the Christ principle within us.1
(1 Ante., Vol.
I, Part I, Ch. 4: The Preliminary Prayer.)
Within us is our saviour. This is the true Christian doctrine, in support of
which we might quote many texts. All the ways in which the modern presentation
of Christianity has – if one may put it so – gone wrong and made itself
ridiculous, arise from the misunderstanding of that great idea. It should
always be remembered that Christianity started with the beautiful Gnostic
philosophy, but the ignorant among its followers refused to include in their
scheme of religion anything which was beyond their comprehension, or anything
which took years of study to learn. So they cast out the great Gnostic doctors
as heretics. They applied to religion that unwise method of coming to a
decision, the majority vote, with dire results.
315.
Originally
Christianity had a most beautiful statement of philosophy – the one philosophy
that lies behind all religions. When the Gospel story, which was meant as an
allegory, was degraded into a pseudo-historical account of the life of a man
the religion became incomprehensible. Consequently all the texts which really
refer to this higher side of things have been distorted, and of course, they
will not fit in with the truth which lies behind the idea. Because Christianity
has forgotten much of its own original teaching, in these days it is customary
to deny that it could ever have possessed any esoteric teaching. There is,
however, sufficient evidence to convince the unprejudiced student that this
higher knowledge did exist and was well known to the apostles and Church
fathers. I cannot go fully into that at present; suffice it to remind the
reader that Origen, the greatest of the Church fathers, asserts the existence
of this secret teaching. He draws a distinction between “popular irrational
faith” which leads to what he calls “somatic Christianity,” and the “spiritual
Christianity”. By “somatic Christianity” he means that faith which is based on
the Gospel history, and adds that it is a very good teaching for the masses,
but that the spiritual Christian has the Gnosis, and therefore understands that
all the incidents related therein – the birth, the baptism, the illumination,
the crucifixion, the resurrection, and the ascension happened not once only in
one place, but are steps in the spiritual life of every Christian man as he
progresses.1 1 See ante. Vol. I,
Part V, Ch. 5: Superstition.
316.
Modern orthodoxy
still bases its beliefs on the ignorant faith of the undeveloped multitude, and
persists in disowning what now remains of its once magnificent heritage, in the
shape of a few priceless fragments of the Gnostic teaching. Having lost the higher
interpretation it makes a desperate effort to present the lower one in a comprehensible
form, but that cannot be done. Students of Theosophy have the knowledge which
enables them to interpret all these strange doctrines, and to see sense and
beauty even in the crude utterances of the street preacher, because they understand
what he would mean if only he knew a little more about his subject.
317.
So what we are to
desire is that which is within ourselves all the time; we shall not find it elsewhere.
This very same idea was presented to us long ages ago in ancient Egypt. There
they centred all their ideas of religion in “the hidden light” and “the hidden
work”.1 (1 Ante. Vol. I, Part
V, Ch. 6: Service.) “The hidden light” was
the Light that is in every man, and “the hidden work” was that which would
enable him to manifest it, to bring it out in himself and then to help its
development in others. That was the cardinal point of their creed – that the
Light is there, however much it may be overlaid: and however hopeless it may
appear, our work is to withdraw the veils and let the Light shine forth.
318.
People often make
the mistake of looking for it elsewhere. They say: “We want the Masters to help
us; we want the Masters to raise us.” But I say, with the greatest reverence
and respect, the Master cannot do that, the Logos Himself cannot do it. The
Master can tell us how we may raise ourselves. The process is exactly analogous
to the development of strength in the muscle. No one can do that for another,
but if he has the knowledge he can tell him how to do it for himself, and that
is all the help one can have from outside. Another person can tell us that he
followed certain rules and exercises and found that they brought good results.
The Master or the advanced pupil can also undoubtedly pour upon us force which
makes our work easier, but that is all. It is the same all the way through. If
we do not feel within us the power to respond to the beauty and glory of nature,
that beauty and glory will pass us by. If we cannot see God within ourselves,
it is useless to look for Him outside. When we have realized ourselves as part
of Him, then will the God within respond to the God without, and we shall begin
to be really useful in His work, which, after all, is our chief object in life.
319.
10. Desire
only that which is beyond you.
320.
It is beyond
you, because when you reach it you have lost yourself.
321.
C.W.L. – That
again is a statement which has its parallel in the Christian teaching. Christ
Himself says quite plainly: “He that findeth his life shall lose it: and he
that loseth his life for my sake shall find it.”1 (1
S. Matthew, 10, 39.) That happens over and over
again at various stages. Consider the man of the world living his ordinary
life, which is very largely a life in his emotions – in some cases in quite the
lower emotions. As soon as he begins to understand the higher side of things he
realizes that there is something higher and nobler than that. But he finds also
that unless he is willing to put aside that lower and coarser life, he cannot
really grasp the higher; he must lose the lower in order that he may gain the
higher.
322.
At the next step
the man comes to live in his mind to a large extent. He realizes that to be
swept about by tides of passion is, after all, ignoble, and that the mind
should select and dominate the emotions and allow only such as it approves, for
the sake of progress. Presently he gets beyond that, and finds that the mind
also is not fully satisfactory, but that there is a higher life than that of
the mind. So gradually he begins to live in the ego, and to look at everything
from that standpoint, which is a very great advance. But eventually even that
is not enough for him. He realizes that there is a unity which lies beyond that
stage, and so he begins to have some experience of the buddhic plane, and when
he touches that nothing below it will ever again satisfy him.
323.
Even that
wonderful buddhic consciousness will, in its turn, be transcended. Beyond it is
the consciousness of the atmic plane – nirvana. Above and beyond that again is
the Monad. Those who are not yet Adepts see the Monad manifesting as a triple
spirit on the plane below its own, but on the attainment of Adeptship the Monad
and the ego will have become one, and they will be conscious as the Monad – the
Divine Spark.
324.
At each of these
stages we feel that we have grasped the truth, and entered upon the real life,
but presently we realize that there is something still higher, as high again as
that was beyond our previous experience. All the way up we have to drop the
lower before we can really gain the higher. That is to say, we have to lose the
life we know before we can reach the higher life which we hope to attain. At
each stage, as we reach it, we find that we have lost the self which we have
known previously, because we have transcended it. We have lost it in finding a higher self.
325.
It is written in the
books that we become one with the Logos, merged in Him. Now, that final result
we know nothing of, but this much some of us can say from our own personal
experience, that many such mergings at different levels take place in the
progress of the soul, and in each of them it seems that we become utterly one
with the highest which then we can reach, yet never through all that do we lose
anything of our true Self. When we rise, let us say, into the buddhic consciousness,
and lose the causal body, we have lost the lower life, but that was never more
than a very inadequate manifestation of a small part of us. All that we have
gained through the long series of lives is still there. What we have shed is
only the outer form in which our various qualities expressed themselves. We have
the qualities still, on a higher
level, shining forth with greater brilliancy, but the form in which they were
cast has gone. Because people so constantly identify the life with the form, to
many it seems that should they lose that form there would be nothing left. On
the contrary, nothing that has been gained is ever lost.
326.
11. Desire only that which is unattainable.
327.
It is unattainable, because it for ever recedes. You
will enter the light, but you will never touch the Flame.
328.
C.W.L. – This
does not mean that the higher life at which we aim is unattainable, but that
when we have reached one height we always see another peak beyond. We shall
draw ever nearer and nearer to the Divine, becoming one with Him at level after
level, but the Flame, His true consciousness, we shall never touch. There are
many stages on the way, and they grow more and more indescribable in their
beauty as we rise. To whatever height we raise our consciousness, into whatever
ineffable glories we can rise, we always see something more glorious still
beyond. The Flame ever recedes. So far as any knowledge that we have goes, that
chain of increasing glory and beauty is endless. Perhaps it is not much use
speculating upon that. The Lord Buddha said long ago that it was profitless to
speak of the beginning and the end, because “Veil after veil will lift, but
there must be veil after veil behind.”
329.
I wish I could
bring home to every one, as utterly and as vividly as I myself feel it, this
absolute certainty of the progress that lies ahead, of its wonderful glory and
beauty and power and wisdom and love, how from step to step it rises and
becomes ever more and more indescribable down here, and more and more glorious
and beautiful and true above. The road to it lies through unselfishness. Only
when we rise out of the lower self into the higher life, into the wider
universal Self does the way open, and there is no limit to the glory and the
splendour which man may then attain.
CHAPTER
7
RULES 13 TO 16
330.
13. Desire power ardently.
331.
C.W.L. – The
comment of the Chohan on this is:
332.
And that power which the disciple shall covet is that
which shall make him appear as nothing in the eyes of men.
333.
The power that
makes us appear as nothing in the eyes of men is the power of self-effacement
in the work – of doing it without wanting any credit for it. Many people want
to be in the forefront. That is often regarded as merely a sort of harmless vanity, but it
means that they have not yet forgotten the lower self.
334.
The disciple does
not seek credit for anything he does; he seeks to get the work done and so long
as it is done he cares not at all whether he or somebody else has the credit
for having done it. If he has to put himself forward and draw people round him
he does so, but not because he wants the credit of it. He knows it is always
far better to keep in the background if possible.
335.
It is always best
not to think of results at all, but to do the best we can and forget ourselves.
All occult teaching leads back to that one fundamental fact – forget the lower
self and get to work. Some people are constantly thinking of their own
progress. It is at least better to think of making spiritual progress than to
desire worldly wealth, but it is still selfishness, only in a more
refined form. My own experience would lead me to say that the very best way to
get on is to forget all about one’s own progress and simply devote oneself to
the Master’s work.1 (1Ante.,
Vol. I, Part III, Ch. 2: The One Good Desire. Vol. II, pp. 360-1.) If one does that the rest will follow. It is the old
truth stated in the Gospel: “Seek ye first the kingdom of God, and His
righteousness; and all these things shall be added unto you.”2 (2 S. Matthew, 6, 33.) That is utterly true; these other things come. When
we are not looking for progress we suddenly find that we have really made some,
and that also is well.
336.
When a man first
sees what life in the causal body is really like he also realizes how very
useful he could be at that level, how many lines there are along which his
activity could pour itself out, and he may well be disposed to ask: “Is it not
better that I should do this new and splendid work which I see opening before
me?” I have myself made a practice of seeking the advice or wish of the Master
whenever what seemed to be grand opportunities opened up, and yet there was a
possibility that it might be even better still to renounce them. I would say: “Master,
what do you wish me to do?” Often His reply would be: “It is a matter for you to decide.” Then one can
only use one’s own best judgment. No rule can be laid down in such cases. I
should still be disposed to try the higher; but it must be remembered that we
are cautioned again and again: “Do not let desire for your own development
stand in the way of any useful work that you can do. Your development will come
in due course.” I have always followed that plan, and I think-that it is the
safest attitude.
337.
Through the work
done in that spirit of self-forgetful-ness we gain the power which shall make
us appear as nothing in the eyes of men. Let us, if necessary, welcome
humiliation because it all helps to put the personality out of sight and that
is what is most needed. When opportunities come, we must take them, but always
we should think: “It is not my work; it is the Master’s work.” It does not
matter which of those who follow the Master has the privilege of doing any
particular piece Of work for Him. Our business is to watch that we may lose no
opportunity of doing any part of His work.
338.
We should
understand that there is nothing small or great in His work, but that anything,
however small, done and offered to Him is as important in His sight as that
which is a far greater achievement in the world’s eyes. We are a little apt to
want to do what we think is the greater work. That is because we do not see
that all parts of the\work are equally necessary. Realize for a moment how He
must look down upon the whole from His stupendous elevation of wider power and
knowledge. All these pieces of work will look very tiny, but all fit into their
places.
339.
All the problems
of life which seem complex, if not incomprehensible, down here, become far
simpler when looked at from a higher plane. The same thing is true of much
lower levels. When one examines microscopic creatures such as live in a drop of
water one finds complex and beautiful forms of life. The further one goes into
these infinitely small matters the more one discovers their amazing complexity.
One wonders how even to the Deity Himself these worlds could possibly be a, simple
thing, and yet they are, for when we look from even such higher points of view
as we are able to gain, we can see that it is the permutations and combinations
of the seven forces of the One Life which produce all these wonderful results.
The factors involved in the production are few and simple; therefore the higher
one rises the more one can understand, and that which down here seems impossible
to grasp proves quite within reach when viewed from higher levels.
340.
We may reverently
and reasonably assume, I think, that the Logos can hold the whole of His system
simultaneously in His mind, and without any difficulty see what is being done
in every remotest ramification of it. The whole system in all its multiplicity
must be immediately self-evident – something one could put down on a sheet of
foolscap, as it were. To the Manu and Bodhi-sattva the work of moulding and
guiding the races of men, which seems to us so complex and even confused, must
be quite clear and straightforward.
341.
Our business is
to serve the Master in our small sphere. The detail is our care, not His. What
He wants is that the whole work shall go well, and anything that we can do to
make it do so is our share in it. Those who stand nearer to Him in thought and
have by such association grown somewhat into His attitude in regard to it, are
always eager to do anything, however simple, which may seem of use. We can
write a little letter, perhaps, which will change the current of a man’s life,
or we may deliver a lecture and try to change the opinion of some hundreds of
people, and not succeed; the little letter is just as real a piece of work.
There may be some of us who are so busy that we cannot do anything personally.
In that case we are probably earning money, and so perhaps we could give some
money to enable others to do that work. There are a great many little ways in
which every one can work. It is no use waiting for a big opportunity with the
idea that when it comes we shall be ready to take it. We are very much more
likely to be ready if we get ourselves into the habit of always doing the
little things that we can do now.
342.
A man who works
without any regard to his own interests and is always willing to remain in the
background is inevitably misunderstood by the world. People understand and
admire a man of strong will, who sets out to make a name for himself, to make
an impression, and pushes his way to the front. Such a man has succeeded, from
their point of view; he has shown the world that he is a strong man. The
occultist may be in reality much more forceful, but he would not show his power
in that way. He seeks generally to efface himself. He realizes that one of the
greatest qualifications is to know when to get out of the way, to know when to
let the divine power do its work without spoiling and hindering it by putting
himself in the way of it. It seems so simple, and yet the fact that there are
hundreds of workers who cannot do it shows that it is really a great difficulty.
343.
The man of the
world is apt to regard the occultist as a person of no particular will-power,
as one who is always ready to give way. So he is, as regards the minor details
of life. He lets others have their way in things which do not matter, and is
even willing to be managed up to a certain point; but when it comes to a
question of principle, he takes a firm stand. He cares nothing about what
people say. People who talk and speculate about others are wrong in nine cases
out of ten, so what does it matter what they happen to think about us? As
Tennyson says, “Let them rave.” Of course, I do not mean that we should utterly
ignore all worldly conventions. In the early days some of our members felt that
it was right to appear different from other people in the matter of wearing
evening dress, and so on. We need not outrage the customs of society in this
way. Moreover, it seems to me that if we wish to recommend our beliefs we must
avoid offending the world unnecessarily. It is not good policy to set ourselves
violently against other people’s ideas. When there comes a point in which no
principle is involved we must give way, merely because there is no sense in
flying in the face of the usages of the world.
344.
In all matters of
principle we must take a firm stand. For example, strict vegetarianism is with
us a principle, because we believe it to be best in every way, not only for
ourselves but for all the world around us. It is a little inconvenient when we
go out to dinner or when we are travelling, but we let such trifling
inconveniences pass, and keep to our own point of view. But in a vast number of
other things, which really do not matter, it saves trouble to yield to the
ordinary customs of the time. As regards our dress – to take another instance. The
dress of modern man is peculiarly ugly, uncomfortable and unhealthy, but it
saves trouble to adopt it. If we set ourselves against it, however much more
rational, aesthetic and beautiful our costume might be, we should attract unwelcome
attention, and should probably be regarded as more or less insane. It is not
worth while. It is better not to make ourselves unduly conspicuous by opposing things
which do not matter. But when a principle is involved we must hold steadily to
what we think is right.1 1 Ante., Vol. I, Part
II, Ch. 3: Right and Wrong.
345.
If we could get
into an absolutely impersonal attitude about all work it would help us very
much. Ruskin speaks of that with regard to art; he says that while self-praise
and conceit are vulgar beyond words, undue self-depreciation is only another
form of vulgarity. We should aim at the condition of mind in which we are able
to view the work from the outside, and to say: “Be it mine or yours, or whose
else it may, this also is well.” We must be able to praise a good piece of work
when we see it, not because it is ours or our friends ‘, or because it bears a
great name, but just because it is good, putting aside absolutely the question
of who did it. I am afraid we do not always do this. Our reason for quoting something
is not always because it is fine and beautiful, but because Madame Blavatsky
said it or Dr. Besant wrote it.
346.
There is,
however, a side to that which is quite right and true. When people meet with a
statement about something which they do not know and cannot verify for themselves,
it is a matter of importance to them who said it. They may say: “Dr. Besant
makes this statement; I have great reason to believe that she knows all about
this matter, consequently I accept her statement.” After all, that is no more
than we do in regard to science. There are many facts in science which we have
no means of proving for ourselves, but because certain eminent men have investigated
these subjects and have come to certain conclusions we accept them. But when we
consider a beautiful ethical statement, it does not matter whether it comes
from the Bible or the Bhagavad-Gita, the Koran or the Vedas;
we should accept it for its worth. It is then a question of the felicity of the
expression and the beauty of the idea.
347.
Just as we accept
things, or try to do so, for what they are worth, so we must try to value our
own work at what it is worth, and not think that, because we have done it, it
must necessarily be well done. Most men who can do anything very well know also
the imperfections of their work. When a thing is good we should gladly admit
that it is so; when we see faults in our own or in anyone else’s work we should
not hesitate to say: “I do not agree; I think so-and-so might be better done.”
It is well to get into the attitude of mind that does not care whence a thing
comes if it is a good thing, and also does not hesitate to put aside the evil,
even when it comes from oneself.
348.
That is
difficult, truly, because when that is perfectly done it means that the man is
looking down from the ego upon this lower world. Even the use of the lower mind
will give much of that power, although we get it perfectly only in the causal
body. The lower mind can exercise discrimination, and if we use it from the
higher standpoint and do not allow it to be clouded by personal feeling, it is
a very fine and beautiful thing when fully developed. We are rather proud of
our intellectual development in this fifth sub-race of the fifth root race,
which emphasizes this discriminating work of the lower mind, but what we call
intellect is only a very small thing as compared with that which is to develop
in the course of the next round, which will be that really devoted to
intellect. We are proud of the achievements of the lower mind, and not without
a certain amount of reason; it has done wonderful work in science and
invention. But only those who are able to look forward into the future and have
also seen the Masters, who are men of the future, realize what we shall be
perhaps in the course of a few thousands of years. I can bear witness that our
highest intellectual activity now is but child’s play compared to what it will
be in the future, so it is clear that there is a splendid vista opening before
us.
349.
What the ordinary
person calls his mind is exclusively the lowest part of it. In his mind there
are four subdivisions, consisting of matter of the seventh, sixth, fifth and
fourth sub-planes of the mental plane respectively, but practically he is using
matter of the lowest or seventh sub-plane only. That is very near to the astral
plane; therefore all his thoughts are coloured by reflections from the astral
world, and so they are much mixed with emotion, feelings and desires. Very few
people can deal with the sixth sub-plane as yet. Our great scientific men
certainly use it a good deal, but unfortunately they often mingle with it the
matter of the lowest sub-plane and then they become jealous of other people’s discoveries
and inventions. If they can rise to the fifth sub-plane they are already
getting much more free from the possibility of astral entanglement. If they can
raise themselves to the fourth sub-plane, which is the highest part of the mental
body, they are then in the very middle of the mental plane, and next to them is
the causal body. They are then far away from the possibility of having their
thoughts affected by astral vibrations.
350.
We can understand
how these things work. A vibration is most easily received by that which is in
tune with it. If a man feels very angry he is liable to stir up the emotion of
anger in the astral bodies of other people around him. That will also disturb
their lower thought; but it will not affect their higher thought, if they have
any – most people have not as yet. One of the things we as students are trying
to do in our thought and meditation is to awaken the higher parts of the mental
body and bring them into working order. Those who meditate regularly on the
Masters and on the things connected with Them, must be using the higher part of
the mental body to some extent, and the more it is used, the more will our
thought be unaffected by desires, passions and emotions. But since most people
do not get so far as that, the great mass of thought in the world is very much
coloured by desire, and most thought-forms that we see are loaded with astral
as well as with mental matter.
351.
We all live much
too close together, with the consequence that even while other people may not
be thinking of us they affect us. Of course we in turn affect them, and we
should always definitely try to affect them for good. If we set ourselves to be
a centre of uttermost peace and love we shall very greatly help all those
around us, but while we are centres of desire and emotion and selfish feeling
we make development impossible not only for ourselves but for all those near to
us, and that is a very serious matter. Every aspirant ought to take to heart
the fact that he is preventing the progress of others if he gives way to this
personal desire.
352.
The power of
self-effacement is impossible of attainment until we have utterly weeded out
all personal desire. We talk of our devotion to our work and to the Masters;
surely that is not too much to do for Their sake. Even if a very great effort
is necessary we ought to be willing to make it for the sake of these Great Ones
who have done so much for us, through whom all the Theosophical teaching has
come to us. It is not a question of affording Them gratification by doing these
things – though surely They cannot but be pleased to see the progress of those
whom They are trying to help – but it is also common sense. If we want to help
in evolution, the first and most necessary thing to do is to take ourselves in
hand. We must gain that control over the lower self which makes us appear as
nothing in the eyes of men. Be it so; many of the great forces are working
unseen. We may be among those forces, and as such we can afford to appear insignificant
in the sight of the world.
353.
14. Desire
peace fervently. The peace you shall desire is that sacred peace which nothing
can disturb, and in which the soul grows as does the holy flower upon the still
lagoons.
354.
C.W.L. – This
short aphorism is closely connected with the foregoing one. The power which we
are told to desire leads to peace; unless we have power over self we can have
no peace.
355.
Only when we have
gained peace can we give it to others; to be able to do that is surely one of
the greatest and most beautiful of powers. Most people’s lives are full of
worry and anxiety, of jealousy and envy. All the -time they are just a swirl
not only of emotions, but also of unsatisfied desires. Many of those who take
up the study of occultism, that is, the study of the reality which lies behind,
still expect to be able to go on living that kind of life. Even some of those
who are supposed to have been students of occultism for years, and are trying
to draw nearer to the Masters, apparently cannot yet give up their desires.
They make no serious attempt to get rid of all their foolish and disturbing emotions,
and then they wonder why they do not make progress and why others seem to pass
on in front of them. How can they expect to advance until they have left all
these things behind them? Until we are quite free from such disturbances it is
absolutely impossible to make any real higher progress. If we want to set up
communications with the Master, we must have perfect peace within.
356.
It is said that
struggle is a necessity for progress. It is certainly true that there is a long
stage in the evolution of the soul when it is in a constant state of struggle
and strife. On looking back into the past we can see that progress was then
more rapid in a life of storm and stress than when the conditions were easier.
In that rough-hewing of the character all the troubles and difficulties which
men encounter and the opposition which comes in their way no doubt teach them
something; they learn their lessons from them. But at the higher stage at which
the disciple has arrived that state of struggle is no longer of value. For
growth of the higher kind, perfect peace is necessary. A Master once wrote: “The
law of the survival of the fittest is the law for the evolution of the brute;
but the law of sacrifice is the law of the evolution of man.” Many people think
they will get peace when their mad desires are satisfied, but they find by
experience that it is not so. They then begin to think what a sad thing it is
that they have yielded to them, and they realize that they ought to have risen
above them. There is no peace to be gained by the satisfaction of desire. Peace
is to be attained in one way only: by putting aside the lower desires and
developing the power which makes us “as nothing in the eyes of men.”
357.
It is said here
that the holy flower grows upon the still lagoons. It is only in still water
that the lotus can unfold itself to its best; it cannot do so if it is buffeted
about by wind and storm. It is only in peace that the soul can unfold. Storms
of passion and desire are just like storms that beat down the flowers on the
physical plane. All developments of the higher kind are like very delicate
flowers, and if they are subjected to violent storms of passion they become
crushed out, and disappear. People who are always in royal rages, who
constantly brood over all kinds of foolish personal matters, who are always
thinking about their own feelings and are filled with jealousy and envy of
others, cannot develop all the fine and delicate fronds and tendrils that mean
progress.
358.
People in general
have very little scientific idea of what occult progress, real evolution,
means. Their methods of education alone show that they do not understand it.
There is a certain amount of the evolution through which we have gone – up to
about the level of the savage and a little higher than that – which we may
consider as fairly definitely estabished; that is to say, we could not very
well fall back below that point under any circumstances. But the growth that
comes beyond that – beyond the almost animal part, or at any rate the lower and
emotional part, of man – is a question of exceedingly delicate development of many
sorts. The things which differentiate the highly cultured and artistic person
from the quite coarse and undeveloped person are all of a very subtle nature – matters
of long and slow and careful growth; they are tender shoots of great promise,
which have hardly as yet blossomed forth, and have certainly not yet reached
what they shall be in the future. The first blast of unfavourable conditions
destroys that finer growth. The rough and tumble of modern education, in which
children are frightened and sometimes even ill-treated, has the effect of
crushing out all the delicate bloom of culture and refinement which souls that
have come into these child bodies may have been acquiring for a very long time
past – perhaps for twenty or thirty lives. In consequence the children become very
much like primitive savages. They are often full of fear and hatred and a great
sense of abiding injustice, and all the finer development which really marks
the difference between a later and, an earlier sub-race is swept away.
359.
People do not in
the least realize what they are doing when they destroy these things, as they
so often do. I constantly see boys and girls who belong perhaps to ordinary
parents, but are themselves quite promising; if they were taken in hand and
brought along in the right way, they would make distinct progress in this life.
But their surroundings are utterly unsuited for such development and all the
finer growth is lopped off and beaten back, and they go through life as quite
ordinary people. I have seen cases where the same thing happened over and over
again in as many as perhaps fifteen or twenty lives; the progress that might
have been made in the first case was not made until the twentieth. Probably the
accumulated karma of living a little better in a quiet way in each of those
lives made it necessary at last that the ego should be given better
surroundings, and then he got his opportunity. But so far as we can see that
same development could just as well have been made twenty lives before, if only
the environment had been a little better.
360.
It is a sad thing
for the people who repress those delicate touches. I suppose there is no
greater crime f than the repression of those who are trying to make progress. That
is one of the things which the Christ meant when He spoke of the sin against
the Holy Ghost which should not be forgiven either in this world or in the
world to come. That word “forgiven” is, however, a mistranslation – “to abandon”,
“to put aside”, gives a better idea of the meaning. What is meant is perfectly
clear. The sin against the Holy Ghost is the repression of the divine spirit in
man; it produces a karmic result which could nor be put right in this
dispensation – neither in this world-period, nor perhaps in the next, so
serious is it.
361.
Many people
commit this crime against themselves as well as against their children. They do
not give the higher part of themselves an opportunity to grow. Children are
often able to see nature-spirits and other beautiful things which older people
cannot see. There is no reason why the older people should not see them also, if
their sensitiveness had not been destroyed by the sort of life into which they
have so often been plunged. Sometimes later on in life with great difficulty they
begin to recover the power, not only of clairvoyance, but also the power to
appreciate all that is artistic and beautiful, all the subtle shades of feeling
and perception that mean culture and real education.
362.
The things which
affect the higher progress are all exceedingly delicate – so carefully, so exactly
balanced, that the least touch in the wrong direction will throw them back for
weeks and months. It is possible to throw back the growth of months in a single
day. Therefore very much depends upon surroundings. One cannot always calculate
upon obtaining again the same surroundings, so the occultist always strives to
make the utmost use of whatever conditions he has at any time, while he is also
watchful that none of them shall drag him down. One of the Puranas says:
363.
Without a body no
one attains the object of the soul; therefore should one take care of his body
as a treasure, and perform good deeds. A village or a field or possessions or a
house, or good and bad pieces of karma may be obtained again – but this body
never again.1 1 Garuda Purana
Saroddhara, xvi, 17, 18.
364.
People sometimes
say: I cannot do much in this life; I shall try what I can do in the next.” It
is always well to keep before us the idea of the next life and what we can do
in it, but it is not safe to depend too much on that, because the karma behind
each person is sure to be more or less mixed and it sometimes asserts itself in
waves. We may have karma at a certain time which will give us good
surroundings. It does not follow that in the next life we shall have conditions
equally good. On the whole the probabilities are that our karma will flow on in
much the same groove, but on the other hand there might be a block of unpleasant
karma which the karmic authorities do not think the man strong enough to bear
this time, and in the next life they might let that loose upon him, so that he
might not get such good opportunities.
365.
It is eminently
wise to take all the opportunities available in this life. If we do that, and
thus show the Lords of Karma that we are taking advantage of them, that will
seriously influence the incidence of karma upon us in the next life. It will
constitute a sort of claim for good surroundings. It is not wise because we
have many opportunities in this life, to assume that we shall have them again
in our next life. We may or we may not. I do not like to hear people say: “I am
too old to do anything in this life.” If we make good use of what we have, and
advance ourselves as far as possible, we create a condition of affairs in which
it would be difficult for the karmic deities not to give us opportunities again;
we can make such karma along a particular line that we may take the kingdom of
heaven by storm – we can force the Lords of Karma to so arrange our karma that
the opportunity must come because the causes we have set in motion cannot work
themselves out except along a similar line. Most assuredly it is well to make
full use of every good opportunity that comes to us, lest by chance by
neglecting it we might make a difference of a few thousand years in our evolution.
366.
A few thousand
years are as nothing in the long life of the soul, but we do not want to be delayed
in that way. In the Lives of Alcyone we find, for example, the case of
one young man who had remarkably good opportunities in connection with one, of
the great Masters in a temple in Egypt.
367.
He foolishly
wasted his time, threw away his opportunities and lost them. The Master said
then that He would always be ready to take him again when he came back. It is
only in this life, six thousand years later, that he has come back. That
carelessness lost him a good deal of time. Think of what might have been done
in that six thousand years, if he had taken the offer. At that time the Master
who made it had not yet attained Adeptship. Certainly if the pupil had
accepted, he might have now been very far on the road to Adeptship himself. It
cannot be a matter of indifference whether a man takes such a step as that six
thousand years earlier or later. The man who took it so much earlier would have
all the work of intervening years on the very highest levels to his credit – it
seems impossible that it can be the same thing.
368.
I do not know how
far in the counsels of the Eternal what we call time matters. There is a point
of view to which one may rise in which past and present and future all seem one
eternal now, but even in that eternal now there are some things which are more
opened and others which are less opened, and therefore the acceptance or the
neglect of an opportunity must make a difference, though there may be some way
in which a mistake of that kind may be adjusted in the future, in which somehow
the man’s regret that he did not succeed may be a force enabling him to work doubly
well to try to overtake the past. One can only guess at it, only attempt to
imagine how such a thing would work; but there is very distinct reason to
suppose that there will be a position in which the past can be rectified.
369.
It envisages
itself on higher levels in a way something like this. We say the past was
so-and-so and we cannot alter it. That was how it was when we were at it. How
do we know what it is now that we have passed away from it? That past still
exists; it is the present to someone else somewhere. That idea is difficult to
understand. On the physical plane, we know that we see an object; we know of it
by the light which comes from it. The light which showed us something yesterday
is now many millions of miles away, and it is now showing that same thing far
away; our yesterday may be the present for someone else as far as the message
of that light is concerned. Whether that analogy holds good I do not know, but
something like that seems to be true. The past is somehow progressing.
370.
Looking down from
the higher plane on the life down here is something like standing on a mountain
and watching a’ railway train moving in the valley below. The train has passed
certain points as far as the people in it are concerned. The points are passed,
but they are still there. The trees and animals they saw at those points are
still alive. The past is still active, but because they are not in it any more
most people imagine that their share in it is done with. I am not sure of that.
I do not think that it is very profitable to try to understand that point, because
one cannot make any coherent sense of it down here. But I believe that the past
is not irrevocable, and that when we in our turn reach the stage where we can
look down upon it all, it will appear very much better than our present memory
of it would indicate, because somehow all that past also is moving onward as
part of the divine reality of things, and that also will become glorified and
will blossom out into what it should have been – I cannot pretend to say how.
Still the idea is a stimulating one – the possibility that the things which we
have failed to do, the mistakes which we have made, may not be so in the end,
though they are so to us now. It is an idea which is difficult to understand
down here, but I am sure there is some truth behind it.
371.
15. Desire
possessions above all.
372.
But those
possessions must belong to the pure soul only, and be possessed therefore by
all pure souls equally, and thus be the especial property of the/ whole only
when united. Hunger for such possessions as can be held by the pure soul, that
you may accumulate wealth for that united spirit of life which is your only
true Self.
373.
C.W.L. – The
possessions which we are to desire are qualities which shall be of use to all humanity.
Every victory we gain is to be gained for humanity, not for ourselves. The
desire to possess must be one to possess with all others – a desire that all shall
share the same inheritance. That is the old story of impersonality in another
form. We see that beautifully illustrated in the lives of the Masters. I
remember long ago feeling considerable wonder as to how it could be that the
Masters appear without karma. They are even spoken of in some of the sacred
books of the East as having risen above karma. I could not understand it, because
karma is a law just as much as gravitation is. We might rise as far as the sun
itself, but we should not get beyond gravitation; on the contrary we should
feel it very much more strongly. It seemed to me just as impossible to escape
from the law of cause and effect, since under its operation every person receives
according to what he does. If the great Masters are all the time doing good on
a scale which we cannot in the least hope to equal, and yet They make no karma,
what then becomes of the stupendous result of all Their outpourings of energy?
374.
Presently, after
studying the problem, we began to see how it worked. If I describe what karma
looks like clairvoyantly, it will perhaps help to make the matter more
intelligible. The appearance of the working of the law of karma on higher
planes is something as follows. Every man is the centre of an incredibly vast
series of concentric spheres – some of them quite near, others reaching to a
prodigious distance into the far empyrean. Every thought or word or action,
whether good or bad, selfish or unselfish, sends out a stream of force which
rushes towards the surfaces of these spheres. This force strikes the interior
surface of one or other of the spheres at right angles to it, and is reflected
back to the point from which it came. From which sphere it is reflected seems
to depend upon the character of the force, and this also regulates the time of
its return. The force which is generated by some actions strikes a sphere which
is comparatively near at hand and flies back again very quickly, while other
forces rush on almost to infinity and return only after many lives – why we
cannot tell. All we know is that in any case they inevitably return, and they
can return nowhere but to the centre from which they came forth.
375.
All these forces thrown
out from the man must recoil upon him so long as he projects them from himself
in that way. However, every man has an interior connection with the Deity which
is not through any of these concentric spheres, but through the centre itself.
By turning within he can reach the Logos himself, and so long as he sends all
the force of his thought and desire in that way, it is not reflected back to
him at all, but goes to reinforce the great outwelling of divine power which
the Deity is always sending through His universe, by which He keeps it alive.
His force wells up in the centre; it does not come from without. If we look at
a number of physical atoms clairvoyantly we shall see some drawing in force and
others pouring it out. They must receive that force from somewhere. It does not
go in at one side and out at the other; it wells up in the centre apparently
from nowhere but is in reality coming from some higher dimension which we
cannot see. Thus the communication with God lies in the very heart of things, and
the man who turns his eyes always upon the Deity, and thinks only of Him in the
work that he is doing, pours all his force along that line. It disappears so
far as he is concerned but, as I said before, goes to reinforce the divine strength
which is always being outpoured everywhere. There is no personal result for the
man on lower planes, but with every such effort he draws nearer to the divine
Truth within him – becomes a better and fuller expression of it and so it would
not be true to say that he obtains no result. In a universe of law nothing could
be without result, but there is no outward result such as would bring him back to
earth.
376.
That, I think, is
what is meant when it is said that the Great Ones escape from the law of karma.
They spend the whole of Their mighty spiritual force upon doing good in the
name of humanity and as units of humanity, and so They escape from the binding
of the law. “Whatever result there is comes to humanity, not to Them. The karma
of all the glorious actions of the Master is not held back that He may receive
the result; it goes to humanity as a whole.
377.
It is in that
spirit of impersonality that we also should perform action. If we do anything,
even a good action, thinking: “I am doing this; I want the credit of this,” or even
if we do not think of receiving the credit for it, but only think: “am doing
this,” like the Pharisees of old, we shall have our reward. The result will
come back to the personal self, and it will bind us back to earth just as
surely as though it were an evil result. But if we have forgotten the personal
self altogether and are acting merely as part of humanity, it is to the
humanity of which each is a part that the result of the action will come. The
more truly we can act without thought of self the nearer we shall be drawing to
the divine heart of things. That is how the Logos Himself looks upon everything.
There could be no thought of self for Him; He acts always for the good of the
whole and as representing the whole. If we act thinking only of Him, then the
result will flow out in His divine force and will not come to us as anything
that will bind, but rather as something which will make us a greater and
greater expression of Him, and will raise us more and more into the peace of
God which passeth all understanding.
CHAPTER
8
RULES 17 TO 19
378.
17. Seek out
the way.
379.
C.W.L. – The
three short aphorisms to which we have now come are closely intertwined, and both
in the comment by the Chohan and the notes by the Master Hilarion they are
practically taken together. For this reason it is hardly possible to arrange
them in separate groups as has been done hitherto, and so I shall take them in
the order in which they appear in the book. It is evident that we have come to
a very important part of the teaching, because there is a longer comment from each
of these Great Ones than on any of the previous sentences.
380.
The Master
Hilarion’s note to the seventeenth rule begins as follows:
381.
These four
words seem, perhaps, too slight to stand alone. The disciple may say: “Should I
study these thoughts at all did I not seek out the way?” Yet do not pass on
hastily. Pause and consider awhile. Is it the way you desire, or is it that
there is a dim perspective in your visions of great heights to be scaled by
yourself, of a great future for you to compass? Be warned. The way is to be
sought for its own sake, not with regard to your feet that shall tread it.
382.
The spirit in
which we should approach the Path is beautifully expressed in these words. All
the way through the personality must be put aside, and one must work from the
point of view of the Higher Self. To do that is to seek the way. We have
already seen that even when the man has left ordinary ambition behind, he finds
it again and again in subtler forms. His ambition now is to reach a higher
level; he has made up his mind to desire no longer anything for the
personal self, to put whatever power he has entirely at the service of
the Great White Lodge. He thinks only of being a good instrument, of bringing
himself into such a position in relation to the Master that His forces may play
through him with as little hindrance as possible.
383.
All forces coming
down from higher planes naturally meet with great constriction when they come
to work on a lower plane. The force which comes through any disciple can never
be more than a very small part of the influence which some Great One may send
through him. That must be so by the very nature of the case, but one who makes
himself, with all the imperfections that naturally cling to us on the physical
plane, as perfect an instrument as possible for the Master’s force, can do very
useful work. The object of the disciple is to let as much as possible of that
force flow through him, and to discolour it as little as he can.
384.
The force is
poured through him in order that he may disseminate it, but he is not expected
to be a mere machine in its distribution. He does lend to it something of himself,
something of his own colouring; that is intended and expected, but it must be
in perfect harmony with the Master’s attitude and feeling. That is possible
because the pupil becomes one with the Master in a very wonderful way, as I
have explained in The Masters and the Path.1 (1 Op. cit., Ch. V.) It is not only that all that is in the consciousness
of the pupil is also in the consciousness of the Master, but that everything that
takes place in the presence of the pupil is also in the Master’s consciousness –
not necessarily when it is happening, unless He chooses, but quite certainly
within His memory. If the Master happens to be busily engaged in some of His
higher work for the moment, it does not necessarily follow that He is attending
to a conversation which the pupil is carrying on at the time; but we have
startling evidence that sometimes He may be, because occasionally He interjects
a thought or a remark, and corrects something that is being said.
385.
As I have
explained elsewhere, any feeling which the pupil allows himself to have will
react upon the Master; if it were such a feeling as annoyance or anger, the Master
would shut it out in a moment; naturally the pupil does not want to give Him
the trouble of doing that, though, perhaps, if one may say it with all
reverence, it is not a very great trouble. Possibly the Master does this very
quickly, in a single thought, but yet one does not wish to cause even that
trifling interruption of His work.
386.
Naturally also
the pupil wants to avoid the shutting off of himself which necessarily happens
at the same time: therefore he tries, as far as he may, to prevent any undesirable
thought or feeling from entering his consciousness. He would keep away from a
noisy crowd or from any place with exceedingly bad magnetism, unless he had to
go there to do the Master’s work. In that case he would put a shell round
himself and see that no unpleasantness reached the Master. Still, purely
physical things in the consciousness of the pupil are also in the consciousness
of the Master. If, for example, the pupil is startled by a sudden sound, it
gives him a little shock. That little shock is communicated to the Master. He
cares nothing for it; He puts it aside, but the fact remains that it is
communicated, and that shows how close is the tie. A pupil who is wise tries to
avoid any kind of shock; he is generally rather a gentle and quiet sort of
person, for that reason.
387.
It is one of the
distinguishing marks of the pupil that he never forgets his Master, or the
presence of his Master. So he does not allow within himself, if he can help it,
except by inadvertence, any thought or feeling that he does not want recorded
in the Master’s thought or feeling, and he even tries to avoid, as far as may
be, exterior disturbances which might also be of a kind that would cause him to
be temporarily shut off.
388.
The delight to
the pupil of that close union with the Master is intense. The joy of being in
touch with so glorious an intelligence, with such splendid emotions, or rather
powers – because such things as devotion, love and sympathy, in a Master cannot
be called emotions; they are great powers – is wonderful, beautiful beyond
words. The more the pupil lays himself open to those higher influences the more
do they flow into him, and the more does he become like the Master whom he
serves. It is a matter of steady growth, but this growth is much helped by the
constant flow of force between the Master and the pupil.
389.
This union is a
kind of foretaste on a lower scale of the higher unity that comes when the buddhic
consciousness is fully developed; but short of that development I think there
is nothing so close as the relation between pupil and Master. Those who want to
be in the privileged position of a pupil should already live as far as they can
in the way they will feel it incumbent upon them to live when they do become
pupils. The more we can bring that general calmness and serenity of action,
feeling and thought into our lives, the more nearly we shall be fit for the
closer association when it comes. Unquestionably the way to deserve such a
privilege is to live as though we had it even already. I know people often
think that the small external things do not matter. They sometimes say: “Oh,
perhaps such-and-such a thing keeps one back in evolution, but it cannot matter
very much, it is such a small thing.” I have heard that said about meat-eating and
smoking. But we are not in a position where we can afford to neglect the
slightest thing that is of help. The undertaking before us is one of
considerable magnitude, and it is no easy task. That being so, it is not the
part of the wise man to neglect even the smallest help. And these things are
not small in reality. The Master further says, in His note:
390.
There is a
correspondence between this rule and the seventeenth of the second series. When
after ages of struggle and many victories the final battle is won, the final secret
demanded, then you are prepared for a further path.
391.
The seventeenth
rule in the second part of the book, to which the Master refers, runs thus: “Enquire
of the inmost, the One, of its final secret, which it holds for you through the
ages.” That means that just as now we must seek out the Higher Self, when we
have reached that higher level we must seek out the one, the Monad. The final
secret is always how to do more and higher work. Many persons seem to think
that rather a dreary prospect. There are large numbers of people whose great
desire is rest; there is so much strain and stress and over-work all about us that
they look forward to complete rest. That is a point of view which belongs exclusively
to the physical body. On higher planes we are never tired.1 (1
Ante., Vol. I, Part III, Ch. 2: The One Good Desire. Vol. II p.
216, 347.) I have known people who have remained
in the astral world for a number of years waiting for a body which the Master
thought suitable. In one case a man had to wait twenty-five years, in another,
twenty. Both were devoting themselves absolutely without cessation to the
Master’s work for the whole of that time. Certainly neither of them had the
slightest sense of fatigue, nor was he in any way less eager to work at the end
of that time. So if there be such a thing as fatigue on the astral plane, it
must be far removed beyond any time with which we have to deal.
392.
When the final
secret of this great lesson is told, in it is opened the mystery of the new way
– a path which leads out of all human experience, and which is utterly beyond
human perception or imagination. At each of these points it is needful to pause
long and consider well. At each of these points it is necessary to be sure that
the way is chosen for its own sake. The way and the truth come first, then
follows the life.
393.
A.B. – When
the liberated soul has completed the stages of progress to Arhatship, and is
passing onward to the first of the great Initiations beyond, he makes a choice
from a variety of paths open to him. They are of the sacred number of seven – he
has seven ways of choice before him.1
(1 Ante., Vol. II,
p. 217, 375.) People often say that at that
point there can be only one possibility – that a man must choose to be a
Master – the underlying idea being that if he decides rightly he will choose to
return to help the world. Such a decision recommends itself when humanity
itself is thought of, but I must remind you that this is a hasty conclusion. A
hint is thrown out as to the nature of the choice, where the note says.: “At
each of these points it is necessary to be sure that the way is chosen for its
own sake.” The words “own sake” give the key. The choice is to be made for the
sake of the way only. The fact that there are more ways than one, ought to
prevent our laying down the law as to our choice; still more should it stop any
person from using the words: “If he chooses rightly,” as if any one could
choose wrongly when the soul is liberated.
394.
Yet an idea – a
very subtle one – runs through us, that we can dictate the choice. We sometimes
find ourselves choosing for our own future – for the far-off future – what to
be and what to do; and that is really the lower consciousness choosing for the
higher. This subtle tendency runs through our life. Part of our consciousness
feels itself as the ‘I’, and naturally inclines to choose the path of the
future as it looks at it, forgetting that it is thereby choosing for the higher
consciousness, in whose hands alone the choice really lies. Making up your
minds as to what is to be done at the close of the Arhat stage, would be like a
child choosing his profession in life. His selection, not being guided by
knowledge, would certainly not be one that his mature judgment would approve. A
young child can have no choice as to his career in the future, and it is the
same in these matters. The higher ego will choose, without regard to the lower;
indeed, the lower will perish before the choice comes. All that is important to
put before the lower, then, is the idea of service – of its being made an
instrument to serve. Unless it does this it becomes an obstacle to the higher
consciousness. Remember it can throw obstacles in the way of that consciousness;
as has often been said, it crucifies the higher ego.
395.
Another thing to remember
is that we cannot judge of any stage of consciousness that we have not
experienced, and of which we do not know the relative value. When thinking of a
higher condition of consciousness that you have not experienced, there is no
possibility of your being able to form any judgment about it. When you reach
that state the universe alters for you, bringing about a change in your nature,
and causing you to know how such consciousness can act. You must experience this
change before you can know. So in forming any opinion as to a path in the
future, it is a case of judging a state of consciousness of which you have no
knowledge, and your judgment is worthless.
396.
Looking at it
from a higher standpoint, there is but one thing that decides our choice, and
that is the necessity of the world at the time. Where a place is empty, where
help is needed – there are the things which decide the choice. Out of the
different ways before him, the purified soul will go where help is wanted.
Self-determined, he takes that course where help is needed by the Hierarchy,
for the expression of the Will of the Logos. I was told by a Great One that it
was a blunder to think that choice could be made at all down here; that the
choice is always made to give the help which is wanted for the expression of
the Will of the Logos.
397.
One group of
workers stands for help in the world. Only when re-inforcement is needed
amongst Them, only when a channel is wanted, would the choice turn to the world’s
work. I have emphasized this because it was given as a warning to myself, not
to let my thoughts turn from useful activity to other lines of work not yet
given us to do. In the Bhagavad Gita we are warned that the dharma of
another is full of danger – our work lies where our dharma lies.
398.
C.W.L. – The
path which leads out of all human experience is the path of the Adept, which
opens up before Him with a choice of seven ways, as we have already seen. I
have heard many members say: “Oh, of course there is no question at all about
what we should choose; we should remain to serve humanity.” It is wiser not to
waste our strength in such decisions, because as a matter of fact we do not
know anything about it. It is like a little boy making up his mind what he will
do when he is a man. He wants to be a pirate or an engine-driver. We know as
little now about the conditions that will determine our choice as the little
child does of those which will determine his future. No one of the seven paths
can possibly be in itself more desirable than another, though they all lead to
work of different kinds.
399.
Quite surely the
idea that will be most prominent when the time of choice comes will be: “Where
can I be of most use?” What we might perhaps safely prophesy of our action is
that we shall say: “Here am I, Lord; send me wherever help is most wanted.” But
even so it may well be that as we unfold we shall develop some special aptitude
for one or other of these lines, and thus it will be obviously best for the
whole system that we should be used in the line where we can do most good.
400.
Whenever a higher
level of consciousness is reached, our view of the world is so much widened
that it becomes an entirely new thing to us. When we reach Adeptship we shall have
an immeasurably wider horizon. We shall understand exactly what we are doing
because we shall be able to see the solar system as does its Maker, from above,
instead of from below: we shall seethe pattern that is being woven, and what it
all means. Every additional step, every extension of consciousness brings us
nearer to seeing the meaning of everything, so as we go on we become less and
less likely to make mistakes and to misunderstand, but the perfect knowledge
can only be that of the Adept, whose consciousness has become one with that of
the Logos of the system, even though it be only as yet in one of His lower manifestations.
401.
In any case, that
choice is in the hands of the Monad, so we certainly need not trouble ourselves
about it now. There is always a possibility that the Monad may have decided all
that even now, and when such a choice is made the lower representatives or parts
of him will .imply fall into their place when the time comes, whatever ideas
they may previously have been forming. All that is important for us to put
before the personality now with regard to such choice is the idea of service. It
we can get it to understand that idea of always watching to serve it will very
readily become a perfect channel for the ego and that will influence the
individuality in turn to be a perfect channel or instrument for the Monad. Service
is the highest ideal in life; did not the Christ Himself say: “Whosoever will
be chief among you, let him be your servant.”?1 1
S. Matthew, 20, 27.
402.
18. Seek the
way by retreating within.
403.
19. Seek the
way by advancing boldly without.
404.
C.W.L. – To
seek the way by retreating within means in the beginning to seek out and follow
the guidance of the Higher Self. As has been explained before, the first stage
on the wa3’ is the unification of the personality with the ego. Later the ego
becomes a perfect expression of the Monad, and the man is then ready for the
Asekha Initiation. Beyond that the Adept is striving to raise the consciousness
of his Monad into the consciousness of the Logos. It is always himself at
higher and higher levels that he seeks.
405.
Whenever a man at
any stage tries to pour devotion up into a higher level, such a flood of the divine
power descends upon him that it quite overwhelms his effort, and the effect is
not so much that he has reached up, as that power has been poured down on him.
The same thing happens between the pupil and the Master. The pupil sends out
his love towards the Master, but it is surpassed by the response of the Master’s
love, so that to him it seems that he has received a vast flood of love, though
in the first place it was his action that made the downpouring possible.
406.
Such, at a higher
level, is the pouring down upon the Adept of the Holy Ghost, the power of the
Third Aspect of the Logos, symbolized in the “cloven tongues, like as of fire” of
Pentecost.1 (1 Acts, 2, 3.) Thus in due course the Adept becomes one with the
Third Aspect of the Logos manifesting on the nirvanic plane. His next step is
to become one with that Aspect which is represented by the Christ in the bosom
of the Father. Later on, though I know nothing about it, I am quite sure that
he will draw ever nearer and nearer to the Deity of our Solar system. We shall
ever approach the Light, but we shall never touch the Flame. Not that we shall
not rise one day to the height where He stands, but He does not stand still to
receive us. He also is evolving, and therefore we shall not touch the Flame,
though we shall ever draw nearer and nearer to it. The wonderful bliss of that
experience cannot be described down here, because it is all of a nature which
has no counterpart in the lower world.
407.
In every man there
is much to be found by seeking within. The personality, which most people think
of as themselves, is only a very small fraction of the man. We are much larger people
than we show ourselves to be. The ego can only put down one small part or facet
of himself in a particular incarnation and even if that part is manifesting perfectly
it is only a small part. A great man is a fine and beautiful thing to see, even
down here, but we may be sure that the whole is very much
greater than the part which we can see. No one personality could express all
the multiplicity of possibilities which lie within the ego, which has within it
the essence of the experience of all the lives it has led. The highest and very
best of us down here might be taken as a fair average sample of the qualities
we should discover in the ego if we were able to see it.
408.
We get these
samples sometimes, and should try to understand them as such; we often find,
for example, quite an ordinary person showing great heroism when a sudden emergence
arises. A workman will sacrifice his life to save his fellow-man. Now the
possibility of doing that shows that the man inside is really at that level.
Whatever is the highest a man can touch is in reality the man himself, because
he could not touch it, could not think it, if it were not himself. All the
lower expression – the storms of passion, the baser feelings – belongs to the personality.
They should not be there – that goes without saying – but they are not the real
man. If sometimes he touches great heights, that is the level at which he ought
always to strive to keep himself.
409.
The high and noble
things for which a man yearns must be to some extent developed in the ego,
otherwise he could not be longing for them down here. The people who do not
wish for such ideals are those in whom those particular qualities do not exist even
in germ. If we yearn for higher things they are in us not as a mere possibility
but a living fact, and it remains for us to live at our highest level and in
that way reach one still higher. The whole object of the ego in putting himself
down is that he may become more definite, that all his vaguely beautiful
feelings may crystallize into a definite resolution to act. All his
incarnations form a process by means of which he may gain precision and
definiteness. Therefore specialization is our way of advancement. We come down
into each race or sub-race in order that we may acquire the qualities for the
perfection of which that sub-race is working. The fragment of the ego which is
put down is highly specialized. It is intended to develop a certain quality,
and when that is done the ego absorbs it into himself in due course, and he
does that over and over again. The personality scatters something of its
special achievement over the whole when it is withdrawn into the ego, so that
he thus becomes a little less vague than before.
410.
The ego, with all
its mighty powers, is very much less accurate than the lower mind, and the personality,
valuing above all the discriminating powers of the lower mind which it is
intended to develop, often comes in consequence to despise the far higher but
vaguer self, and acquires a habit of thinking of itself as independent of the
ego.
411.
Though the ego is
vague in the earlier stages of its evolution and is therefore unsatisfactory to
that extent, there is in him nothing that is evil – no moral defect. There is no
matter in the causal body which could respond to the lower vibrations, but
wherever there is a gap in its development there is always a possibility that
the lower vehicles will run into some sort of evil action. It sometimes happens
in such a case that when an emergency arises the astral elemental takes
possession of the man and he madly stabs another man, or, being in great need
of money, he finds himself in some position where he can obtain it dishonestly,
and succumbs to the temptation. The ego is then not sufficiently awake to step
in and prevent the action, or perhaps he does not understand that the passion
or greed of the astral body may force the lower self into the commission of a
crime. When we find evil turning up unexpectedly in a man’s character we must
not think that it comes from the Higher Self. Yet it comes from a lack in the
Higher Self; because if the ego were more developed he would check the man on
the brink of the evil thought, and the crime would not be committed.
412.
To seek the way
by retreating within means for us that we must always endeavour to live up to
our highest level, so that we may be able to bring down more and more of the
treasures which the ego has garnered during innumerable incarnations. But while
seeking thus to realize the Higher Self we must remember that we must also seek
the way by advancing without. We cannot afford to be ignorant of what is
outside us, and we must do our best to study and to become acquainted with the
world and what is going on in it.
CHAPTER
9
RULE 20
413.
20. Seek it not
by any one road. To each temperament there is one road which seems the most desirable.
But the way is not found by devotion alone, by religious contemplation alone,
by ardent progress, by self-sacrificing labour, by studious observation of
life. None alone can take the disciple more than one step onwards. All steps
are necessary to make up the ladder.
414.
A.B. – Rule
20 is the comment by the Chohan on the three short aphorisms 17 to 19, which
were considered in the last chapter. It tells us that a man has not to develop
only on that line where he finds the least resistance, but must unfold his
powers on every line before he reaches the universal goal of usefulness. His
aim is to be a perfect instrument of the Good Law, and no man can become that
unless he grows along every line. Each type or temperament must therefore
supply what is lacking in itself before perfection can be achieved. Humanity
reaches the goal not by devotion, nor by religious contemplation, nor by self-sacrificing
labour, nor by observation and deep thought alone. Ultimately we shall all need
to have all these things, but while on the way people are limited by their
temperaments, and for a long time to come the work of each disciple in helping
humanity is likely to be limited chiefly to one of these ways.
415.
It is clear why
we must master all the ways. As men advance they must draw nearer together, must
become welded into an organic whole. So if a man possessed great power of
religious contemplation, but very little of the other powers it would be of
little use for him to come into contact with a man possessing chiefly the
quality of self-sacrificing labour. He could not meet him on that ground, and
that would limit his usefulness. So it is desirable that while the disciple is
striving to perfect himself on his special line of work, is seeking to learn
everything about something, he should at the same time not neglect to learn
something about everything, so as to be able to make full contact with people
of different temperaments with whom he must work.
416.
The key-note is
balance; we must be able to work to some extent on all lines. Toleration also
is wanted, that we may be able to help all. We must see each man’s way as right
for him – as one of the roads leading onwards it has to be recognized as
good. We must have respect for all types of people, and until we are able to
help them all ourselves we should try to guide those whom we cannot help, to
others who can help them, and not disparage the roads on which they are going,
and seek to turn them into our own.
417.
C.W.L. – People
are almost always lop-sided in their development. Some are strong in devotion, some
in intellect, some along the line of work. Each man, according to his
temperament, is taken naturally along the line which is easiest for him, yet he
must not forget that all-round development is necessary before he can reach Adeptship.
The Adept is above all things an all-round man, and if we are putting Him
before us as an ideal, we ,must do what we can to develop ourselves in various
directions. It is a fine thing to be full of devotion, but we must have
knowledge along with it, because the man who is merely blindly devoted is of
little use. The converse is true of those who advance by intellect. They must
also take care to acquire devotion, otherwise their intellectual development
will lead them astray. It is better to develop along one line than not to
develop at all, but while every man should pursue his own line, he should
nevertheless remember that there are other lines. Often the tendency is to
criticize other paths, and to feel that they may be less useful than our own. They
would be less useful to us, perhaps, but are not at all so to those who are following
them. Wherever we may be at present in our development we shall certainly have
to become balanced, so if now we appreciate only the idea of work we shall nevertheless
presently have to realize the position of the man who advances by wisdom, and
again that of him who progresses by devotion, and not allow ourselves to think
them less immediately useful than we are. I am afraid that the people who advance
by devotion are often a little intolerant of those who wish to study and to
work. They sometimes say: “All that you are doing belongs to the outer plane or
to the purely intellectual side of things, whereas the heart side of everything
is always the more important, and if you neglect that you can make no real
progress.” It is perfectly true that the heart side must be developed, but nevertheless
there are those who advance best through definite work, and others who cannot
evoke from themselves the best that is within them without careful study and
full understanding.
418.
Men sometimes
feel drawn to the higher life, and devote themselves to contemplation only.
There are occultists who hold that to be the best way, at least in the early
stages. A man might say: “I must first develop myself in order that I may be
able to serve. When I am an Adept I shall serve perfectly; I shall make no
mistakes.” But there is work to do at all levels, and the man who has qualified
as an Adept has to work at very much higher levels than any we can reach;
therefore if we wait until Adeptship is attained before we are willing to work
for the world, a great deal of the lower work will in the meantime be left
undone. Our Masters are working chiefly on the nirvanic level, on the egos of
men by the million. They are doing at that higher level what we could not do,
but there is a very great deal to do on the lower planes which we can do.
419.
People have
sometimes been disposed to think that the Masters ought to be doing this lower
work, that They should, for example, be working with individuals down here. I
have explained before that They do not do that, except in the comparatively
rare cases of those who They see will very shortly repay Them for their effort.
It is so entirely a case of what is best for the work that no sentiment of any sort
enters into the matter at all. They will work with a pupil if he can do good
work in return, and if the amount of energy spent in teaching and guiding him
will produce more result in that way in a given time than would be produced by the
same amount of energy expended along higher and wider lines; that is, only if
the man is apt to learn, and prepared to do a great deal himself whenever
opportunity offers. Up to that point Their interest in him would be what one
might call a general concern.
420.
There is much
work to be done at these lower levels, and it is a fact that a great amount and
variety of it has not been done previously. New ways of service are constantly being
opened up as mankind advances in brotherhood. Our Masters had many pupils
before the Theosophical Society came into existence, but most of them were
Orientals, chiefly Hindus and Buddhists, Sufis and Zoroastrians. The trend of
the Oriental mind is not quite the same as ours. I think without offence we may
say it is less practical in some directions than ours, and the majority of Indian
pupils have occupied themselves chiefly with their own studies, of which they
had an immense amount to do, and only when they had advanced a considerable way
on that line did they then turn aside to help others. They had not the
incentive that we have for the work of the invisible helpers. Nobody in India –
not even a coolie – is quite as ignorant as the average Christian about
after-death states, so there is not the same need for rescuing them from the
delusions created by the idea of eternal hell. As soon as our students began to
see what astral work involved they realized that there was a crying need for
help. Here were people by the thousand suffering intensely from a nightmare, a
sort of bogey, which they had made for themselves simply on account of foolish
teaching. A sight of that kind urges one at once to make some effort to relieve
all that distress, consequently the work of the invisible helpers began, and
increased like a rolling snowball. Every one who is helped sets to work to help
others, so it has happened that in about thirty-five years, since the work was
regularly taken in hand, the effect produced has been very great indeed.
421.
A man may reach
great heights by attending only to his own development, but along that line he
will not reach Adeptship. The man who waits to attain Adeptship before he
serves the world will never be an Adept. He may escape into nirvana, or obtain
liberation, but because he has not realized what the Logos wants of him, he will
presently be overtaken by numbers of less advanced and less talented people who
have realized that one important thing. Then he will have to give up his life
on higher planes and come back to learn what he has not learnt before – that
humanity is one, and that a man who does not realize that fact cannot scale the
loftiest heights of progress.
422.
But, as is said
here, self-sacrificing labour alone is not sufficient to gain for the man the
highest development. He also needs to develop his devotion, and above all to develop
his power of response to the inner light, because without that he will not be a
perfect instrument. Without that he might be working away most energetically,
but would be unable to respond to the touch, the hint from above, sufficiently
quickly. He would need, as it were, to be pulled round energetically, instead of
requiring just a gentle touch, which is all that should be necessary, and so
would cause more trouble to his Master in training him. He must also learn
something of the great plan, because, glorious as the work is, the man cannot
do it perfectly unless he has knowledge. Therefore he must make a definite
effort in the way of study to attain that. Much knowledge comes in actually
doing the work, but there is every reason for us to take advantage of the
accumulated experience of our forerunners and learn whatever we can by study,
so that our work may be better done.
423.
The vices of
men become steps in the ladder, one by one, as they are surmounted. The virtues
of men are steps indeed, necessary – not by any means to be dispensed with.
Yet, though they create a fair atmosphere and a happy future, they are useless
if they stand alone.
424.
A.B. – Here
both vices and virtues are called steps. This broad view cannot harm students,
and is indeed necessary for the disciple, but it would be right in the
world to take the narrow view, for vice must mean vices, and virtue must mean
virtues, to undeveloped people. The broad view would confuse their ideas of
morality; they cannot apply principles with understanding, and think of the
moral bearing of each action, so they must have a list of things that are bad,
for their avoidance, a set of religious and social commandments for their
guidance. , It would be a mistake to upset the popular view of vice and virtue,
although it permits many actions the disciple has outgrown.
425.
But esotericists should
learn to understand what they both mean, as manifestations of the Divine. The
way to regard it is to think of every soul as a divine being, as a centre of outgoing
energies pouring into the world. The life of man consists in the expression of
the life of atma, and it finds expression outwards. In the earlier stages of
its evolution there was nothing to be called vice or virtue, but simply an
outrush of energies, very largely along lines which the standards achieved by society
to-day would not approve. It is true that from the beginning of our human
career most of us, especially those who had individualized at a high point from
the animal kingdom, were in a position to use our intelligence to some extent,
and so were able to learn many things by observation of others. But it remains a
fact that nevertheless all of us in earlier stages must have done many things
which would now be accounted evil. Those experiences taught us to do better, so
they were steps or means of progress. And they also helped to make it possible
for us to understand and help others who are going through such experiences now.
All types of experiences are equally necessary; we could not know even partly what
they are without every kind of expression, and should never be able to help
other people if we did not understand.
426.
In former times
we may have been murderers or drunkards; if these things have been our particular
experience, we now know them as wrong because we did them before we knew
better, and found that their results brought suffering. At a further stage we
learned that such things delay our progress, and are therefore wrong, but
without some experience we should never have realized this consciously. No
amount of advice could have given us the vivid knowledge we have gained from
experience. Having learnt our lesson along one line we never again under any
stress of temptation make that particular mistake. You would never be safe if
there were any possibility of your falling. You must have conscious knowledge
of these things; the typical thing you have to know, the fundamental experience
you must have, if you wish to be safe and helpful.
427.
C.W.L. – Here
again the Chohan reminds us that the object of occult training is not to
produce merely good men, but great spiritual powers who can work intelligently
for the Logos. Moral goodness is certainly a prerequisite, but it is useless
alone.
428.
When a man begins
his evolution in the quite primitive stage he has no ideas of right and wrong,
so we could hardly speak of him as having vices and virtues. The salvage is
after all nothing more than a centre of outrushing energy – the irresponsible
kind of outrush of which we see so much in the lower kingdoms. A creature like
a fly has a very tiny body, but it is a mass of energy which is terrible as
compared with its size. Imagine an entity of our own size endowed with as much
energy in proportion and as little idea of what to do with it – it would be a
terrible, wild thing, a source of danger to all around.
429.
The savage has
that kind of energy. It bursts out in fighting and in lusts of all kinds, which
are certainly vices from our point of view, although we are hardly justified in
regarding them as such in him. He does not murder from any sort of unholy,
vitiated pleasure in murder, as has happened with people of higher races. He
certainly has a kind of pride in being able to dominate and kill other people,
and in that way he works off a vast amount of energy which, many thousands of
years later, will be directed into useful channels. He has to learn how to handle
that energy; how to let it run through him without doing hurt to himself or
others, but that is a matter of long training and development, and of gaining
control of the vehicles by the ego.
430.
We see the same
thing at a very much higher stage working out in the case of an immensely
powerful man, an American millionaire of the old type, for example, who made a
great amount of money very often by ruining other people. He was doing a very
wicked thing, but he was developing tremendous powers of concentration and generalship.
Having learnt in that position how to do all this and how to manage his
fellow-men, he might perhaps in another life be a general of an army. Very
likely at first he would use his generalship as Napoleon did – for his own
advancement and to gratify his ambition. Later on he would learn to use his
powers for the service of his fellow-men. In that way it is clear that the very
vices of men are steps on the way to something higher and better. The advance
from vice to virtue is very largely a matter of learning to control our
energies and directing them aright. We begin to transmute our vices into
virtues when we realize that the energy which is going so to waste and doing so
much harm might be applied for good purposes. Each time an evil quality is
finally conquered, it is changed into the opposite virtue, and so becomes a definite
step raising us higher in evolution.
431.
The whole
nature of man must be used wisely by the one who desires to enter the way.
432.
A.B. – The
word “way” here means the real spiritual life. Man is a spiritual being, so in
living the spiritual life he is being his true self. If he would tread that way
he must use all his faculties and powers, the whole of himself. What man is in
his essence, that he becomes in truth – a manifestation of the divine. When the
disciple is at a certain stage he is told: “Thou art the Path.” Before this
time his Master is to him his Path - he sees the divine manifesting in the
Master; but when the divine in him manifests, he himself is the Path. He
becomes the Path in proportion as he advances. Therefore the whole nature of
the man is to be used wisely. When that is done the divine fragment, with the
help of the thing which he has created for his own use, may unfold its latent
powers into active and positive life.
433.
The words “divine
fragment” are not used merely as a poetic phrase; they contain a truth we
cannot afford to forget, which any other words would be inadequate to express.
The same idea is found in the Catechism quoted in The Secret Doctrine,1 (1 Op.cit,, Vol. I, p. 145.) where
the Guru asks the pupil what he sees. He sees countless sparks, which appear as
though detached; the ignorant look upon them as separate, but by the wise they
are seen as one Flame. Such a fragment, inasmuch as it is a centre of consciousness,
is a point without magnitude; it cannot be separate. All centres are
fundamentally one, since there is only one ultimate sphere, one universe. But the
mystery of the unity of being cannot be understood below the nirvanic plane; it
cannot be expressed in the lower worlds, and all attempts to symbolize it must
be imperfect.
434.
The divine
fragment is the Monad, which is reproduced in the triple spirit on the nirvanic
plane. There atma is threefold, and it puts down one of its powers into the
buddhic and another into the mental plane. It contains the possibilities of the
Logos, but is at first quite incapable of expressing them. Atma pouring itself
forth appears in Manas as the individualizing principle, the “I”-making faculty
that gives rise to individuality in time, as the opposite to Eternity. It draws
round it matter to express itself on the upper manasic plane, and thus creates
as its vehicle the causal body, which lasts .throughout the long series of
human incarnations. That is the body created with pain, by means of which the
man purposes to develop.
435.
Think of Atma as
pouring itself forth on to the third plane downwards, the manasic plane. It
draws around itself matter of the highest level of that plane, and forms the
causal body. That body is then its vehicle for the expression of the manasic
aspect of itself on that plane. It is manas working through the causal body. This
manas becomes dual in incarnation. It reaches down into the lower levels of the
mental plane, and forms there a vehicle – the lower manas – which in turn
builds the astral body. In its turn that provides the force which builds the
etheric and physical bodies. Each body on its own plane is a means for
gathering experience, which when suitable is handed on to that which formed the
vehicle; so after the personal incarnation is over the lower manas hands on to
the causal body all the experience that it has gained, and the personality
perishes. The causal body takes whatever experiences are of a nature to help
its growth, and they remain with it through all its future incarnations.
436.
The causal body
also has a relation to what is above it. What happens on the inner or upper
side of that vehicle is the passing on into the third aspect of atma of the
essence of all experiences which may have entered into it; what is thus poured
into the manasic aspect of atma renders it capable of acting without the causal
body – that is, without a permanent vehicle which limits it.
437.
The student who
thinks this out, will find that it will throw light on the perishing of the
individuality. The same idea appears in the Hindu and Buddhist scriptures. The
causal body is the individuality,, that which persists throughout the cycle of
incarnation. It comes into existence at a certain period of- time; it has to
perish at another period. It is born and it dies. As the Gita says: “Certain
is death for the born.”1 (1 Op. cit., II, 27.) This is true not only in the outer world, but in the
widest sense; as there is birth of the causal body, so must it perish. It is
the thing which the divine fragment has built for himself with much pain. It is
the “I” to the disciple. In some the “I” is thought of as even lower, in the personality,
but this is the “I” which has to be reached at the beginning of the Path. It is
finally transcended at the close of the Arhat stage of growth, at the real
liberation. Up to that time it is diminishing and changing in character as the
Arhat grows. It will ultimately be found to be a defective I”, not the real “I”
at all, but at this stage of human evolution any attempt to describe its future
condition would be misleading.
438.
The disciple
rightly puts before himself, as his aim, the realization and purification of
the individuality. It is a thing created for the use of its creator. Sometimes
it is technically called a creature; then we hear of the man – the true man – meeting
his creature. So also the individual, the creature, meets his own creator. This
meeting occurs only in a high stage of evolution. When a man meets his creature
be is perfect and transcends individuality.
439.
The creation of
the individuality takes place at a lower stage; the man is busy building it up
for a very long time. The less evolved members of humanity are for a long
period shut up in their lower vehicles – that is necessary for their progress,
before the individual is fully built – so the causal body remains an
unconscious shell for a long time, while activities are busy in, the personality.
Think of the ages taken in building the physical vehicle; think of the rounds
and the stages that the pitris went through on the moon chain before becoming
fit to pass into human evolution. There is an immense difference in the time that
human beings take in building the individual, though all take long. The
building goes on more rapidly in the higher stages under the inspiration of the
more evolved ego than in the lower stages; when the intelligence reaches a high
stage it is utilizing higher forces and learning not to waste them, and then
the building goes on with immense rapidity. This gives us great encouragement; for
in looking back to the moon chain and thinking of the time we have taken to
advance, it would seem very long if it had to be repeated, but looking forward
we see that progress may become almost incredibly swift.
440.
The divine
fragment can do nothing by itself; all its development must come by contact
with outside forces, and through the vehicles – it cannot grow without them. As
H.P.B. said, spirit is senseless on the lower planes. It cannot bring forth any
power without a vehicle of expression on the plane in which it has to act.
Further it can only have control of the vehicles when they are perfected. The
work of bringing the vehicles to perfection develops the powers of the spirit
to perfection, so the two developments go on together. And when that work is
complete, spirit has in itself the power to disintegrate its individual
vehicles the moment it leaves them, and to reintegrate them in a moment when it
chooses to do so.
441.
Think of the
perfected Spiritual Beings. Only while they were evolving at and below our
human stage were vehicles necessary for Their growth, but when such a one,
having drawn all the experiences of that evolution into His essence, wishes to
manifest, He can at any time create what He wants for manifestation, and after
having utilized the forces of the plane, can withdraw the vehicle again. When
speaking of the Planetary Spirits, H.P.B. mentions that They have come through
humanity. They could not appear as helpers if They had not through the human
stages drawn up into their essence the experience necessary. Thus Beings exist
who may not be manifest, but who can manifest Themselves, by drawing from Their
essence the experience They require and creating a vehicle in which to work.
442.
It is not
difficult to understand how the vehicles are for their “own use”. As we advance
we rise above the bondage of each vehicle manifesting outwardly, and learn to use it only for the higher work,
without any consideration of self. Doing this as far’ as the physical body is
concerned should be the disciple’s daily practice. The physical body must be
mastered so that it cannot throw its own reflection upon you; it exists only
for you to use, and you must learn to control it completely, so that it cannot
compel you to attend to any experience that you do not want. It should be only
an instrument for use; you are training it to hand on its experience to the
ego. There will come a time when you no longer want to hand on any experience
at all; then the “I” takes what it wants for its own purpose. This is a high
condition to reach, for it is the stage of the Adept.
443.
In The Secret
Doctrine it is said that a Master’s body is illusory. That means only that the
physical body cannot affect or disturb Him. The forces playing around cannot
influence Him through it, except in so far as He allows them; they cannot throw
Him off His centre. H.P.B. has also said that a Master’s physical body is a mere
vehicle. It hands nothing on, but is simply a point of contact with the
physical plane, a body kept as an instrument needed for the work He does, and
dropped when done with. The same thing is true of the astral and mental bodies.
When the causal body becomes an instrument only, the individuality perishes,
atma having acquired the power of manifesting its third aspect on the mental plane
at will, and no longer needing a permanent vehicle thereon.
444.
C.W.L. – This
statement seems at first sight to contradict some of the earlier ones. For
example, we were told to kill out desire – to kill out various parts of
ourselves. It is said in The Voice of the Silence that the pupil must
learn to slay the lunar form1 (1
Ante., Vol. I, Part I, Ch. 2: Initiation and the approach thereto. Vol.
II, p, 128.) at will – to get rid of his astral
body. The words “at will” give us the key to the expression. We must not
destroy the astral body, because if we did so we should become monsters, with
great mental development but without any sympathy. Many people find emotion a
great trouble to them because it overwhelms them, but they must try not to
destroy it, but to purify and control it. It must be a force which we can use
and not something which overwhelms us. We must not kill it out, because without
it we could never understand emotion in others, and we could therefore never
help people who are along that line; but it must be refined and all self must
be weeded out from it.
445.
In the same way
the intellectual people must not destroy intellect, but must bridle it and
guide it. It is quite true that intellect like devotion may run away with
people. They do not always realize that; they say that the intellect in itself
is a guarantee against anything extreme, but I am afraid it is not. Many people
make a kind of god of intellect; they say: “Our reason is the only thing we have
to guide us and we must always follow that out to its logical conclusion.” That
would be quite true if all their premises were always right to begin with, but usually
they are remarkably deficient. They are generally considering the physical side
of the problem only and leaving out of account the far more important hidden
side, and therefore their conclusions are inevitably wrong. As I said before,
we must be balanced; we must learn to see all sides of a question, and we must
endeavour to avoid developing any one quality, however good, to such excess that
it is altogether out of proportion to all the other qualities, because often
the most admirable quality may become dangerous if it is taken in that way
apart from the whole. The man who possesses keen intellect is much to be
congratulated because of that intellectual development, but all the more if he
has that should he be careful that the other side, that of love and sympathy,
is not neglected nor forgotten.
446.
In exactly the
same way those who possess the power of love and sympathy must see to it that
they develop the intellectual side of their natures, so that they will not be
led away by their sympathy into foolish action which will not help, but hinder.
A person with the keenest sympathy but no knowledge is often perfectly
helpless, just as many a man would be in the presence of some sad accident, lacking
the knowledge which a doctor would have. Many people, though full of sympathy
and anxious to help, do not know what to do, and the efforts which they make,
if ignorant, may be just as likely to do harm as good. Very clearly, there is
the need of knowledge as well as emotion.
447.
Emotion is the
driving force in our natures. It is said in the old Indian books that the
emotions are the horses, but the mind is the guide; the mind takes the reins;
therefore we need to develop both. We must have our horses, because they are
the means of progress, our storage of force; but we must also have reasonable
guidance, or else they will run away with us. All that is perpetually inculcated
in all occult study, yet it cannot be said too often, because people forget.
There are always those who develop one side only and are sadly lacking in the
other, and that is one of the ways in which even an advanced person may come to
grief.
448.
Each man is to himself absolutely the way, the truth,
and the life. But he is only so when he grasps his whole individuality firmly,
and by the force of his awakened spiritual will, recognizes this individuality
as not himself, but that thing which he has with pain created for his own use
and by means of which he purposes, as his growth slowly develops his
intelligence, to reach to the life beyond individuality. When he knows that for
this his wonderful complex, separated life exists, then, indeed, and then only,
he is upon the way.
449.
C.W.L. – The
way – meaning the true spiritual life – can only be found after the experience
of building up the individuality. The expression used here by the Venetian
Master – that complex thing which man has built with much trouble and pain for
his own use – is true of the individuality, and again, of each personality. The
individuality itself is so built by the Monad; it builds in turn its various
personalities, but all for the use of the higher, and for that alone; the
mistake all men make is that of identifying themselves with the lower nature,
and allowing it to delude them into supposing that it is the “I”, instead of
which the “I” is in reality the Monad far behind, which is using all these
vehicles.
450.
The whole
evolution of man can be stated as a withdrawing
into himself, but always bringing his sheaves with him, never returning
empty-handed. This process of handing up the result of experience by the lower to
the higher is going on at all levels all the time. There are many ways in which
we are doing that in every-day life, only we do not think of it in that light. For
example, we know how to read; we gained that power in this incarnation by
passing very slowly through a long process of learning. Now we can take up a
book and understand its meaning at once, without having to think of being able
to read. We have forgotten the details of that experience, and it would be of
no value to us to remember them. Some of us have learnt to read music, and can
play it off at sight, but at first when we were learning we bad to look carefully
at each note and then look down at the piano to find it. Now the fact that we
had to pass through all that labour is forgotten. We do not need to remember
all the separate music lessons in order to be able to play, which was the
object of the whole process.
451.
It is just the
same with the memory of past lives. People who believe in reincarnation often
have a sense of resentment at the back of their minds, because they do not
remember that for which they are now suffering, even while they are ready to
admit that it is the result of wrong doing in the past. That feeling is perhaps
quite natural, but it really does not matter in the least; the soul does know,
and has made a note of that which has brought the evil result, and will do all
it can to influence the personality so as to prevent the same mistake from
occurring again.
452.
People think it
would simplify their lives if the personality could remember all those past
incarnations. In some ways it might, but I think that if in the personality we had the full
remembrance of all our past lives before we had reached Adeptship, it would do
more harm than good. In the first place, we have not the power to weigh all
these things calmly. We should find it distinctly depressing to look back at
the ghastly crimes we had committed in the past lives. I have long ago learnt
how to look back at my own past lives, but it is by no means a pleasure to do
so. There are certain beautiful actions, some fine incidents in the past lives
of everyone, and one is able to look back with a certain degree of pleasure on
those, but we have found that in looking back upon a past life the thing that
immediately strikes one most forcibly is the number of opportunities which one
did not see. Here, there, everywhere, we were surrounded by opportunities, and
we cannot help feeling amazed that we took advantage of so few of them. It was
not, usually, that we failed to take them because we did not want to do so; our
intentions were good, though rather feebly good, perhaps, and if we had seen
the opportunities we should have taken them. Now we look back and wonder at our
own blindness. We say: “If only I had taken this or that course of action
certain results would have followed, and by this time I might have reached
Adeptship.” But we did not. When we rise to that level the power to look back
will be useful to us, but with the amount of intellect and free-will we have
now it would certainly not be an unmixed pleasure.
453.
Let us consider
the general principles involved. The whole of this scheme of which we are a
part is intended to further the evolution of man, therefore there can be no
doubt whatever that if it were best for him that a personality should remember
all his past lives, most certainly that would have been so arranged. As that
has not been done, we should at least have faith enough to see that it is best
as it is. When a man has the power to look back he also gains with it a wider
insight and a more balanced view of things, and by that time he is so imbued
with the certainty of justice in the scheme that if he cannot see exactly how a
result followed from its cause he will say: “Well, I do not see the reason for
this, but I am sure I shall do so presently.” It would not occur to him to
think that he had been unjustly treated. The person who is always talking of
being unjustly treated and is perpetually accusing high heaven of neglecting
him, does not understand the rudiments of the case. We know that the law is
absolutely just – as just as the law of gravitation – but it does not follow
that we can always tell exactly how it will work itself out.
454.
As I have said,
the ego makes a note of that which produces evil results. Warned by past experience,
he tries to influence the personality before it becomes so strong, so definite
and decided that it will not be guided by the vaguer touch from the ego behind.
It distinctly thinks that it knows best along its own line. Very often it
declines to be helped from above, and so the ego cannot influence it to the
full extent that he would like. But he tries to gain control, and as we go on
we shall feel this higher self more and more endeavouring to take the reins. If
we will identify ourselves with him, we shall find that then he can do Very
much more for us. His chief difficulty is the fact that the average personality
identifies itself with the lower vehicles and rather resents his interference,
but if it can be persuaded to identify itself with him, then at once the whole
difficulty is very much lessened.
455.
When in addition
to this there is complete control of the astral and mental bodies, progress may
be swift indeed. Normally, when the ego wants to deal with one thing through
his lower vehicles they persist in bringing in a hundred others, in sending in
reports which are not asked for and not desired by the ego. Control of the mind
has to be gained so that it will report to the ego only what he wants to know.
Then, when the ego turns some problem over to his mind, and says: “Think that
out and give me the information I want,” the controlled mind obeys perfectly,
whereas under similar circumstances the average mind reports a hundred things
which are useless to the ego, because all sorts of wandering thoughts break in
and assert themselves.
456.
The system of
yielding up the results of the lower work, but not the detailed experience, is
going on all the time until we attain Adeptship. As the ego develops, the first
decided change that the man makes is to draw up the intellect, the manas, to
the buddhic level; he still remains triple, but instead, of being on the three
planes he is now on two, with atma developed on its own plane, buddhi on its
own plane, and manas level with buddhi, drawn up into the intuition. Then he
discards the causal body because he has no further need of it. When he wishes
to come down and manifest on the mental plane again he has to make a new causal
body, but otherwise he does not need one.
457.
Much in the same
way those two manifestations on the buddhic plane – the buddhi and the glorified
intellect which is intuition – will be drawn up presently into the nirvanic or
atmic plane, and the triple spirit on that plane will be fully vivified. Then
the three manifestations will converge into one. That is a power within the
reach of the Adept, because He unifies the Monad and the ego, just as the
disciple is trying to unite the ego with the personality.
458.
This drawing up
of the higher manas from the causal body, so that it is on the buddhic plane
side by side with the buddhi, is the aspect or condition of the ego which
Madame Blavatsky called the spiritual ego. It is difficult to work out the comparisons
in detail with the state through which the Christian mystics described
themselves as having passed, because they approach it from so different a point
of view, but that condition seems to correspond with what they used to call ‘
spiritual illumination” – that is, the state of the Arhat. It is the unfolding
of the Christ principle. We speak of the birth of the Christ principle when
there is the first stirring of the buddhic consciousness in the man, but when
it is said the Christ is fully unfolded within him, I think it must mean this
state.
459.
When people once
reach some of these higher levels the rate of their progress is very greatly increased.
I remember once being asked in India whether a man’s progress on the Path might
be measured by arithmetical progression. I replied: “I think when once progress
is definitely started it is very much more like geometrical progression.” That
was rather doubted. The Indians seemed to feel that that was an extreme
statement, so I asked the Master Kuthumi whether geometrical progression would
be a fair statement of the progress of one who had entered upon the Path. “No,”
He said, “that would not be a fair statement. When once a person enters upon
the Path, if he converges all his energies upon it, his progress will be
neither by arithmetical nor geometrical progression, but by powers.” So it
would not be in the ratio 2, 4, 8, 16, etc., but as 2, 4, 16, 256, etc. That
throws a very different light on the matter, and we begin to see that what is
before us is not so impossible and not so wearisome as it sometimes seems. We
have taken all these thousands of years to reach our present stage, and it does
not seem a great achievement when we consider the time spent upon it. If our
future evolution were to be equally slow the mind would fall back appalled
before the contemplation of the aeons needed for us to reach the goal. It is
encouraging to think that when we definitely begin to tread the Path we make
progress with very great rapidity indeed.
460.
I suppose that
the average good person is devoting a hundredth part of his mind to making himself
a little better. Many people are not doing even that. We who are studying and
trying to live by the principles of occultism have gone further, and are
beginning to devote a reasonable part of our time to it. When once the stage is
reached where all our force and thought is concentrated upon this great task we
shall go ahead by leaps and bounds; however backward we are now, when we can devote
all our powers to the work to be done we shall be able to do it much more
perfectly than now seems at all possible.
461.
Seek it by
plunging into the mysterious and glorious depths of your own inmost being. Seek
it by testing all experience, by utilizing the senses in order to understand
the growth and meaning of individuality, and the beauty and obscurity of those
other divine fragments which are struggling side by side with you, and form the
race to which you belong. Seek it by study of the laws of being, the laws of
nature, the laws of the supernatural; and seek it by making the profound obeisance
of the soul to the dim star that burns within. Steadily, as you watch and worship,
its light will grow stronger. Then you may know you have found the beginning of
the way. And when you have found the end its light will suddenly become the
infinite light.
462.
A.B. – In
this comment we again consider the triple method of seeking the way.
463.
A division may be
made for purposes of classification, by taking the laws of nature as covering
the world of phenomena, the world of observation, the laws of super-nature as
those of the higher manas and buddhi, and the laws of being as those of the
real existence of nirvana. By the laws of nature we then mean the laws which
work on the physical and astral planes and the rupa sub-planes of manas.
464.
The laws that are
above these, but below those of “being”, may be called the laws of supernature.
This includes both the arupa planes of manas and the buddhic plane. That is the
region where life expresses itself more than form, where matter is subordinated
to life, altering at every moment. There is nothing there to represent a definitely
outlined entity. The entity changes form with every change of thought; matter
is an instrument of his life and is no expression of himself; the form is made
momentarily – it changes with every change of his life. This is true on the
arupa plane of manas, and also in a subtle way on the buddhic plane. It is true
also of the spiritual ego, which is buddhi plus the manasic aspect of the One,
which was drawn up into buddhi when the causal vehicle was cast aside. That
state is called by Christian mystics that of spiritual illumination; it is the
stage of the Arhat, of the Christ in man.
465.
The word
supernatural is commonly used to cover anything that cannot be explained by the
common experience of the- world. Anything that appears irregular or out of
accord with the laws of nature has been so ticketed, much to the confusion of
thoughtful people. There is a wide-spread revolt in the world against all that
is called supernatural; people feel that there cannot be anything supernatural,
because there is no irregularity or disorder in nature, no region where law
does not exist. The law is working everywhere and it is one. “As above, so
below” is the universal truth. One nature is expressing itself in different
ways, but is itself the same always. But when we come to what is here called
supernatural, we arrive at a state beyond all that can be touched by the senses
– even using the term in its fullest meaning. We pass altogether beyond
everything which is phenomenal, into the spiritual worlds themselves.
466.
The plane of
atma, beyond that, is nirvana, the region of being, where all is reality, where
true consciousness resides. We are to seek this way by study of our inmost
being. Not until we can reach the nirvanic plane in higher meditation can we
get a touch of true atmic consciousness; but it may be sought for. We begin to
search for it by trying to realize its existence. Think of it as in a region
where all is reality, where all limitations have vanished, where unity is
recognized. In meditation try to imagine it, try to figure it to yourself. You
can only do so by a series of negatives. You think: “Is it phenomenal? It is
not so. Is it intellectual? It is not so.” You seek it by eliminating what it
is not. You then say: “It is not a thing that the senses can perceive; it is
not what the intelligence can imagine; it is not found even by the illuminated
intelligence, with its vast extent,” and so on.
467.
It may be asked: “Why
seek it by what it is not, if you can have a touch of atmic consciousness?” Frankly
speaking, it is not atmic consciousness you get in the brain, but a little
vibration from the manasic aspect of atma differing from any other vibration in
the manasic consciousness. Vibrations started on higher planes are different
from those that begin on the manasic plane. When a person attains to the
highest stage of the Path proper – the fourth or Arhat Path – then, in
meditation out of the body, he can pass into samadhi and reach the atmic
consciousness in nirvana.
468.
C.W.L. – This
twofold triple division, of the methods by which we are to seek the way and the
laws which correspond with those methods, is illuminating and without a doubt
intentional. Plunging into the depths of one’s inmost being leads to the study
of the laws of being – the laws of that plane which lies beyond all that is manifestation
for us, that is to say, nirvana. The higher planes are, of course, still planes
of manifestation, and even what lies beyond them is not really unmanifested,
but it is so to us, at our present stage. Only by study of the laws of being
shall we be able to fulfil the real purpose of plunging into the depths of our
inmost being, which is to “make obeisance to the dim star which burns within”.
Clearly that is a very high stage in development – when we look for the atma
and follow only that.
469.
The testing of
all experience corresponds with the study of the laws of nature, that is to
say, the laws of the phenomenal world, those which work on the physical, astral
and mental planes into which the personality plunges. Then we are to learn to
understand the individuality by the study of the laws of the supernatural, by
which evidently are meant the laws of those worlds in which the ego, as such,
moves, that is to say, the laws of the buddhic plane and the higher part of the
mental plane. Of course there is nothing supernatural, but that word is used
here evidently in a somewhat technical sense. Through all the planes it is the
one Life which expresses itself in different ways, and there is no break of
natural law and order in the whole scheme; only when we come to a region beyond
anything that any of our physical, astral or mental senses can touch, are we
reaching up into something beyond the nature which most of us know, where other
and wider laws operate. I think it is in that sense that the Chohan uses this
word “supernatural”. Beyond the sphere of these senses we pass into a region
above the phenomenal, to what the Greeks called the noumenal world, which is
the source and cause of the phenomenal worlds. So the meaning of this passage
appears to be that when we thoroughly understand the personality we shall have
grasped “the laws of nature”; when we are seeking to understand the
individuality, we shall be dealing with the “laws of the supernatural”, and
when, beyond that, we try to realize the atma, we shall be studying the “laws
of being”.
470.
The differences
at these levels are sufficiently great to warrant such a classification. On the
physical plane everything depends very much upon its form, and that is also
true in the astral and lower mental worlds. At the level of the causal body,
though it is not quite true that we are without form, at least the forms are
different and more direct. The thought of the causal body is like a flash of
lightning darting directly to its object; instead of making a definite separated
form, it is simply an out-rush, straight ‘to the object, of the impulse which
the thought has given.
471.
When we rise
above that to the buddhic we reach a condition which, as I have explained
before, can hardly be described in words. There the thought of each person is a
pulsation of the whole plane, so that every person at that level enfolds within
himself the thought of all the others and can learn from it and can experience
through it, as it were. One cannot hope to make it very clear; one can only
suggest.
472.
It is well for us
to try to understand those higher states. Almost the only way in which we can
do this is by the method adopted in the Hindu books, which is always a negation.
They do not describe a state of consciousness; they gradually eliminate all the
things that it is not. After doing that, if we can manage to retain a sort of
sublimated essence of the thought of the thing, we are coming a little nearer
to what it really is. The followers of the Buddha often asked: “What is nirvana?”,
or sometimes they would say: “Is nirvana, or is it not?” – that is to say, has
it an existence, or has it not? The Buddha on one occasion answered: “Nirvana
is; beyond a doubt it exists, and yet if you ask me if it is, I can only say
that it is neither a state of being nor of not-being in the sense in which you
understand those words.” Perhaps even He could not make it clear to us at our
level. In our own far smaller way we have the same kind of experience. I can bear
witness that when one develops the buddhic consciousness and uses it, much
which we now cannot make clear becomes absolutely plain; but the moment one
drops back from that condition of consciousness one can no longer express that
which one has understood. That it is not readily to be expressed is shown by
the fact that the Buddha Himself, so very much greater, was yet unable to put
it into words to be understood down here, except by negatives.
CHAPTER
10
THE
NOTE ON RULE 20
473.
A.B. – The Master
Hilarion adds the following note to Rule 20.
474.
Seek it by testing all experiences; and remember
that when I say this I do not say: “Yield to the seductions of sense in order
to know it.” Before you have become on Occultist you may do this; but not
afterwards. When you have chosen and entered the Path you cannot yield to these
seductions without shame. Yet you can experience them without horror: can
weigh, observe, and test them, and wait with the patience of confidence for the
hour when they shall affect you no longer.
475.
In the earlier stages of human
evolution the ego is not sufficiently developed to know right from
wrong. But the moment he has learned to distinguish between them, to know them
as different, morality begins. When, for example, he begins to understand the
difference between destroying life and guarding it, there is for him the birth
of morality on that line. The kind of experience which taught him that
knowledge is then not wanted any longer. But though the man no longer needs to
test that experience, there is still sometimes a rush of the senses, compelling
him to some wrong action, and that afterwards causes him to suffer, because he
recognizes that it was wrong to yield to it. The saying of the
pseudo-occultist, that a man may do wrong in order to gain experience, is never
justified. When an act is done while a man is unconscious of its being wrong he
is gaining necessary experience; but when there is knowledge that it is wrong,
then each yielding means a fall, and keen suffering must follow.
476.
The condition of
yielding under stress of circumstances lasts for many lives; even after a man
has entered on the Path the conflict with the desires of the senses often
continues. Before one can make rapid progress there are long stages of conflict
between the wish that works through the astral and mental bodies, and the knowledge
that its gratification is a hindrance to the higher life. The conflict on the
lower stages is long, and when it passes on into a higher stage, and arises
when mental images are mixed up with the desires of the senses, temptations become
more subtle, for the mind idealizes the sense-objects, refines the grosser
impulses, and presents desires in their most alluring aspect. Another stage
comes when the aspirant is on the Path proper, for even there the keen force of
old temptations is sufficiently strong to assail him. It is in this connection
that we have the statement in the Master’s note, which shows the disciple how
he may utilize them; he can weigh, observe, and test these seductions, waiting
patiently for the time when they shall affect him no longer.
477.
When the centre
of consciousness has separated itself from the body of desire and moved to the
manasic plane, a considerable advance has been made. The man no longer looks on
the body of desire as himself, but as merely a vehicle. Yet its vibrations can
still affect him, for it has a life of its own, and sometimes it is as if the
horses had run away with him. That is the stage spoken of in the Kathopanishat,
when the driver has reined in the horses and they are going quietly, but are
still liable to rush away now and then. The disciple knows when they have run away
by the excitement of the senses. It is a stage of great trial. The whole nature
of the man is shamed and pained by the degradation; he cannot yield without
suffering. In his normal condition of consciousness the senses do not attract him,
he does not feel the temptations of the body, which are really astral. Yet
times come when he does feel them. This happens because the old mould of
desire is not broken up, and it has been vivified from outside. The channel has
not disappeared, though it is wearing out, and the danger exists that it may
suddenly be filled from the outside, and then the desire-form is revivified. Astral
influences cause vibrations in it strong enough to affect the man’s consciousness
again; left to itself it would not affect him; but he comes to a place, time or
person on account of which strong influences from outside vibrate through him
and revivify this old form.
478.
They are to be
recognized as coming from outside, not from himself, so the disciple ought to understand
what they are. With shame, degradation and horror he feels this thing, and
wonders how he can feel it. The answer is that there is a stage in growth when
seductions coming from the senses may be experienced but need not be yielded
to. The man then passes them by. He says: “I feel you; I recognize you; I weigh
you; but I refuse to be moved.” That is the meaning of the passage in the Kathopanishat,
where it says the man has come to the point where he can hold the horses
in. He can hold the senses under control. It is the last lesson with regard to
the temptation of the senses. When it is learned, their power over the man has
passed for ever. Never again will they have the power to affect him; it is the
last struggle with them, and when it is over the soul has escaped.
479.
When that time of
struggle comes, and it will come to every one, after the centre of consciousness
is moved on to the manasic plane, it is an immense help to realize its nature
and to know how to deal with it, to be able to say: “It is not I; it is simply
a vibration from the lower nature sent out to me; I reject it; that is my
answer.” The moment you repudiate it, the sense of horror goes; you refuse to
feel its influence. When you have done that, you can test yourself, and see
what part of your nature it is working upon. Then you will wait with patience
for the time when you will feel it no more. You trust in the law; you sit down
and patiently wait, and presently it will be unable to set up any vibrations;
the senses cannot make you respond to them. You say: “I can wait patiently for
the time when I shall not feel this thing. It is a dead form revivified that I
feel, and it will soon be broken up and will fade away.” There is nothing left
but to wait so – perhaps for months or for years. The victory is won when you
are able to do that – the mould is broken. Recognition of your patience gives
the last blow to shatter it, and never again can it affect you, unless you turn
your back upon the goal, which seems an impossibility.
480.
There is one
other thing for which this experience is valuable; until you have passed
through it you cannot help the person who yields. You cannot help any human
being unless you are above him, and yet you cannot lift anyone unless you understand
what he is feeling. There is a stage where you yourself are in the grip of
desire; you cannot then help others who are in the same difficulty. Later, you escape.
You repel desire, and reach a point where you cannot understand why another man
should fall into temptation; not understanding his feelings, you cannot help
him; you can point out the evil to him, but you cannot give spiritual help. You
cannot pour strength into him because you are outside him, and as you are not
feeling with him you feel a shock of horror. When you get that horror you are
useless. You can never help anyone from whom you are repelled; it is better to
leave him alone when you feel like that. You must be able to feel with a
person in order to help him.
481.
Even though you
can feel with a person you cannot help him if he makes a wall about himself; in
such a case, it is better to drop him for a time, for help given from the
outside is of no use. You may have to give up trying to help a person on the
physical plane, but you need not stop doing so from the inside. To help from
the inside requires more courage than to do so from without. It is far more
gratifying to give outside counsel and advice; it is much more satisfying to
the lower nature than giving inside and unseen help.
482.
Another thing – if
you can help a person, do not be turned away by the opinion of someone else
that he does not deserve help, nor by his own idea that you are not helping
him. H.P.B. was sometimes condemned by her own pupils. They said harsh things
of her, but she was good and strong, and did not repel them, but went on helping
them from the inside, leaving them to think what they would. By helping from
the inside we wear away antagonism. When you have felt antagonism, antipathy of
mind, to others, possibly even to your own teacher, as you do sometimes, you
perhaps blame them. Where you have felt a wall you have thought it was their
wall, but later on you realize that the wall was an illusion – a thing you
had yourself created on, the mental plane. When going through this stage we
have built wall after wall, and have suffered by the existence of the walls, until
we threw them down.
483.
There is a still
higher stage, which is difficult to explain. There are men who make a link between
the Great Ones and the mass of humanity. As was said of Jesus, they feel the
sufferings of men and their temptations and yet they are without sin. It is the
stage where the person is in an absolutely pure desire-body; all dead matter
has been cleared away from it, and only the power of reflecting images is retained.
The man is incapable of sin.
484.
Suppose such
persons did not exist; there would be no link between humanity and the Great
Ones. They preserve a link, and in Their perfect purity They feel in Themselves
the sufferings of others. This stage comes immediately before that of the
Master; it is the last stage of the Arhat. A Master cannot suffer pain, His
consciousness is so perfect; He can image past experiences without suffering.
The experience is to Him a perfect image, without pain. But in the advanced
condition of the stage before that, though the man cannot sin, and the
personality is pure, it yet transmits a sense of suffering.
485.
In exoteric books
this stage is sometimes confused with that of the Masters, and a feeling of suffering
is attributed to Them. It is in the stage before that that there is suffering,
where those in the stage of Arhatship are sharing the work of the Master,
without having lost the susceptibility of feeling pain. The Master transcends
all suffering. The Arhats take part in building the “guardian wall”, but they
build it with pain. People are apt to apply to the Master what is true of
higher disciples only, who are still in a stage where sin is transcended,
though the power to suffer is left.
486.
At the lower
level we may sympathize with friends until we lose all sense of difference, and
we must suffer if we sympathize thus deeply. Until ahamkara is transcended
sympathy and suffering must go hand in hand. If we go out of this stage too
soon we lose our power of sympathy; that is one of the temptations on the Path.
Great Ones fall back even when they have reached the last stage, because if
they lose suffering altogether, they lose sympathy, and if sympathy is not
perfect, the wall of separateness is not thrown down.
487.
But do not
condemn the man that yields; stretch out your hand to him as a brother pilgrim
whose feet have become heavy with mire. Remember, O disciple, that great though
the gulf may be between the good man and the sinner, it is greater between the
good man and the man who has attained knowledge; it is immeasurable between the
good man and the one on the threshold of divinity. Therefore be wary lest too
soon you fancy yourself a thing apart from the mass.
488.
A.B. – Here
we are told that we must not condemn the man who yields to temptation. When you
have passed through the stage of trial, there is no fear of your condemning
anyone. When temptations are transcended, and you think of the time when you
still felt them, you will not condemn the man who yields.
489.
The difference
between the virtuous and the vicious man is comparatively little; both are struggling
in the early stages, and when looked at from either side the difference is
small. But when a man has attained knowledge and has seen the meaning of virtue
and vice, he has made an enormous step. When he sees virtue and vice only as
the pair of opposites, he has transcended knowledge; he stands on the threshold
of divinity, and the difference is immeasurable. We have the warning here that
if we too soon think ourselves apart from the mass there will come the
temptation to despise those below us, and then we shall fall. A person who has
reached divinity looks down on no one; he can feel with all, and is one with
the lowest.
490.
When you have
found the beginning of the way the star of your soul will show its light; and
by that light you will perceive how great is the darkness in which it burns.
Mind, heart, brain, all are obscure and dark until the first great battle has
been won. Be not appalled and terrified by the sight; keep your eyes fixed on
the small light and it will grow. But let the darkness within help you to understand
the helplessness of those who have seen no light, whose souls are in profound
gloom.
491.
A.B. – When
we look up to the region of atma and worship the light within, we shall see the
light as it grows stronger. When you first see that light you get a touch of
consciousness by which you see the darkness in which it burns; the contrast
shows it to you. It is then that darkness within that will help you to understand
the helplessness of those who have seen no light. It is for them that real
compassion is necessary. There is no need to feel suffering for people after
they know that there is light. Compassion is needed for those who do not know
that they are in darkness, but are immersed in trivial things, and yet think
themselves wise. Their darkness is so great that they really do not know what causes
them so much suffering. They are the people to whom the Great Ones send compassion.
492.
Those who have
seen even a little light are making progress in things of which men in the
world have not caught a glimpse. When once the light is seen this kind of
compassion is not wanted. If such a man is seen to be suffering, it is
recognized that he is breaking down the wall quickly, and that it is good for
him that he is able to do it.
493.
C.W.L. – When
we begin to have knowledge of the existence of the soul, we realize a great
fact of which the vast majority of mankind knows nothing. Most people – even
so-called religious people – have no certainty of the existence of the soul.
Most of them are living entirely with a view to this world. They may hold a
theoretical belief in the immortality of the soul, but the things of the world
are more important to them and their lives are only in comparatively few cases
guided by this belief.
494.
That the “star of
the soul” may show itself we must first be sure of the existence of the soul,
we must know it as within ourselves. When we have set our affections on things
above, when we know certain truths within ourselves and nothing can shake their
reality for us, the star is beginning to show its light – there is a faint
reflection of it. By that tiny gleam we see how densely ignorant we have been
and still are; that is the first feeling we get when we gain a little more
knowledge.
495.
“The first great
battle” is the battle with the senses. In his steady fight against them the man
has arrayed himself against his lower nature, and has won through. When the
gleam of light comes we see how dark the way has been, how all our actions, and
even our affections, have been without that direction which makes them real.
The little light makes all seem hopelessly wrong; it makes us feel helpless,
but we must not be appalled by the sight.
496.
Blame them
not. Shrink not from them, but try to lift a little of the heavy karma of the
world; give your aid to the few strong hands that hold back the powers of darkness
from obtaining complete victory.
497.
C.W.L. – We
must be careful not to misunderstand this passage. The few strong hands are the
Great White Brotherhood. The struggle is not against the devil as the Christian
puts it, nor must we think of the black magicians as holding the powers of
evil. It is the overpowering strength of matter which is meant here by the
powers of darkness. Our help in the effort to overcome them is needed and is
calculated upon – it is part of the scheme.
498.
There are only a
few strong hands helping at present because our humanity has as yet evolved
very few Adepts. The Logos has based His plan on the idea that as soon as there
are those who understand it they will co-operate with it. That is shown by the
fact that up to the middle of the fourth root-race, indeed, even a little past
that time, all the great offices in connection with the evolution of the world
were held by people who did not belong to our humanity. Some came to us from
Venus, others from the Moon. These were great Adepts who were really free, who
might have gone off altogether into higher realms. But after the middle point
of evolution we ourselves were expected to develop our own Teachers, and the
Lord Gautama Buddha was the first of These. It is clearly intended that we not
only furnish the very great officials, such as the Buddhas and Christs, but
also that all of us at our very much lower level should be intelligently
co-operating, and trying to push on evolution as much as we can.
499.
Then do you
enter into a partnership of joy, which brings indeed terrible toil and profound
sadness, but also a great and ever-increasing delight.
500.
A.B. – This means
that we have come into relation with Those whose life is bliss, but side by
side with that experience there is still sadness because we feel the darkness
people are in. You have sadness for people, because you are not yet at the
point to say, when you see suffering: “Yes, it is well.” At this stage there
comes a subtle feeling about pleasure and pain that does not exist in the lower
world; you feel the more keenly until the light has become perfectly clear,
because the light shows up the darkness. Yet an increasing delight will come,
by recognition of the law. More than that, no being is unhappy in the
fundamental depths of his consciousness, because all are parts of the divine
life, which is happiness itself. More and more as he progresses does the disciple
contact those depths, until at last he realizes, to use the words of the Gita,
that he was grieving for those who should not be grieved for, that the wise
grieve neither for the living nor for the dead. Why should one grieve for a
being who is fundamentally happy?
501.
The disciple
enters into a partnership of joy, but this very partnership brings toil and
profound sadness, because he oscillates from one condition to the other. He
must learn to feel the inner joy, and yet not lose touch with the lower principles
of others, in which their sorrow is felt. He must feel that too, but must not
be overwhelmed by it. The Path is as narrow as the edge of a razor, but we are
to maintain perfect equilibrium upon it, while the pairs of opposites play upon
us. One great function of the Master is to preserve our balance. The pupil will
be swaying from one side to the other. When the gloom comes the Guru will send
to him remembrance of the partnership of joy: when he tends to lose complete
touch with the sorrows of the world the reminder of sorrow will come.
502.
For a long time
the disciple is subject to these oscillations. We should not attain perfection
unless we experienced the different things separately, before we reached
equilibrium. It is the experience of mankind that we have to learn one lesson
at a time, that we may give it full attention. The disciple who is treading the
path is thrown from one side to the other, until he learns to keep the balance.
Sometimes an entirely causeless gloom comes down, and he finds himself deep in
the shadow. He finds no reason for it; he only knows that it is there – a gloom
that he cannot shake off. If he has learned the lesson rightly he will accept
that quietly and patiently, and will not try to escape from it. He will then
learn sympathy and patience, and other lessons which can be learned in the
gloom, not in the light. Accepted in this spirit the period of gloom is not
such an unwelcome thing, for all the worry and trouble have gone out of it. We
should take the lessons, and learn without suffering. People do not suffer so
much from gloom as from images. Like a child afraid of the dark, we fill the
darkness of the soul with shapes of horror. The darkness is simple darkness and
nothing else; it contains nothing more than the lessons which it has to teach
us, and all the phantoms will, in time, disappear. The darkness can never crush
us; at first it paralyzes us with fear, but at last we learn its lesson.
503.
At the last
Initiation, that of the Master, the atma is seen as a clear light, a star, and
when it spreads out, at the last breaking down of the wall, it becomes the
infinite light. Before that the Arhat can feel the underlying peace of atma
when in meditative mood, but constantly he returns to the sorrow. But when a
man rises to the atmic plane in full consciousness, and the buddhic consciousness
merges into that, there is but one light seen. This is beautifully put in The
Voice of the Silence: “The Three that dwell in glory and in bliss
ineffable, now in the world of Maya have lost their names. They have become one
star, the fire that burns but scorches not, that fire which is the Upadhi of
the flame.”
504.
While the man was
in the causal body, he saw the Sacred Three as separate, but now he sees Them
as the three aspects of the triple atma. Buddhi and manas, which were “twins
upon a line” in the buddhic consciousness of the previous stage, are now one
with atma, the star which burns overhead, the fire which is the vehicle of the
monadic flame. Then says the Teacher: Where is thy individuality, Lanoo, where
the Lanoo himself? It is the spark lost in the fire, the drop within the ocean,
the ever present ray become the All and the eternal Radiance.” He who was disciple
is now a Master. He stands in the centre, and the triple atma radiates from him.
505.
C.W.L. – You
enter into a partnership of joy, but it brings also terrible toil and profound
sadness, says the Master’s note. All of that is true, but it is also true that
the ever-increasing joy counterbalances the sadness.
506.
Every student who
has developed his faculties fully is, by the hypothesis, a sympathetic man; he
must pass through a period of sadness and almost of despair, because of all the
sorrow and suffering which he sees. Because people are backward in evolution
and are not yet reasonable, there is in evidence much more of suffering and sorrow,
of anger, hatred, jealousy, envy and the like than of high virtues, so that
there is a preponderance of unpleasant vibrations from humanity. This shows
itself in the astral world, so that any man who becomes fully developed
astrally becomes at the same time aware of the sorrow and trouble of the world
– aware of it only in a vague way, but it is ever present with him as a weight
resting upon him. Constantly individual instances of the astral sorrow and suffering
which happen to occur in his neighbourhood also press strongly upon him. In
addition any catastrophe involving a great deal of sorrow to a large number of
people distinctly influences the astral atmosphere of the world.
507.
The student has
to learn how to receive that without being weighed down by it, and that takes a
considerable time. He gradually learns to look more deeply, and as time goes on
he begins to see that all this trouble is necessary under the circumstances
which men themselves have created. The suffering that comes is a necessity
because of their great carelessness and laxity. If men had been a little more
careful a very great part of it could easily have been avoided. I have
mentioned before that the real suffering brought to us by karma from past lives
is perhaps a tenth of that which comes to us, and the other nine-tenths is the
result of our own wrong attitude here and now, in this life. In that sense
there is a vast amount of entirely unnecessary suffering. But the other side of
the shield is that while people persist in taking the wrong attitude, in
thinking and acting foolishly, under the eternal law suffering must come upon
them; in an indirect way that is distinctly good, because it is bringing them
to a sense of their own folly. The pity is that they need so very much
reminding, that they cannot at once take the hint and alter their attitude – so
much suffering might be saved if that could be.
508.
This seems to all
of us who have studied the matter very easy to see. I cherish a hope, therefore,
and I think a well-founded hope, that the suffering of the world will diminish
very rapidly as soon as the common-sense view of things is accepted by a fairly
large minority of people. They will come to see that they are making their own
trouble for themselves, and in process of time they will refrain from all that
is undesirable, purely from the common-sense point of view. Members of the
Theosophical Society ought to be displaying before the world an example of the
Theosophical attitude towards life, but there are many of them who, although
they know these truths, find it hard to put them into practice. That is only
natural, but at the same time one does feel that many of them might take up the
new ideas a little more quickly, and it is certain that things of this sort do
spread in a definite sort of ratio. One man can state a view and make a little
impression; ten men can make more than ten times the impression; a hundred men
can make vastly more than a hundred times the impression that one man could,
unless he happened to be a rare genius. We have some thirty thousand members in
our Society; I think if all of them were really taking this higher
philosophical view of life, and were thereby obviously avoiding a great amount
of suffering, they would form a powerful and striking example. In that way we
could help a vast number who as yet do not know anything about the higher side
of things.
509.
When we begin to
see that what is being done is always the best – the best under the circumstances
for everybody – our sorrow is no longer of the same kind as before. We are just
as sympathetic towards others, but we are no longer overwhelmed by their
suffering; we sympathize with them but do not share their feelings. The Masters
are profoundly sympathetic with people who are suffering, and yet we could not
say that They Themselves share in that suffering, because of Their insight. As
I have said before, a Master is never sad, never depressed. It has seemed to me
sometimes, however, as though even They could be disappointed with people. I do
not know that I ought to say even as much as that, but I know this, that They
make very strong efforts sometimes to bring about certain results, and yet
those results, through the failure of Their instruments, are not brought about.
I do not know whether They foresee from the beginning that those efforts will
fail. I cannot but feel that in many cases They do, but yet They make them
precisely as though They expected them to succeed. For example, much work was
done before the great war in an attempt to avoid it. That effort failed, but
whether the Adepts who inaugurated it knew from the beginning that such would
be the result I do not know: They worked at it as though They expected it to be
successful.
510.
Madame Blavatsky
in many cases offered people opportunities in a similar way. Sometimes she made
every endeavour to persuade them to take them, when she knew from the beginning
that they would not do so. I well remember one occasion on which some people
came to her to make enquiries. They seemed to me obviously unsuited for any
Theosophic knowledge or -work, since they were not at all in the frame of mind
in which it would be of use to them. She spoke to these mere casual strangers,
and told them about quite intimate things which she hoped to do in the Society.
They were rather sneering people, who did not seem in the least worthy of such
confidence, and when they went away the Countess Wachtmeister said: “Madame, why
did you tell those people these things? It seems certain they are not the sort
of people to whom it would do any good. They will only go away and sneer, and
perhaps do us harm.” Madame Blavatsky replied: “Well, my dear, some karma has
brought them to me, and I must give them their chance, and do all I can for
them.” She thought that to take them to some extent into her confidence in that
way was giving them a chance. I cannot tell, and she could, how near they may
have been inwardly to taking it, but on the surface their attitude was the
conventional sneering attitude. We never heard any more of them, but they had
had their chance. Some past karma had evidently given them the right to the
opportunity, and though it meant nothing to them then, it may possibly help
them a little towards taking it when another such chance comes to them.
511.
On this occasion
Madame Blavatsky carried out very fully the idea of not blaming people who are
in darkness. She knew that the more self-satisfied they were the more they were
to be pitied. It is useless to blame anybody for being what he habitually is,
because that is his level in evolution; that is as far as he has got. If he
falls below his average level we may reasonably say: “You know, that is wrong;
you ought not to have done that,” and it may possibly help him not to do it
again. But the level where a man habitually is shows where he is in evolution,
and however far back he is there is nothing to be gained by blaming him. It
would be as foolish as to blame a child of five years old because he is not yet
ten.
512.
Then again, those
very people who frequently exhibit the least pleasant characteristics have in
them the potentiality of the high and noble things as well, and sometimes these
come out in a great burst when an emergency arises. As I explained before,
there are men whose ordinary lives are certainly at- a very low level, yet in
some great emergency they may show an unselfishness which enables them to throw
away their lives for the sake of a comrade. Man always has the god within, and
it shows out sometimes when we least expect it. Because it is there, it is
always possible to appeal to it. We cannot always reach it, because it is so
deeply buried, yet in most cases we are able to catch a glimpse of it in some
way.
513.
The sight of the
suffering of the world also brings, it is said here, terrible toil; once having
seen this vast mass of backwardness and misery we cannot help working all the
time to alter it. There is nothing else to be done. We can never go back into
the world and be careless of the existence of the suffering and sorrow when
once we have really felt it. Yet behind the toil is a great and ever-increasing
delight. This comes from the recognition of the law; we see the meaning of
suffering and the good that is to come out of it. Note the words: “You enter
into a partnership of joy.” That is the real beauty of this higher life. We
come into partnership with the greater people. We feel ourselves to be working
for and with Them, and that is of itself so great a joy that it supports us through work which otherwise we might
feel it impossible to carry out.
CHAPTER
11
RULE 21
514.
21. Look for the flower to bloom in the silence that
follows the storm: not till them.
515.
It shall grow, it will shoot up, it will make branches
and leaves and form buds, while the storm continues, while the battle lasts. But
not till the whole personality of the man is dissolved and melted – not until
it is held by the divine fragment which has created it, as a mere subject for
grave experiment and experience – not until the whole nature has yielded and become
subject unto its Higher Self, can the bloom open. Then will come a calm such as
comes in a tropical country after the heavy rain, when nature works so swiftly
that one may see her action. Such a calm will come to the harassed spirit. And
in the deep silence the mysterious event will occur which will prove that the
way has been found. Call it by what name you will, it is a voice that speaks
where there is none to speak – it is a messenger that comes, a messenger without
form or substance; or it is the flower of the soul that has opened. It cannot be described by any metaphor. But it
can be felt after, looked for, and desired, even amid the raging of the storm.
516.
C.W.L. – The
blooming of the flower is the development, the unfoldment of the soul. The
worst feature of sorrow and suffering down here is the feeling that one is
helpless. People engage in all sorts of struggles, and in many cases think they
are predestined to fail. They will say: “I have heard of certain people making
rapid progress, but there is no chance for me.” They are hopeless about it
because they do not know. We can never again have that feeling when once the
soul has unfolded itself, because we know. We shall still have struggles and
troubles and difficulties, but we know for certain that as souls we are invincible.
517.
As is said here,
it is in the silence and the calm that the soul grows. People tell us, and I
think that they often emphasize it quite unduly, that the soul grows through
suffering. Put that way the statement is not quite correct. It is by making
mistakes and correcting them that the soul learns how to grow, and suffering
invariably comes as the result of the mistakes; but as I have explained before,
the growth does not take place during the suffering, but afterwards. A person
may be very much better after a surgical operation, but the improvement does
not take place while the operation is being performed.1 (1 Ante. p. 100.) In like manner while people are in the throes of all
sorts of terrible difficulties they are not growing, but by the way in which
they meet those difficulties they may be learning to grow after they have
surmounted them. It is in the silence which follows the storm that the flower
grows. It is possible that plants may develop strength within themselves by
enduring a storm, but growth can come only when the buffeting of the storm is
over. We must have gone through the turmoil of battle before we gain that great
reward of victory, the real unfoldment of the soul, which brings with it a calm
certainty which nothing again can ever shake.
518.
The whole world
is crying out, as it were, for that certainty about the higher things. So eager
are the people that any charlatan who professes to have direct knowledge is at
once assured of a following. Any teacher who is in earnest always draws people
round him, because the religions of the world have failed sadly to give any
real satisfaction. The weak point of most religious teaching in regard to all
the subjects is that it does not explain; it simply lays down the law – perfectly
good law – such as “Thou shalt not kill,” but it does not explain in detail why
all these things are wrong. For example, as regards anger and evil thought,
nothing is taught as to the wrong done in that way so long as it does not show itself
either in speech or in action. Yet Christ spoke plainly enough on matters of
that sort. He declared emphatically with regard to the seventh commandment that
a man who looked in the wrong way upon a woman had already committed the sin in
his heart, but there is no record of His having given any explanation as to the
way in which the thought-form acts, which would have made His teaching on that
point far more comprehensible.
519.
The first step
towards gaining direct certainty about spiritual or superphysical truth is that
which is in effect - the first step in all occult progress - the dominating of
the personality. When we have achieved that, peace comes at once, and we then
find we have been living in the midst of an atmosphere of peace and did not
know it; because we ourselves made a little storm around us for us the peace was
not, even though some of our neighbours may have been living in it all the time
When this soul faculty, this certainty, is attained, nothing ever seems the same
again, because then we can no longer have any sense of hopelessness. That which
we merely believe may fail us at a critical time, because the basis of belief
which satisfies a man at one time does not always satisfy him at another, when
perhaps he is under tremendous strain. But this certainty always satisfies. When
once we have seen and known for ourselves, even though that sight and knowledge
may fall away from us and we may no longer be able to cling to them, we can always
say: “I have seen; I have known; just now I am not able to see or to know but I
have seen, I have known,” and that certainty carries us through.
520.
Indeed, when we
have had this direct experience we find it very difficult to think ourselves
back into the condition m which we were before. It changes our whole attitude
towards everything in the world. Happenings which seemed of great importance
before are seen to be of much less significance; now that we know the great
inner truth of the life which really matters, the outer life which does not
matter takes its proper place. Yet we have to remember that most people whom we
meet are still where we were before we had that expansion of consciousness, and
it is sometimes a little difficult not to lack sympathy with them, because they
are pursuing will-o’-the-wisps. We forget that until yesterday we were doing
the same thing.
521.
The silence
may last a moment of time or it may last a thousand years. But it will end. Yet
you will carry its strength with you. Again and again the battle must be fought
and won. It is only for an interval that nature can be still.
522.
The actual moment
of complete unfoldment may take place at any point of a man’s career; that is
to say, when the time comes for the soul to unfold it can do so whether it has
a physical body or not at the time; the silence would last only a moment, or
only a very short time, here on the physical plane, but it might well last a
thousand years if the man were in the heaven-world. It will come at some time
to all, and once attained it can never be lost. Yet it is only for a moment
that-nature can be still, because evolution is steadily going on, and to stand
still is not to evolve. It has been said that in occultism no man stands still,
that he is always either retrograding or advancing. I do not know whether that
is actually so, but it is quite certain that if he is not advancing he should
examine himself, and try to find out why. There ought to be steady and continuous
progress.
523.
We come now to the
Master Hilarion’s note on Rule 21.
524.
The opening
of the bloom is the glorious moment when perception awakes; with it comes
confidence, knowledge, certainty. The pause of the soul is the moment of wonder,
and the next moment of satisfaction – that is the silence.
525.
The opening of
the bloom is a gradual process. Even while the bud is still tightly shut it is
slowly swelling under the influence of the sun and rain and the manifold
influences that play upon it. The actual bursting of the bud is comparatively
sudden, but the growth is continuous. The growth has been progressing before
that; it will go on after. To take another analogy: the growth of the chicken
has been taking place inside the egg before, and it continues after, the breaking
of the shell; there is a particular point when the shell is broken that is for
us the dramatic moment, though it is really only part of a steady growth. It is
the same with the growth of the soul.
526.
This passage
refers also to a particular stage in the disciple’s life. It describes the
feelings of the man when the first great truth of Initiation is put before him.
People are apt to think that the things that will be taught at Initiation are
many and various. I violate no pledge in saying that the great truths are not
all given at the same time. At each stage one single fact is communicated – a
fact that changes the face of the earth for the man, in the same way that the
knowledge of reincarnation and karma has changed our lives. One would expect
that, having a new fact put before him, it would be necessary for the Initiate
to grow into it and prove it. It is not so. The moment the man has the truth he
recognizes it at once as true: he needs no proof. Then comes the moment of
wonder; he marvels at the beauty and perfection of it. Only later does he see
that this is not everything. Later vision brings more into view, but for the
moment it is perfection. He wonders also that what is so obvious has escaped
his notice before. Then comes the moment of satisfaction that is the silence.
527.
Know, O
disciple, that those who have passed through the silence, and felt its peace
and retained its strength, they long that you shall pass through it also.
528.
Certainly they
do, because those who have unfolded the faculties of the soul know the whole system,
and see it all in action before them, and because they see it, they yearn that
every one shall see it. They realize that part of that plan is that we should
all help. Therefore they desire that every one as soon as possible should be
brought to see that his duty is to assist, that that is the real work of the
world. We all have subsidiary work to do; we have our part to play on the stage
of the physical world, and we must play that part as well, as nobly, as we can;
it does not matter what it is, it matters only that we should play it well. But
we must remember that behind that is the real soul-life, and that is the thing
of greatest importance.
529.
We live in an
atmosphere where the means is taken for the end. Most of our education is built
on that plan. For example, people are taught geometry and mathematics, but are
never shown that these lead to a comprehension of how the great Architect has
constructed His universe. So long as we take them as ends in themselves they
lead nowhere in particular; but if we follow them up as did the ancients who
invented them, we shall find they are of great use. Pythagoras taught the value
of numbers and of geometry, but he taught it to the physikoi, that is,
to those who were learning the secrets of life. They learnt them in order to
comprehend life better, and it is from that point of view that we should study all
things, not merely to make material and commercial calculations.
530.
Therefore, in
the Hall of Learning, when he is capable of entering there, the disciple will always find his Master.
531.
There has been a
great deal of misunderstanding about those words, “the Hall of Learning”. They
are used also in The Voice of the Silence. The three halls mentioned
there may be taken in more than one way, as I have already explained.1
532.
1 Ante. Vol. II, p. 89ss.
533.
Mabel Collins, who
wrote down Light on the Path, took the hall of learning in a very
literal sense as an actual building. She speaks of having astrally entered this
building and seen some of these precepts written there in golden letters on the
wall. She may be perfectly right in making this statement. This experience may
belong to the particular method by which she was taught, and those who taught
her may have had such a temple. I do not know whether that is so; I can only
say that I have never seen it. But it is quite obvious that much of what is said
here about the hall of learning clearly refers to the astral plane, where the
aspirant at first learns most of his lessons. Few men have yet developed the astral
body fully; most are still learning how to use it; therefore a great deal of
work is being done at that level. Men are also gradually developing the mental body,
but are not yet able to use that as a vehicle even after death. Anyone who has
developed the faculties of the mental body and can look at dead people, finds
them each shut up in a shell of his own thought, with certain avenues open from
that shell – but only a very few, and only to a very limited degree. The dead
man lives in that shell, and not in the mental world at all. That is why he is
perfectly happy with his very limited ideas. Undoubtedly his capacity for bliss
would be far greater if he had the whole mental plane at his disposal and had
developed the faculties which would enable him to function fully on it. As it
is, he is in the midst of it all, but because of his limitations he can touch
only a small amount of what might otherwise be attained.
534.
Few people have
developed the mental body to a point at which it can be used as a vehicle. Pupils
of the Masters are in due course taught to travel in their mental bodies, and
to form what is called the mayavi rupa when they wish to work on the
astral plane. One who has learnt to do this leaves his astral and physical
bodies lying on the bed, and when he wishes to work on the astral plane he materializes
a temporary astral body for that purpose and lets it dissolve again as soon as
the necessity for it has passed. The Master first teaches the pupil how it is
done, and after that he can do it for himself, as I have explained in The
Masters and the Path?1 1 Op. cit., Ch.
IX.
535.
The assurance
that the disciple will find his Master in the hall of learning seems to be a
direct contradiction to the direction given in The Voice of the Silence
– “Look not for thy Guru in those mayavic regions “2 (2
Ante, Vol. II, p. 102.) The two passages
are perfectly reconcilable if one understands what each means. The meaning here
is that in the astral world the man will always find someone representing the
Master. The Master Himself will deal with him probably only on special
occasions, and he will work on the astral plane generally under the direction
of one of the older pupils of the Master.
536.
The statement in The
Voice of the Silence is merely a warning to us not to accept any casual astral
entity as a guide, without knowing exactly who he is, for there are numbers of
astral beings of various kinds who are ready in the most praiseworthy way to
appoint themselves as teachers, and they are not in the least deterred by the fact
that they often know very much less than the people whom they propose to teach.
537.
Those that
ask shall have. But though the ordinary man asks perpetually, his voice is not
heard. For he asks with his mind only; and the voice of the mind is only heard
on that plane on which the mind acts. Therefore, not until the first twenty-one
rules are passed do I say that those that ask shall have.
538.
The first
sentence in the above passage recalls a very similar one in the Gospels, in
which the Christ says; “Ask, and it shall be given you; seek, and ye shall
find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you.”1 (1
S. Matthew, 7, 7.) People generally take this to
mean that their prayers will be answered and that if they knock at the door of
heaven it will be opened to them. They vaguely think that if they try to obtain
salvation it will be vouchsafed to them. This passage takes a higher
standpoint, and refers quite clearly to truth and occult development. It does
not apply to the ordinary man, but to the pupil who, when the first twenty-one
rules are passed, has reached the first Initiation.
539.
The man who asks
with his mind only is endeavouring to gain occult knowledge, trying to peer
into the mysteries of life and nature, merely by his mental powers, and the
Master says quite clearly that that is not enough. That man will get his reply,
but only at the level on which the mind acts. That is, he will acquire only an intellectual
conception of certain matters. Still, that is a very fine thing to have, and is
not at all to be despised. The man who in studying Theosophy obtains a firm
intellectual grasp of its teaching has done exceedingly well. He then accepts
it as true, because it satisfies the demands of his intellect. That is already
a valuable result, but it is not actual knowledge; it is not at all the same
thing as the absolute certainty which comes from knowledge gained on the
intuitional plane, and the occultist thinks only of that knowledge as marking a
really important advance.
540.
One cannot have
too keen an intellect; we may take that quite definitely for granted. It is
well that we should endeavour to add to our knowledge, to develop our intellects
by doing something definite, because, as I have explained before, no great
progress can be made before there is mental as well as astral development. In
some cases the man who gains an intellectual grasp of the Theosophical system
may run a considerable risk of exalting his intellect unduly. He may be tempted
to criticize, to feel that he could have planned the universe much better than
it is at present arranged. The man who does that is making an entirely wrong use
of his intellect and will do himself harm. It would be much better for him if he
were able to acquire some development along the line of feeling more deeply and
keenly. But if along with his intellectual development the man can retain
humility, if, while he grasps as much as he can of the system, he can yet,
within himself and without, refrain from sitting in judgment upon it, then only
good will result from his development.
541.
We are always
told that we must follow our own conscience. The dictates of conscience come
from above and represent usually the knowledge of the ego on the subject. But
the ego himself is only partially developed as yet. His knowledge on any given
subject may be quite small, or even inaccurate, and he can reason only from the
information before him. Because of this a man’s conscience often misleads him.
It sometimes happens that an ego who is young and knows but little may
nevertheless be able to impress his will upon the personality. As a general
rule, the undeveloped ego is also undeveloped in his power of impressing
himself upon his lower vehicles, and perhaps that is just as well. Sometimes,
however, an ego who lacks development in tolerance and wide knowledge may yet
have a will sufficiently strong to impress upon his physical brain orders which
would show that he was a very young ego and did not understand.1 1
Ante., Vol. I, Part IV, Ch. 6: Confidence.
542.
We cannot but
obey our conscience, yet surely we might try to check and verify it by certain
broad facts which no one can dispute. It may be that the Inquisitors were
acting under the dictates of their conscience sometimes, but if they had
compared the great broad rules that they should love one another which their
supposed leader, Christ, had given them, with the conscience which dictated
murders and tortures and burnings, they would have waited and said: “Manifestly
something is wrong. Let us at least take counsel before we follow our instincts
in this particular matter.” They would have been quite right to take such
counsel, to test that conscience, by the general rules coming from One whom
they themselves acknowledged as infinitely greater than themselves. They did
not think of it; so came much evil into the world. Very few people will pause
and consider in a case of that sort, yet one can easily see that it is the only
safe thing to do.
543.
So we must use
our intellect in such a way that it will be an instrument of the ego, and will
not be an obstacle in the path of his development. Therefore, when conscience
seems to dictate to us something which is clearly against the great laws of
mercy and truth and justice, we shall do well to think carefully whether the
universal rule is not a greater thing than this particular application which
seems to conflict with it.
544.
Even before we
have any definite consciousness on the intuitional plane we often receive reflections
from it. Intuitions occasionally come through into our daily life, and although
most of those impressions from the higher self which are genuine come rather
from the causal world than from the buddhic, still now and then we receive a
flash of the real knowledge of the spirit which cannot express itself on any
level lower than the buddhic plane. These priceless flashes bring us a
knowledge which we feel to be absolutely certain, though in many cases we
cannot give any intellectual reason for it.
545.
We are right in
feeling confident about it, if the thing is a real intuition. The difficulty
for most of us at the earlier stages is that we cannot always distinguish
between intuition and impulse. Dr. Besant has given one or two rules for that
distinction. She says: “If you have time to wait and see, let the matter remain
for a while – sleep on it, as people sometimes say. If it be merely an impulse,
the probability is that it will die away; if it is a real intuition it will
remain as strong as ever. Then, again, the intuition is always connected with
something unselfish. If there is any touch of selfishness shown in some impulse
coming from a higher plane you may be sure that it is only an astral impulse
and not a true buddhic intuition.”
546.
Both the astral
impulses and the intuitions from above enter the etheric part of the physical
brain from the astral plane, but the intuition would come originally either
from the causal or from the buddhic body, as the case may be. Since both
descend from above it is often difficult to distinguish between them. We shall
be able to distinguish infallibly at a later stage, because then we shall have
our consciousness opened above the astral level and will know certainly whether
these promptings arise in the astral body or come from a higher plane. At
present most people have not that advantage, and consequently they have to
exercise their best judgment with such mind as they have succeeded in developing.
547.
When the
twenty-one rules are passed and the disciple at Initiation receives a touch of
buddhic consciousness, the knowledge of unity appears to him as a great
spiritual fact. After that experience there is a difference between him and the
ordinary man who asks with his mind. It has often been said that unity is the
characteristic of the buddhic plane. That, perhaps, requires a little more explanation.
One may know something fairly completely in one’s causal body – know the
essence of the thing, because the ego, working through the causal body, thinks
abstract thoughts. He does not need to descend to examples, for his thoughts
pierce through to the heart of the matter. But all that, however wonderful it
is, is still done from the outside.
548.
The great
characteristic of the buddhic plane is that its work is done from the inside. If
we want to sympathize with a man, to understand him fully in order to help him,
and are working in the causal body, we, metaphorically speaking, turn the limelight
upon his causal body, and study all his peculiarities; they are quite well marked
and plainly to be seen, but they are always seen from without. If we want the
same knowledge, possessing the faculty of the buddhic plane, we raise our consciousness
to the buddhic plane, and there we find the consciousness of this other man as
part of ourselves. We find a point of consciousness there which represents him
– we might call it a hole rather than a point. We can pour ourselves down that
hole and enter into his consciousness at any lower level that we wish, and therefore
we can see everything precisely as he sees it – from inside him, as it were, instead of looking at him
from outside. It will be easily understood how much more that lends itself to
perfect understanding and sympathy.
549.
When we have the
wider view which such knowledge gives, and, having become one with all these
different entities and all their different problems, we are studying them from
within instead of from without, we can see the direction in which we ought to bring
our force to bear. That is another and very great advantage – that we know how
to approach problems down here. I do not mean that a man who has had a glimpse
of that unity would not make mistakes on a lower plane; but he would not make
such mistakes if he were able to raise his consciousness to that plane, look at
the thing from that point of view, and then bring the remembrance clearly down
into his physical brain and act upon it. He might not always have time to go
through that proceeding, or he might not think of doing it at the moment;
therefore, at times he would make errors like other men, but certainly he would
have very great advantage in the possession of that power, not only because of
the greater knowledge it gave him at the moment, but also because of the wider
view which would enable him to see in what direction his forces could best be
used to produce the desired results.
550.
To read, in the occult sense, is to
read with the eyes of the
spirit. To ask is to feel the hunger within – the yearning of spiritual
aspiration. To be able to read means having obtained the power in a small
degree of gratifying that hunger.
551.
The yearning of
spiritual aspiration is not the mere desire to know and understand, which we
might have in connection with
the causal body. It belongs rather to the higher manifestation of the buddhic
level, and it is only there that it can be fully satisfied. As I have
explained, what happens in the buddhic vehicle, if brought down to the
personality, is reflected in the astral body. People consequently often mistake
an emotional outrush which belongs to the astral plane for real spiritual aspiration.
552.
Those who have
studied occultism ought not to make that mistake, but beginners frequently do
so. We very often see examples of that during religious revivalist meetings,
when quite uneducated and undeveloped people are worked up into a high
condition of ecstasy for the time by the preaching of some person who is full
of strong emotion himself, and therefore is able to awaken it in his hearers.
Some of the great emotional preachers of the past had that power very strongly
indeed. I do not for a moment say that they did not accomplish a great deal of
good; no doubt they did, but most of their work was confessedly what we should
call astral – it was aimed at the feelings of the people.
553.
Undoubtedly there
are people in whom the higher aspiration can be evoked by working from below,
but they are very few and they would be little likely to be found among the
less cultured classes. This is not a narrow or illiberal view to take, because
conditions of birth result from karma; if a person is born in a class of life
in which he is uncultured and uneducated, it is because he has deserved that
birth, and therefore the strong probabilities are that he is a younger soul
than one who is born with greater advantages. That is not invariably so,
because there are many exceptions and special cases, but broadly speaking it is
true. So when evangelists of the Moody and Sankey type address themselves
chiefly to the less educated people it is on the whole to be expected that they
will arouse their emotions only, and it is uncertain whether the results will
or will not be permanent. If the impression made is strong enough, the memory of
it will survive even when the emotion dies down, and the person who has been
what they call “saved” may remain in his new and more exalted frame of mind.
554.
These great
emotional upheavals are sometimes beneficial, but in many instances they are
harmful. Against the cases of people who have thereby permanently abandoned
their evil life we have to set those ethers in which serious harm is done, in
which people, for example, are altogether driven off their mental balance, and
become weak-minded or even violently insane. Cases in which lasting benefit
results are not very common; the great majority are affected only temporarily:
the excitement passes and no very definite good remains. Nevertheless it is a
good thing in those cases in which people are raised even temporarily to a
higher level.
555.
Such emotionalism
is not permissible, however, to students of occultism, because they are beyond
the stage at which such excitement could advance their progress. There must be
no confusion between emotion of that sort and the exaltation of the higher
planes. People at such revivals often pass into an ecstatic condition in which
they certainly lose control for the time. I have myself seen cases in which
people stamped about, shouted loudly, and were so carried out of themselves
that they did not know what they were doing. They say it is all joy; I suppose
that they certainly do feel that, but it is an uncontrolled emotion, and
therefore is to be avoided by the student of occultism.
556.
The man who
experiences buddhic consciousness is also carried out of himself, with a bliss
so intense that words altogether fail to express it: but he never loses the
knowledge that he is himself. He is on a higher level: he is more himself than
he ever was before; he does not lose his self-control. The ecstasy which he
feels may indeed produce by reflection a certain emotion in the personality – a
feeling of most intense joy on all levels, but never an uncontrolled emotion.
It would never lead him into rash or ill-considered actions, to forget himself
or lose his dignity. With the intense exaltation, with the indescribable bliss
of the higher experience, there comes an utter peace which seems to fill the
earth, whereas the lower emotions disturb the equilibrium to a most extraordinary
extent.
557.
A clairvoyant
watching a revivalist meeting will generally see that non-human entities are
gathered round it in order to take advantage of the vast waves of uncontrolled
emotion. Emotion is a tremendous force and these waves are, if we consider
actual measurement, things of enormous size and power. They dash and rush about
through the astral world in the neighbourhood, and produce all the effect there
that a great tempest would show on the physical plane. There are many astral
creatures who revel in that. They plunge in and feel the greatest delight and
excitement because of it. They neither know nor care whether the emotion is
religious feeling or hatred or love; they want only the tremendous vibration,
the swirl and sway of the storm. These beings take the greatest delight in
sweeping round in its vortices, and being carried away by it, very much in the
same way that surf-bathers do in the sea. For that purpose these entities will
stir up emotion among human beings as much as they can; they simply know that
here is something which they enjoy tremendously, so they go to work to
intensify it as much as possible. Very largely they are responsible for the
great outbursts of force on such occasions, and these creatures make it greater
just as a school of whales rushing about in rough water would make it rougher.
They have just about the same amount of intelligence as those animals, so there
is nothing very spiritual about it. It is not, as many people think, a divine
afflatus, nor is it exactly dignified to allow oneself to be the sport of
creatures at that level.
558.
Only if with
intense exaltation and bliss there comes at the same time a sense of uttermost
calm and peace is one touching higher levels; when there is excitement and
disturbance, and a loss of self-control, one is certainly down on a lower level.
559.
When the disciple is ready to learn, then he is
accepted, acknowledged, recognized. It must be so, for he has lit his lamp, and
it cannot be hidden.
560.
This is a
comforting saying. Disciples are always watched, though many people find
difficulty in realizing this. The Great Ones Themselves have explained that
when They look over the world the man who has lit his lamp shows out like a
great flame in the general darkness. They could not miss seeing it. Carefully
They are watching wherever the light is beginning to glow and are trying to
help each little glow to kindle into flame, so that these also may become
bearers of light, to the world.
561.
People are apt
sometimes to criticize unwisely in this matter. Perhaps it is natural; but it
would be better for them if they did not. I have myself known cases in
which members – generally keenly intellectual people, who were very sharp in
discriminating faults and failings in others – have said: “So-and-so is a pupil
of the Master; I do not see that he is in any way more fit for such a position
than I am myself. I have been so many years in the Society; I have done
such-and-such work, and if such-and-such a man with certain obvious failings
may be accepted, why should not I?”
562.
People who make
remarks like those forget the general principle which lies at the back of all occult
progress. Their objection is exactly the same in nature as that which is so
often brought against the law of karma. People say they cannot see the justice
of certain things that have happened to them, and therefore there is no law of
justice. “Justice is not to be had – it is a delusion.” That is precisely what
it would be to say, “I have made a machine to go by hydraulic power, and it does
not work; therefore there is no such thing as hydraulic pressure.” No sane man
would say that; he would begin to look for the fault in his machine, knowing
that the laws of nature are invariable, and mistakes are not made along that
line. No one would take that attitude with regard to a law of physical science,
yet people will do it in connection with the law of karma. If they would begin
with the hypothesis that the law of karma exists, and that it invariably works,
then, when they cannot see how it operates in a particular case, they would
attribute the fault to themselves and their limited vision, and not make so
foolish a mistake as to say that there is no such thing as the law of karma.
563.
In exactly the
same way, if people think themselves better in various ways than others who are
selected by the Masters as pupils, they should remember that the Master makes
His selections with unerring judgment. There are no doubt many things on higher
planes which even a Master does not yet know, but quite certainly with regard
to all these lower planes with which we have anything to do, His knowledge may
be accepted as infallible. There are higher Adepts who stand above the Masters,
such as the Manu and the Bodhisattva, the Buddha and the great Lord of the
World, who must know certain things which even our Masters do not know: that is
clear. The Logos of the solar system must know still more, and beyond that there
must be higher Logoi who have yet wider knowledge. But we may be quite sure of
the Master’s judgment and accuracy with regard to these planes which He has
fully and finally mastered. Therefore, if He chooses a man He is not making a
mistake.
564.
Even in the rare
case when a man afterwards falls away and acts unworthily it does not follow
that the Master made a mistake in selecting such a man. The man must have had
the right to that splendid opportunity, and because he had earned that right the
opportunity had to be given him. A vast amount of trouble may have been taken
in the training of such a pupil, and it looks as though it were wasted; but
that is not so. It will all count somewhere, somehow, in the course of his evolution;
that is certain. The Master sometimes offers an opportunity to a man because he
has earned it, although there may be in that man along with certain good
qualities others less desirable, which would make him unsuitable if they
happened to get the upper hand. Nevertheless the offer is made because it is
just that it should be made.
565.
Sometimes there
are special links between egos which many lives later culminate in the close relationship
of Master and pupil. There is the well-known case of our late Vice-President,
Mr. Sinnett. Long ago he was a powerful nobleman in Egypt. His father had built
and endowed a great temple; therefore he had a vast amount of influence, and
was practically the controlling power of that temple. One of those who are now
our Masters was a prisoner of war in Egypt at the time, and Mr. Sinnett and I were
soliders in the army which captured Him. He was a person of distinction in His own
country, and consequently He was assigned to our care, because captives of high
rank were very well treated in Egypt, and were entertained by people of rank
corresponding with their own, so long as they did not try to escape. So He
lived in the house of Mr. Sinnett for two years, and in the course of that time
became keenly interested in the occult work of the Temple, and wished to take
part in it. Mr. Sinnett was able to give Him the desired introduction to occult
study. He made the most astonishing progress in it, and in every life
thereafter He continued the studies begun in ancient Khem. In a later life He
became an Adept, while His benefactor of Egypt had by no means reached that
level. When in this incarnation He found that He wanted to spread Theosophical truths
in the world, because the time was come when the world was ripe to receive
them, He looked round for someone to do it, and saw His old friend and benefactor
as the editor of a great daily newspaper, and well qualified to do this very
piece of work. He discharged this old debt by giving him that opportunity. We
know how well and nobly he took it. That shows that one may have made a link
far away in the past with one who has since become an Adept, and that His discharge
of the debt naturally takes the form of giving help and information, and of
drawing the man close to Him.
566.
So in various
ways links may be made, and it may well be that the person who is chosen as a
disciple is by no means perfect, but he could not be chosen in that particular
way if he were not worthy. That he has still certain faults and failings does
not debar him if he has other and greater recommendations, if the advantages
overbalance the disadvantages. There are many circumstances which may operate
in the taking of a particular pupil by a Master. We may be quite sure that he
cannot be taken unless he deserves it, but we may not be able to see how he has
deserved it. The converse of that proposition is equally certain – that no one
who deserves it can fail to be observed and be taken. It is not wise to use
this lower mind, which we have developed with so much pain and trouble, in
criticizing the actions of the Masters, who know far more than we. We may not
always be able to understand why They do this or that, but those who follow
Them should at least so far trust Them as to say: “I know the Master must be right.
I do not see plainly why. As far as I am concerned I know that I shall be taken
when I am ready. My business is to make myself fit for it. In the meantime, I
have no concern with what the Master does with regard to other people.”
567.
That is much the
wisest. It is the same with the work we are given to do. If it seems outwardly
to be a failure, we should not allow that to discourage us. We may not have
achieved the result that we expected,’ but we may have achieved exactly the
result which the Master intended. He does not always tell us all that is in His
mind. He will set us a piece of work to do, and we think that what is to us the
obvious result of that work is necessarily what He is aiming to get from it. It may be that He has
in His mind quite another idea. He may even wish to train the worker in a
particular way – not to be disappointed by failure, for example; or it might
have reference to something else of which the worker knew nothing at all. I
have had several instances of that in the course of my experience of occultism.
We were told to do certain things, and supposed them to be aimed at a certain
result, which did not come. We wondered; but in after years it has been seen
that something quite different would not have been attained when it was, if
that work had not been done. I have no doubt at all that in that case the
Master gave us the work, not with the object we supposed, but with the other
object of which we knew nothing.
568.
So I would say to
those who grumble at what they consider faults in disciples, and say they ought
not to be chosen: “You must be taking a partial view; you are using your
intellect in a line where it is not useful. If you know of the existence of the
Masters, and understand anything of Their powers, you may be very sure that
They know exactly what They are doing; and if you do not see what it is, after
all it is not essential that you should. They know; that is the
important thing.” The recognition is not always made known at once to the
disciple. The ordinary course is that a man who has shown himself worthy of the
high honour of discipleship is brought somehow into close touch with one who is
already a disciple of his future Master, and the Master through that disciple
usually gives some instructions to him.1
(1 Ante, Vol.
II, p. 66, 103.) Probably the Master will say to
the older disciple: “Bring so-and-so to me astrally one night.” The man is
brought, and then the Master says to him: I have been watching your work, and I
think that you can perhaps make a further advancement. I offer you the position
of a probationary pupil if you will undertake to devote all your energies, or
as much as you can, to the service of humanity, in a direction which I shall
indicate.” That is the most usual procedure, but sometimes such a recognition
as that comes only after a very long period. And even then there may be reasons
why the man should know nothing of it in his waking consciousness.
569.
I remember a
peculiar case in India. There was an old man, an orthodox Hindu, who had been
living an exceedingly good, useful, and busy life. He was a man who had shown
no selfishness, and had devoted himself as far as he could to the welfare of
humanity. He had first dealt very admirably with all his family duties, and had
then used all his time and money in doing good from his point of view. He had
always held, before the Theosophical Society came to his notice, that the great
Rishis not only must have existed in the past, but must also exist in the
present, and he hoped some day to come near Them, but was quite humble about
it. He would say: “I know it is for Them to make the advance, not me. I have
sought Them, and tried to carry out what must be Their will all these years.” At
last, one day, one of our Masters spoke to this man, and said: “For forty years
I have watched your work, and in many cases have guided you, although you knew
nothing of it. Now the time has come when it is best for you that you should
know it.”
570.
That is a very
striking example, and it does seem to show that there may be many altruistic people
doing work under the direction of our Masters, although they know nothing of
such direction. There may be reasons which in this life make it undesirable
that they should know. We may be very sure that the Master knows best, and, if
he does not choose to declare Himself, we need not therefore suppose that He is
not watching.
571.
In these
relations the Master always does exactly what is best for the man as well as
what is best for the work, because He has the enormous advantage of dealing
with these things at higher levels, where one has not to balance good against
evil, as in the lower planes, where very often one can do good in one direction
only when one does some harm in another way. This recondite matter was alluded
to by the Manu, when He said that there was no fire without smoke. But there is
fire without smoke, pure good without any adverse consequences or associations,
on the higher levels, because all is working together for the good of the
whole, and the advancement of the whole includes the advancement of the unit
also. Even though it may seem in some cases that harm is done, that a person is
checked, it is because it is best for his progress that such a check should
then come – like the pruning of a tree, which might easily be thought by the
tree to be a cruel act, and yet is emphatically intended for its benefit.
572.
But to learn is impossible until the first great
battle has been won. The mind may recognize truth, but the spirit cannot
receive it.
573.
The ego sends
impressions through to the lower planes as soon as he begins to become awakened,
but there are many things that stand in his way. He can do nothing until the
astral body is controlled; because if it is a mass of surging emotions, how;
can the ego send down through that body any coherent or rational instruction?
The first great battle is with the passions, with the senses, and he must
conquer them; but when that is done he has still the mind to meet, and it may
be that the mind will prove a more formidable adversary even than the astral
body.
574.
Then the Master
goes on to speak about the knowledge which is attained by this intuition. I
have already explained that at each Initiation the candidate receives a key of
knowledge which puts a different complexion upon life for him, shows him a
deeper depth, a fuller unfolding, as it were, of the meaning of the occult
teaching.1 (1
Ante., Vol. II, p. 351.) Each time, as he
receives it, it seems to the man to be final. He says: “Now I have all
knowledge; this is so satisfying, so complete, it is impossible that there
could be more.” There is an infinity yet to be learnt; he is only on the road
of learning. As he goes on, more and more will be unfolded before him. The
Master knows precisely at what stage it is most useful to give certain
information. People often think they ought to have it all at once. That is just
as foolish as it would be to expect a teacher to explain the differential
calculus to a child who was only just learning the multiplication table. He
must go through many intervening stages before he can know even remotely what
it means.
575.
It is exactly so with
us. We are a little apt often – again comes that intellectual conceit – to
think that we know at least enough to be trusted with all possible knowledge. I
can only say that They know better than we what is best for us, and whatever is
best for each one is also that which is best for the whole.
576.
While many people
recognize that that must be so, and that of course the whole must take precedence
over any part, they do sometimes feel a little that the parts are being
ignored, that while everything is working for the good of the whole, yet
individual parts often suffer by the way. The world is better managed than that;
actually, that which is best for the whole is also best for each one of the
parts, and not only is justice done to humanity as a whole, but it is so done
as to involve no injustice to any of the units of humanity. Let us be sure of
that, and realize it with absolute certainty; then we shall have no feeling of
doubt or dismay, and whatever happens we shall be able serenely to trust that
it is being done for the best.
577.
Once having
passed through the storm and attained the peace, it is then always possible to
learn, even though the disciple waver, hesitate, and turn aside. The Voice of
the Silence, remains within him, and though he leave the Path utterly, yet one
day it will resound, and rend him asunder and separate his passions from his
divine possibilities. Then, with pain and desperate cries from the deserted
lower self, he will return.
578.
In such a case there
would be indeed a terrible struggle. Let. us not submit ourselves to that; it
is better, while yet we may, to keep ourselves well in hand and not make
ourselves the subjects of such a surgical operation as that of the tearing
apart of the higher and lower self. The struggle with the lower self goes on
all the time. If the disciple allows it to fasten its fangs into the higher and
to draw him away from his greater possibilities, he must inevitably suffer
terribly when the time of separation comes, as it must come, for those who have
entered the stream can leave it only by reaching the further shore.
579.
Therefore I
say, Peace be with you, “My peace I give unto you,” can only be said by the
Master to the beloved disciples who are as Himself.
580.
There is a very
interesting point in regard to the distinction the Master makes here. “Peace be
with you” is only an ordinary Eastern salutation, though a beautiful one. When
we say “Good-bye,” which means “God be with you,” it is the same thing, for God
is Peace. The “salaam” of the Muhammadans is again the same as “salem” in
Jerusalem, and Jerusalem means the abode of peace. The Hindus have the word “shanti”
which means peace, and their “namaste,” which means “greetings – or reverence –
to Thee” is generally answered by the word “shanti”.
581.
It is customary
to write “Peace be with you” at the end of books in the East as a kind of final
greeting or leave-taking from the author to the reader. But, as the Master says
here, “My Peace I give unto you” can only be said under special circumstances.
When Christ said: Peace I leave with you, my peace I give unto you: not as the
world giveth, give I unto you,”1 (1
S. John, 15, 27.) He was speaking to His own
special disciples only. It is said here that the disciple who can receive the
peace of the Master is only that one who is as the Master Himself, that is, an
accepted pupil – perhaps even more, he who is the “son” of the Master. He
receives not merely a good wish for peace and blessing, which would most
certainly be an effective thing when pronounced by one who had the power to pronounce
it, but more than that. The Master gives His own peace, the peace which nothing
can disturb, to those who are as Himself, who are His own sons, part of His own
nature, sharing with Him all that He is in so far as they are able to receive
it. This does not mean, of course, that the pupil is able to share all that the
Master is and has – to do that would mean that the pupil was himself an Adept –
but at least he shares as much as possible.
582.
There are
some even among those who are ignorant of the Eastern Wisdom, to whom this can
be said, and to whom it can daily be said with more completeness.
583.
This is a very
interesting and remarkable message, which may well seem strange to us, because
there are a great many of us who do know something of the Eastern Wisdom, who
pay reverence to the great Masters, who have for many years belonged to an
organization specially devoted to Them and Their service, and yet to most of us
the Master cannot say, “My Peace I give unto you,” but only to those very few
whom He has taken into a much closer relation to Himself. That being so, we yet
read that to some who do not know the Eastern Wisdom at all this inner blessing
can be given.
584.
How is that, and
who would they be to whom such a privilege is given? They would be few only, at
the present stage of evolution, but still a few there undoubtedly are. In order
to understand that, let us think what it is that enables a Master to take a
pupil as close to Him as that. It is that the pupil has come into the Master’s
world, has learnt to look at things as the Master looks at them, and to put
himself into the Master’s attitude towards the world and all that belongs to
it. A man may do that without knowing anything about the Eastern Wisdom or
about the Master at all; he may yet without that knowledge be such a man as
would take that high view. The special characteristic of the Master’s attitude
is that it is utterly unselfish, that the lower self does not come into it at
all. He looks at everything from the standpoint of the plan of the Deity, and
He never for one moment brings His own personality into the matter; if anything
is helpful for human evolution it is good; if it is a hindrance to human
evolution it is an evil thing. Although the Eastern Wisdom must bring us
perfectly into that attitude if we understand it quite fully, yet we can see
that others ignorant of it might also reach such an attitude. To be near enough
to the Master to receive His peace, utter unselfishness is the first and
greatest prerequisite. One may be near the Master, one may receive His peace
even, and yet of two who stand beside Him and receive it, one may receive it
far more fully than the other. The ignorant though utterly saintly and
unselfish person will receive from the peace of the Master all he can receive,
but the man who, equal to him in this respect, possesses in addition the higher
wisdom, will receive from that peace infinitely more.
585.
∆ Regard the three truths. They are equal.
586.
This line is
preceded by a triangle which is used as a kind of signature of Him who wrote
it, just as the cross is prefixed by Catholic Bishops to their letters and
documents. It is done here to attract special attention.
587.
The three truths
to which the Master Hilarion refers are those which He Himself enunciated in
another book which He dictated – The Idyll of the White Lotus – which
has not received quite the attention which it deserves. It is an account of a
previous life of His own, which He spent in Egypt when the great Egyptian
religion was in its decadence and was no longer understood. Its splendid and
impersonal worship had degenerated into the following of a goddess who demanded
not so much perfect purity as perfect passion from her people, and so there was
much corruption.
588.
The Master, whose
name at that time was Sensa, was a clairvoyant pupil in an Egyptian temple. The
priests of the temple recognized his value as a clairvoyant and as a medium,
but did not wish him to teach true religion to the people, because that would
have interfered with the existent ecclesiastical system, and eventually they
killed him. In the course of the story, after going through many trials he
found himself surrounded by a group of Adepts, among whom was his own Master,
who then told him what to teach to the people – to those who had been misled by
wrong teaching. They told him to preach broad truths only. We have the form in
which the three great truths were then given. They are prefaced by the words: “There
are three truths which are absolute and cannot be lost, but yet may remain
silent for lack of speech.” That means they can never be lost because they are
held by the Great Brotherhood, although they may not at a given time be known
in the world because there is no one to speak them.
589.
The first great
truth is: “The soul of man is immortal, and its future is the future of a thing
whose growth and splendour have no limit.” This great truth at once does away
with all fear of bell and of the necessity of salvation, because there is
absolute certainty of final attainment for every human soul, no matter how far
he may seem to have strayed from the path of evolution.
590.
The second great
truth is: “The principle which gives life dwells in us, and without us, is undying
and eternally beneficent, is not heard, or seen, or smelt, but is perceived by
the man who desires perception.” That means that the world is an expression of
God, that man is part of Him and can know it for himself when he is able to
raise Himself to the level at which it can be revealed to him, and that all
things are definitely and intelligently moving together for good.
591.
The third great
truth is: “Each man is his own absolute law-giver, the dispenser of glory or
gloom to himself; the decreer of his life, his reward, his punishment.” Here we
have a clear statement of the law of karma, the law of re-adjustment, of
balance.
592.
Then follow the
words: “These truths, which are as great as is life itself, are as simple as
the simplest mind of man. Feed the hungry with them.”
593.
Here we have a
scheme of religion that can be taught to every one. It consists of three main
points of belief, simply formulated, yet very carefully expressed to guard
against misunderstanding. They might briefly be stated thus: “Man is immortal”,
“God is good” and “As a man sows so shall he reap”. In this simpler form they
are suitable for those who are at the stage where they must have simple dogma
laid down for them. A more developed soul will want to understand it all. To
him can be given the details, and there is enough in those details to occupy
the minds of the wisest of men.
594.
These three
truths can be seen; they could be deduced from experience even if it were
possible that they should be lost. Many egos know them. Some know them for
themselves at first-hand, but there are many others who at present, so far at
least as their personalities are concerned, are only in the position of
believing. They accept them because they are told they are true by those whom
they trust, and because they seem to be self-evident – because they cannot otherwise
in any reasonable way account for life as they see it. That is a stage, and a
very useful stage, on the way to actual knowing, but of course it is not direct
knowledge. I can say to you, for example, “I know those truths are really so,
because on many planes and through many years I have made investigations and
have carried out experiments which could not have resulted as they did unless
these basic laws were true.” So far only a few can say “I have seen,” but all
should work on towards that point, because actual knowledge gives one a far
greater power than even the most definite intellectual conviction.
595.
When a man is
speaking of these facts, it is always evident whether he is speaking of that
which he himself knows or only of that which he has heard. It makes a
difference in the magnetic effect. Therefore, for the sake of others it is of
importance that we should know something for ourselves as soon as possible. It
may be but a very small part of the great truth, but if we know it by our own experience
that at once makes it more than probable that all the rest is also true, and
gives us additional confidence. Those who have the perfect confidence born of
knowledge can give help to others which cannot be given until one knows. It is
that which makes our fragments of personal experience so useful.
596.
There are many
people who have at one time or other in vision, in sleep, or in meditation seen
the Master. That is, perhaps, something which could not be proved to anyone
else. People might say to a man who has had this experience: “Perhaps it was
only an hallucination, or imagination”; but he knows perfectly well that it was
not anything of the kind. He knows that he did see, and that he also felt
something which made him certain that this was one of our Great Masters. That
is a piece of experience, small, yet far-reaching in its effects. Those who
have been so fortunate as to have had such an experience as that may be deeply
thankful. They know that much at least, and to know one fact belonging to the
higher world at once makes all the rest of the teaching more luminous, and
clearer to follow. So such experiences are not at all to be despised.
597.
There is no harm
in the fact that we do not know perfectly. It must be so; it is in the nature
of things. It is when we suppose our knowledge to be complete, when it is
pitifully incomplete, when we think that we know everything and condemn other men
who think differently, not realizing that they may be seeing another side of a many-sided
truth, that we go wrong. Let us by all means cling to our imperfect knowledge, but,
while trying to increase it whenever we get an opportunity, let us never forget
that it is imperfect, lest we should be led into the mistake of condemning
someone who perhaps knows more than we do. Truth is deep; truth is often mysterious.
It cannot be grasped in its entirety by any one man nor by any one body or sect
of men. We must gradually learn to appreciate truth, before we can know it in
any of its aspects. The truth about anything is the way in which that thing
presents itself to the Logos, to the Maker, of the whole system. He who made it
alone understands all, knows all things as they are. His view is the only
perfect view. For us truth is relative. We cannot see the whole as He sees it;
but although our knowledge must be imperfect at least it need not be wrong as
far as it goes. We may have so much of the truth about a certain thing chat
when we come to know all about it, when we reach Adeptship, we shall not have
to correct what we have previously known, but only to add to it.
598.
It is a very
difficult thing to know what one may teach people outside. It is good,
therefore, to have this authoritative statement from a Master, of certain things
which may be taught generally. We often have to speak about Theosophy to people
who do not in the least take our point of view. In lecturing to the public one
feels at times that it would help to make things clear if one revealed
something of their inner meaning, and yet one hesitates lest one should do
harm.
599.
It is quite
obvious that if we attempted to teach them all we know about Theosophy, many people
who heard would not understand a great deal of it. There are people to whom one
feels at once that one could not speak of the Masters, because the idea would
be quite foreign to them. They would be likely to make some flippant or jeering
remark with regard to it, and that would pain us and would bring exceedingly
bad karma to them. The man who speaks evil of the Great Ones takes upon himself
a very serious responsibility, and the fact that he does not believe in Them
has simply nothing to do with the result. We may not believe that a certain
piece of metal is hot, but if we take hold of it we shall be burnt. People who speak
evil of Those who are devoting all Their lives and strength to the helping of
the world, are guilty of the great sin of ingratitude, as well as of that of
making a mock of holy things, which is blasphemy; and the fact that they do not
know that the things are holy does not come into the question at all. So we
have to balance rather carefully what we say, because the only object in
speaking at all is to do good to the person addressed. We may do him harm
instead of good if we put before him something at which he will jeer or mock.
600.
Remember the
saying of the Christ, which is often not well understood, about casting pearls
before swine. This is often taken quite wrongly as a comparison of the people
to swine. That was surely not in the mind of the great Master. He simply meant that
to give the inner truths to people who have not yet the knowledge to enable
them to appreciate them would be as foolish as to cast pearls before swine. They
would probably rush forward expecting to receive something to eat, and finding that
the pearls were not edible, they would trample them in the mire, and then turn
and rend the giver of the pearls because they had been disappointed in their expectation
of food. The pearls would be of no use to them, however valuable they might be
to us. That is generally the attitude of ordinary people, when we put before them
truths which are not comprehensible to them. They do not see their value; they cast
them aside, and are usually angry with us for giving them something which they regard
as useless.
601.
It has always
been recognized that only simple truths can be given to the great mass of men,
who are as yet not highly evolved. All great religions have had some special
truth which they strongly inculcated, and if any of these truths be taken in
its entirety it will be found that it covers most of the ground. It is very
necessary that certain ideas should be implanted in the minds of the evolving
human egos, so they pass through religion after religion, race after race,
learning something from each.
602.
In Hinduism, for
example, the great idea of duty was specially emphasized. It is obvious that when
the thought of duty fills a man’s mind it must lead to a good and carefully
ordered life. The Greek religion was one which laid stress on beauty. The great
cardinal fact that was impressed upon the Greek all through his life was that
beauty was an expression of God, and that in so far as a man could make himself
and his surroundings beautiful he brought them nearer to what the Deity wished
them to be, and thus allowed the divine power to manifest itself more fully
through him. So even the smallest object in every-day life was always beautiful
– not necessarily expensive, not difficult to get, but beautiful in shape and
colour. That was the fact which Greece impressed upon the world – the power of
beauty.
603.
In Christianity
the central idea is devotion. The Christian Church has for centuries set before
itself the idea of producing saints, holy men, good people, and it felicitates
itself and rests its claim to attention upon the saints already produced. It
celebrates their days, and in every way places them on the highest possible
pinnacle.
604.
Our examination
of the history of these saints shows that among them were included individuals
of many different types. Some of them were unquestionably great, learned and
capable men. Others were not that at all, but were quite ordinary and ignorant,
their great virtue being that they were good. Only when we come to study it
deeply do we realize that the Christian religion is intended not only to feed
the fire of devotion, but also to assist its people at all levels and along all
lines.
605.
When we examine
other great religions, such as Buddhism or Hinduism, we find them also prepared
to meet their people everywhere. Each of these religions has certain precepts
for the uneducated, by virtue of which they will be helped, if they follow them
truly, to lead a good life. It has also much metaphysical and philosophical
teaching for those who need it. Christianity in its present form does not
really give that. True, there are the writings of the Fathers, and if we go
back to Origen and Clement of Alexandria we find hints of those higher
teachings; we find, for example, the statement that Christianity has its
Mysteries. But the Christianity put before people by any of the great Churches,
such as the Greek, the Roman or the Anglican, is certainly a maimed
representation of what it originally was.
606.
Every true
religion must be capable of adapting itself to people at all levels, of meeting
the wise and learned, as well as the ignorant devotee. It certainly must not
exalt the ignorant but devoted man above the wiser, who wants to understand.
Unfortunately there has been a distinct tendency on the part of Christianity to
condemn the people who have wanted to know, to disparage their wisdom as merely
the wisdom of this world, and to regard those who take the attitude of a little
child as likely to make more rapid progress. The child soul must behave as
such, and every religion must be prepared to meet and to feed the child soul,
but that is no reason why it should have no stronger food for those who are
more advanced. The souls who have passed through the earlier stages of growth
long ago in other lives now wish to understand the great Plan – to know
something about the world in which they live and the scheme by which it was
made and is kept going. Many of our Christian brothers have found, with great
relief and a certain amount of surprise, that Theosophy was capable of
supplying them with that knowledge, without destroying their Christianity in
any way. There is nothing in the original Christian teaching which in any way
contradicts any science, although there has been an anti-scientific tendency
coupled with ecclesiastical teaching ever since the Middle Ages. Originally
Christianity answered its purpose quite as well as any of the other faiths; it
is only because it happens to have been especially unfortunate in the loss of
the higher teaching that it distinctly needs supplementing at the present day.
607.
The Chohan then concludes
Part I with the words:
608.
These written above are the first of the rules
which are written on the walls of the Hall of Learning. Those that ask shall
have. Those that desire to read shall read. Those who desire to learn shall
learn.
PEACE
BE WITH YOU
PART II
LIGHT ON THE
PATH
CHAPTER 1
THE
PRELIMINARY COMMENT
609.
C.W.L. – The
second part of Light on the Path assumes that the student has passed the
First Initiation; it carries the man on through the steps of the Path leading
up to the Adept level. But a second and higher interpretation of it begins
beyond that, and helps to guide the man who has already become an Adept on to
His next stage. Swarm T. Subba Row, who knew a great deal about these matters,
told me once that there were really seven meanings for this book – seven ways
in which it could be interpreted – all apparently at different levels, and he
said that the highest interpretations carried a man up to the Initiation of the
Mahachohan. That, of course, is dealing with matters which are absolutely
beyond our ken. We could not possibly understand to what it refers at such a
high level, so it is useless for us even to seek for such an interpretation. It
is possible that we may be able to form some idea of a double meaning, but
anything beyond that will certainly be quite out of our reach.
610.
In what we have
already studied we have been told to cast off the lower self – the personality.
In the higher interpretation, that would mean casting off the individuality.
Just as the first part in its lowest interpretation was thus intended to
produce the union of the higher and lower self, so in its second interpretation
it aims at the unity of the ego with the Monad; that which is the second interpretation
of the first part must be the first interpretation of the second part, since it
follows from the first. It would be well for us to bear that in mind; then here
and there we may be able to catch a glimpse of what must be the meaning of the
next interpretation higher still.
611.
Out of the
silence that is peace a resonant voice shall arise. And this voice will say: It
is not well; thou has reaped, now thou must sow. And knowing this voice to be
the silence itself thou wilt obey.
612.
Thou who art
now a disciple, able to stand, able to hear, able to see, able to speak, who
hast conquered desire and attained to self-knowledge, who hast seen thy soul in
its bloom and recognized it, and heard the Voice of the Silence – go thou to
the Hall of Learning and read what is written there for thee.
613.
That is the
introduction to this second part, written by the Venetian Master. First of all,
perhaps, one ought to refer to those opening words: “Out of the silence that is
peace a resonant voice shall arise. And knowing this voice to be the silence
itself thou wilt obey.” There has been much speculation among Theosophists as
to the exact meaning of the voice of the silence, but it is now generally
understood that the expression does not always mean the same thing. The silence
is always that which lies just above the point which the man has reached, and
the voice of the silence is the voice coming down to him from above, the voice
of the inner self, as we have already seen.1
1 Ante., pp.
62-3. 20
614.
In all cases this
voice which speaks from above is that which when heard must be obeyed, and to
the newly initiated man (if we take the lower interpretation), or to him who
has attained Adeptship (if we consider the higher interpretation), this voice
says that while he is resting in the enjoyment of this wonderful peace, it is
not well to rest too long. In the silence the man has remained in wonder at the
glory of all he has received by Initiation; he will rest in contemplation
awhile; he will spend some little time in studying everything in the new light
that has come to him. He is now recalled by the voice, which tells him that he
has reaped, and now he must sow again. Since the man has reached this level and
gained all that it means in knowledge and certainty and peace, he must try to
communicate these gifts to others. He must not rest satisfied with having
attained them himself.
615.
The Chohan goes
on to remind the student of his qualifications: “Thou art now a disciple, able
to stand, able to hear, able to see, able to speak.” And the explanation of the
Master is that to be able to stand is to have confidence. Now, the man has that
confidence because he knows. At the First Initiation the disciple has received
a definite touch with the buddhic plane. He has had experience in connection
with that, not necessarily of very long duration, but it has been definite, so
that he knows for himself that there is such a reality, and that life is one.
616.
Then comes a long
note by the Master Hilarion, and we can see at once from looking at that note
that He is dealing with the whole matter very differently in this second part.
Before, He gave us what we might call a general comment upon what was said;
here He explains practically every word of the text, so that evidently He
regards this as something much more difficult to understand, requiring explanation
rather than mere comment.
617.
He says to begin
with:
618.
To be able to
stand is to have confidence; to be able to hear is to have opened the doors of
the soul.
619.
The expression “doors
of the soul” reminds one of the Pali name given to the first qualification on
the probationary path, which is discrimination between the real and the unreal.
In Pali it is called manodwaravaj-jana, which means “the opening the doors of
the mind”.1 (1 Ante., Vol. I, Part
I, Ch. 2: Initiation and the Approach Thereto.) The man’s mind becomes open to the difference between the things
which are worth following and the things which are not, and so they say his
mind has opened its doors to receive the truth. At Initiation he has to open
more doors, those of the soul; in other words, he has to acquire buddhic
consciousness. Then for -the first time the man is really a soul, and is
looking at things from the point of view of a soul. Below that level there is
separation, due to matter, so even in the causal body he is still a long way from
the real meaning of existence as the soul looks at it. But with the realization
of buddhic consciousness the man is drawn into a condition which differs in
kind, not only in degree, from what has gone before. Therefore so much
importance is attached to it. Therefore it is made part of the First
Initiation, though it is quite open to us to attain that consciousness apart
from and before we reach Initiation.
620.
To be able to
see is to have attained perception.
621.
Although it is
true that the initiate directly sees considerably more than the ordinary man of
the physical world does, it is also true that from what he sees he can infer
very much more than can be easily told or accurately understood. Thoughtful men
have long been wondering and discussing and arguing as to whether or not God
exists. No trained clairvoyant ever argues that question, because he knows. I
do not mean to say that he sees God. “No man hath seen God at any time,” you
will read in the Christian Scriptures.1
(1 S. John, 1, 18.) That is
not quite true if you speak of the Solar Logos; but even so it is true for the
vast majority of students. But though most men have never seen electricity they
have plenty of proof that there is such a thing; that we have light, and that
our tram-cars are driven by its agency, proves to us that there is such a
force, though we have never seen it. Just in the same way the clairvoyant who
has never seen the solar Deity has yet seen sufficient evidence of His work to
prove that He must exist. That is our position with regard to many Theosophical
doctrines referring to higher matters. We do not always know directly, but we
see results.
622.
No one below the
rank of the Adept can see the Monad, but the Arhat may know of its existence.
On the nirvanic plane, which is that next below the habitat of the Monad, we
see a triple manifestation, which we call the triple spirit.1 (1 Ante, Vol. I, Part
V, Ch. 1: Liberation, Nirvana and Moksha. Vol. Ill, p. 212, 248.) The rays which make that threefold manifestation are
obviously converging as they rise to the highest point. We can see that they
must become one, though the actual unity is out of our sight. The phenomena
which we see with regard to them indicate that they can be only three facets of
one great body, or great light. So although we do not actually know by our own
sight that the Monad exists, we accept it on the evidence which we can utterly
trust – the testimony of our Masters – and the phenomena which we can see on
the highest plane we can reach demand that there shall be such a reality as
that.
623.
We have been told
by these Great Ones of certain things which as yet are out of our reach, but in
every case when we have taken an additional step we have been able to realize
more of those things which have been told. This has happened to us over and
over again. So although when one attains the level to which this text refers I do
not say that he will see the Logos, I do say he will see such evidence of His
existence as will make it quite impossible to doubt it. Seeing that/and also the
working of the evolutionary law, one gains absolute certainty that all is well.
624.
A little of the
higher sight does bring the certainty that all is well, and that is a very
great thing indeed. I suppose that until one reaches it he hardly knows what it
is – the absolute certainty that nothing can finally go wrong, that however
dark things, may seem it is only seeming, and presently the clouds will break
and the everlasting sunshine which has been there all the time will show
through once more.
625.
It is perhaps not
so hard with a little practice to think that all is going well for oneself. As
we go through life we meet with all sorts of troubles and difficulties, and
even apart from occultism the theosophically minded man soon comes to recognize
that it is not so much what happens to him that matters as his own attitude
towards the happening – that he can make himself very happy under circumstances
which would make many other people miserable. The reverse is also true; a man
may contrive to make himself unhappy amid circumstances which would make most
other people happy. So it may not be so difficult to come to believe that all
is working for good so far as oneself is concerned; but it is much harder to
believe it for those we love, if we see them getting into trouble, making
mistakes and suffering in various ways. It is much harder to believe that all
is being properly managed as regards them, because one naturally feels a
protective interest; one wants to shield them from these blows of karma.
626.
They say that
love is blind. It may perhaps blind one a little in that way. My own personal experience,
however, is the other way – that strong affection makes a person particularly
keen-eyed with regard to a fault, in order that one may help to get it out of
the way. The proverb is taken to mean that one does not see the faults of the
person loved; however that may be, when something of the sense of reality is
attained one of the great benefits that one gains from it is that he is then
quite sure, both for himself and for those whom he loves, that all things are
working together for good, and that the eventual result will in every case be
the best that could be gained. It is a great source of peace to have that
certainty.
627.
To be able to
speak is to have attained the power of helping others.
628.
It is significant
that He chooses speaking as the way in which we can most easily help others. It
is true for most of us. We can do various things on the physical plane in the
way of helping others, but perhaps the greatest help which we as Theosophists
can give to others is by speech, or writing, which is only another form of
speech. We can put before them what we know. Very few of us have direct
knowledge of these matters, but we have a certain interior conviction for which
we could not, if pressed back to the ultimate, give an actual reason. What
gives such tremendous power to what Dr. Besant says is that people feel when
she speaks that she is speaking of that which she knows. She has in addition
the most marvellous eloquence. One cannot hope to attain to that in a short
time, for eloquence is not a gift. It has been earned, by very hard work
continued through many lives. She has turned a great deal of her intellectual
power through many lives in the direction of speech. The result of such
practice is that she can do it well. I remember someone complimenting her on
her wonderful eloquence. She replied: “Well, I have been speaking in public for
twelve thousand years; I suppose I ought to know something about it by this
time.” It is exactly that practice that has given her such remarkable power,
and it is only by a commensurate amount of work that we can hope to gain it.
However, any of us, without that marvellous eloquence, can speak about the
things which we know, and our conviction will carry confidence to others.
629.
Just in so far as
we feel sure ourselves can we impart our conviction to others and be a real
help to them; therefore if it were for that reason alone it is worth while to
seek to attain that conviction. We should study more and more fully, and not be
satisfied with merely superficial views of Theosophical ideas; we need to live
into them. I know there are members of the Theosophical Society who have
belonged to it for twenty years and do not know any more now than the day they
joined. But I also know that a great many of the older members have gradually
lived into the teachings until these have become, as it were, part of
themselves and they are able to speak with certainty and indeed, to feel a
certainty which the newer students, however enthusiastic, do not readily
acquire. It remains true now, as it was in the days of old: “If any man will do
His will, he shall know of the doctrine, whether it be of God.”1 (1
S. John, 7, 17.) The only way to attain
certainty before one can see at all for oneself is to live as though it were
true. In doing that, evidences will gradually accumulate round one that this is
so, and though each one of those may perhaps seem small in itself, taken
together they will constitute a testimony which one cannot doubt or deny.
630.
To have
conquered desire is to have learned how to use and control the self; to have
attained to self-knowledge is to have retreated to the inner fortress whence
the personal man can be viewed with impartiality.
631.
The inner
fortress is, of course, the ego in this case. There is a further stage where
the inner fortress is the Monad, with which the ego must be unified. I have
already explained how the ego puts himself down into the personality. Let us
have it clearly in mind. The Monad puts down a ray of himself – that is about
as near a simile as we can find for it – into the nirvanic plane, the next
below his own. That breaks into three rays and becomes the triple atma, or
triple spirit, and the three aspects of that descend1 and manifest
on lower planes until it appears as atma-buddhi-manas, which taken together
make the ego. Now that ego is only a partial manifestation of the Monad, a
small fragment of him, as it were, but nevertheless it behaves as though it
were an entirely separate entity,, just as the ordinary person thinks of
himself as the separate entity, and is inclined to think of the soul as
something which floats vaguely over him, like a captive balloon.
632.
I believe that
all Theosophists who have not already done so, would do well to read Human
Personality by Prof. Myers, because it is a most remarkable exposition of
the relation between the higher and the lower, and it is especially interesting
to our members, because he began as a sceptic and ended by having to admit
apparitions, and in point of fact all that necessarily follows. I have seen him
often. He used to be with Madame Blavatsky a great deal. He was much impressed
by what she told him, but never got entire satisfaction. He was always seeking something
definite from his intellectual point of view, and that is what practically
cannot be given; it is at any rate overwhelmingly difficult to give in regard to
anything on higher planes. One cannot express the functions or powers or
conditions of the higher planes in terms of the lower at all. This is as
impossible as to give the contents of a cube in square measure. The difference
is precisely that kind of difference.
633.
Prof. Myers was
seeking the expression of the higher world in terms of the lower. We can approximate;
we can aim at it, and try to stimulate the intuition in our readers and
hearers, but we cannot tell it in so many words – not because we are told we
must not, but because it cannot be done. People must develop the higher
faculties in order to see on the higher planes. We may tell them all we can
about the astral world; when they reach that astral world in full
consciousness, they will say: “The half has not been told me.” That is true,
because it cannot be told. These higher things cannot really be known down
here, but at least partially to know them is already a very great comfort and
advantage. We may not fully understand, but we know enough to be sure there is
no need for fear and doubt, and that at least is a great and glorious benefit
which Theosophical study gives us.
634.
To have seen thy soul in its bloom is to have obtained
a momentary glimpse in thyself of the transfiguration which shall eventually
make thee more than man.
635.
When a man
reaches the buddhic consciousness he gains that wider insight which is more
than insight because it is also feeling. And it is so wonderful, something so
entirely new in the man’s experience, that the Master here refers to it again
and again in different ways, approaching it from different points of view. To
have the first glimpse of that which shall make thee more than man is to have
this first touch of the unity with the Logos, that is, with the God of the
solar system. But it must be remembered that at Initiation a man does not
attain the full buddhic consciousness, nor does he in any way develop a buddhic
vehicle.
636.
The pupil has already
practised himself in the development of the buddhic consciousness so that he
has usually had experiences at that level. But if he has not, his first
experience now takes place, and that is directly related to the fetters which
he is beginning to cast off. The first three which have to go are the delusion
of self, doubt and superstition. These are all dispelled by that glimpse. He
can have no delusion of separateness when he has recognized the unity. He can
no longer doubt the facts. He is told he must not doubt evolution, the great
law of karma, and the fact that the highest advance is to be attained by
holiness. It is assuredly true – the man cannot doubt those things. He can see
them in operation, and because he is standing there where many ways meet he
knows that there are many roads and that they all lead to the one Bliss; he can
no longer hold to the superstition that any one form of belief is necessary to
one who has attained that level. He stands upon the mountain peak and sees all
the roads which lead up to it, and sees that all are good. So great stress is
laid upon this buddhic experience; from any points of view it is the attainment
of “a glimpse of that which shall make thee more than man”.
637.
For one who has
attained Adeptship it means still very much more than that, because He has
definitely become One with a certain
manifestation of the Deity. As He shows Himself in that set of planes which all
taken together make the prakritic plane, the lowest of the great cosmic planes,
He shows Himself as Three and yet One, the Ever Blessed Trinity which is yet a glorious Unity.
638.
Again and again
we are told that we must keep these two ideas always in our minds when we think
of Him, that we must “neither confound the Persons nor divide the Substance”,
but must try as well as we may to grasp the idea of this great Mystery of the
Three who yet are One, which cannot be perfectly understood or explained. So
much importance has at all times and in almost all religions been attached to a
comprehension of that Mystery that it is clearly of great practical importance.
Many thousands of people have said that all such doctrines as these are merely
of theoretical value, that they make no difference in practical life. That is not
quite true. It is unquestionably a necessity that one should understand a
little of this at least. All of it we cannot grasp, but at least we should know
that there are these three lines of force, and yet that all the force is one
and the same; without knowing that we cannot grasp the method by which our
world came into existence nor can we understand man, because “God made man in His
own image” and man therefore has this same characteristic – that he is three
and yet one. Now the Three and the One in our cosmic prakritic plane show
themselves by an arrangement very similar to the atma-buddhi-manas in man – or,
it would be more correct to say that ours resembles That.
639.
We have the
highest Spirit on the highest of our planes, and then the second Aspect of that
Spirit which descends one plane – and so has within itself two qualities, that
on the higher plane and that on the lower. People speak of it as dual; in
Christianity we hear of Christ as God and man “, and in The Secret Doctrine we
read that “Father-Mother spin a web”.1 (l Op. cit., Vol. I.
pp. 59, 111.) That aspect is always two-sided:
it is equal to the Father as touching His Godhead, yet when it descends one
plane it is inferior to the Father as touching His Manhood. Yet these two are
not separate, but they make one Christ, and this Christ is one with the Father.
640.
Then there is the
Third Person of the Blessed Trinity. Descending to the second plane and standing
there level with the Son, and then descending one stage further and manifesting
in the higher part of what we sometimes call the nirvanic or atmic plane, still
beyond anything we can reach, He abides there. Then it will be seen that there
are three lines making all together a triangle. We have the horizontal line
which connects the three Aspects or Persons at their own level, then there is
the perpendicular of the triangle – but coming down in this case from what we
may call the base instead of going up to it – which links together the three
different states or aspects of the Three Persons; then there is the hypotenuse
of the triangle. Now that line, the hypotenuse of the triangle, the square of
which is equal to the sum of the squares on the other two sides, represents the
Deity. To us down below it represents the Three Persons as Persons, and yet
links them together into one.
641.
A man attains
Adeptship when he raises His ordinary consciousness to the nirvanic level, and
the very fact which differentiates Him and an Adept is that He has unified the
Monad with the ego. Since, then, He has become one with the Monad, He has
already reached the level of the third or lowest manifestation of the Deity.
Therefore that showers itself upon Him in the manner which is typified by the
description of Pentecost. After He has passed through the crucifixion and the resurrection
which typify the Arhat level, he has before him the ascension, and after the
ascension comes the descent of the Holy Ghost. In the symbol as it is given to
us the Christ ascended; and the Holy Ghost descended upon the apostles,
according to the story in which it is put before us, independently of the
Christ, and after He had left. But in the great Gnostic doctrine in the Pistis
Sophia it is said that Christ stayed eleven years after His ascension,
teaching His people, whence it will be seen that the descent of the Holy Ghost
took place not after but very decidedly during His presence with His church. It
must represent the attainment of Adeptship of all those who are typified as the
apostles (whoever they really may have been), because “tongues of fire sat upon
them”; a statement which points very closely to certain phenomena well known in
the East.
642.
Those who have
seen statues of the Lord Buddha or any of the great saints or deities of India
will have noticed that there is often a curious little double dome at the top
of the head. Very few have any conception of what it really means. There is at
the top of the head a certain chakra spoken of sometimes as “the
thousand-petalled lotus”. In the ordinary man it is a vortex or depression in
the etheric body, but when a man attains to a certain high level he is able to
turn that outward instead of inward, and make of it a mound instead of a
depression. That is what they are trying to represent when they depict the Lord
Buddha with that curious little double dome rising on the top of the head. That
would glow and would give much the impression of a flame of fire. So “tongues
of fire” is by no means a bad poetical description.
643.
The other strange
phenomenon which is described in connection with that descent, the fact that
they who spoke were heard by every man in his own tongue, is not, so far as we
know now, a necessary concomitant of Adeptship, but it does belong to a higher
stage. I myself have known one instance of this phenomenon. It would appear
that it descended upon those apostles at that time, if we are to take the
record as representing an historical fact.
644.
Clairvoyantly we
have not seen the apostles arranged in that way. It is not that there was no
such person as Peter, but there were many Peters. That was the title given to
the head of each church – petros, a rock upon which the church was built
– because the leader of the church was the rock upon which it arose. It is not
an inapt symbol; for we know how very often Theosophical Lodges and other
organizations depend upon one person in just that way. It would seem that in
the old days the same thing held good. There were those who could lead, and
where there is a leader there will always be followers. So his knowledge is the
rock on which that particular church is built. For the rest, we have not
investigated sufficiently closely to speak with precision, but one cannot but
doubt very much of this story, especially as Origen especially warned us not to
take it as history, and compared it with the story of Hagar and Ishmael, of
which it is written in the Bible: “Which things are an allegory”.1 (1
Galatians, 4. 24.) We obtain a much wider and
more useful view of all these things if we apply that idea to them, because, as
Origen puts it, “Whether these things happened in Judea or not, it is at least
certain that through all eternity they are happening in the lives of Christian
men,” and that is the important side of the occurrence, not the material event.
645.
Thus the Adept
becomes one in consciousness with the Third Person of the Blessed Trinity. That
must be something like the way in which, a whole plane lower, we find ourselves
attaining to unity of consciousness; we find that others seem part of ourselves
when we reach the full consciousness of that nirvanic level; all alike are then
seen as facets of the One.
646.
To recognize is
to achieve the great task of gazing upon the blazing light without dropping the
eyes, and not falling back in terror, as though before some ghastly phantom.
This happens to some, and so when the victory is all but won it is lost.
647.
It sounds very
strange that any at such a height should fall, and yet some do. Before that
level is reached all possibility of fear ought to have been entirely
transcended, but there are those who shrink from these magnificent developments
because they fear to lose their individuality. The same thing at a much lower
level confronts a man after death. There are many who cling intensely to
physical life, feeling certain of no other life than that. When the etheric
double, which is composed of physical matter, is drawn out from the dense body,
such a man, in his astral body, clings to the etheric counterpart, which still
surrounds him, instead of letting it dissipate as it should, and so he lays up
much trouble for himself. He lives in the “grey world”, as it is sometimes
called.
648.
We find the same
phenomenon at this higher level. The man through all his incarnations has had a
causal body; he identifies that causal body with his individuality, and shrinks
from losing it. The bliss and the infinite light of the buddhic plane loom
before him, but he can reach it only by dropping his causal body, and that
terrifies him sometimes. He is afraid that in losing that he will lose all, and
will be merged into that infinite light, so he falls back at the very
threshold. He fears the entire novelty of merging in union. He does not know
that when he has so merged he will still feel himself just as much as before,
and will feel not that the drop has been merged into the ocean but that the ocean
has been poured into the drop.
649.
Occasionally we
have other examples of that at lower levels. The man functioning in his mind
body is sometimes afraid to let it go and to sink back into the causal body,
which is no longer concrete, but abstract; so at that stage he halts and
hesitates, and fears to pass. The progress of the person in any of these cases
depends upon the power behind, the tremendous enthusiasm and devotion which is
carrying him through; since that is the propelling force, for the man to hesitate
means that that enthusiasm fails, since fear and enthusiasm of that kind cannot
exist together. The moment he allows himself to fear, by that very thought he
shrinks back and falls away, and has no longer the place which he had attained.
650.
There is a certain
justification for the shrinking back in some cases, and I think that the ground
for it is that if a man goes beyond the level at which he can be conscious he
falls into a trance and loses himself. In India men talk of going into samadhi.
We wondered what stage this could be, and identified it with various levels,
one after another, and then found that it was not constant. It took a long time
to discover that samadhi is a different thing for different people. It means
the condition just beyond the level where the man is capable of retaining
consciousness. For a savage whose consciousness is clear only on the physical
plane, the astral plane would be samadhi. For most of those of our race who
have not studied these matters, to enter into the causal body would be samadhi,
because they would not be sufficiently conscious for the experience to be of
any use to them. Many of us, if we could succeed in forcing ourselves into the
buddhic plane, would be unconscious at that level. That would mean that when we
presently drifted back into our lower vehicles, we should come back without any
definite additional knowledge. We should arrive with the sense of great bliss,
a sensation of having bathed in all sorts of intangible glories, but with no
definite knowledge and no new power of doing anything of use.
651.
This kind of
samadhi – a condition just beyond your consciousness – is not encouraged by our
Masters. Those Great Ones would say: “By all means attain the very highest
level you can reach, but do it consciously; work your way up gradually, do not
leap into it. Be careful; push steadily up, keeping your consciousness all the
time you do it.” There are possibilities which might be said to be dangerous;
nothing is actually dangerous, because at those higher levels one has not a
separate life to lose in the same way that one has down here, but it is quite
possible to be swept out of the line of evolution if one makes rash
experiments. Yet this is not probable for the ordinary student, because he is
working steadily away at levels which he knows, and aims at attaining.
652.
The fact of the
possibility of falling back – fearing to face the higher developments – was put
strongly before us in the initiations of the ancient Egyptian Mysteries. The
candidates were taught that in the pursuit of knowledge they must be neither
rash nor fearful; when the candidate was brought to the door of the crypt or
underground hall in which these great ceremonies were held he received a
practical lesson in that way, for, as he entered, a sword was held in front of
him touching his breast, to typify that he must not rush rashly forward in
search of those mysteries, and at the same time his conductor led him by means
of a rope thrown round his neck, so that if he had been frightened and rushed
backward he would have injured himself. Afterwards this was explained to him.
He was told that a man must have quiet confidence; he must never rush rashly
into something which he did not understand, nor on the other hand must he draw
back in fear when he encountered something which seemed terrible to him.
653.
Our great
founder, Madame Blavatsky herself, whom none could accuse of lack of courage,
who dressed as a man and fought under Garibaldi in 1864, told me that when she
was first taken into the presence of the Lord of the World, the One Initiator,
the great Spiritual King of the World, she fell upon her face and could not
look at Him, because of the tremendous power and majesty in His face. It does
not affect all candidates in at all the same way, but yet, if that were the
result on a person so entirely dauntless as Madame Blavatsky, one may
understand that it is no slight test to be brought face to face with the
representative of the Solar Logos on this planet; it is a tremendous
experience.
654.
Those who become
pupils of the Master will one day in due course be led by the Master up the
path which leads to Initiation, and then they must face the One Initiator, not
indeed at the first step, nor even at the second, but at the third and fourth.
But before that comes they will have had so many experiences on the way to it
that probably they will be to a great extent prepared; so had Madame Blavatsky,
yet what I have said is what she told me. Although I entirely agree with her
that that face is full of majesty and might – quite incredible power, beyond
anything that you can imagine of power – yet it is also so full of love that it
seems to me that one could not feel fear in His presence, nor I think did
Madame Blavatsky, but simply awe so great that she felt as though the light were
dazzling and not to be faced – she felt it too great for her.
655.
But what is
spoken of here is not the meeting with the One Initiator, but the meeting with
one’s own higher self – the entrance into that wider spiritual realm. Men do
shrink back from that, as I have said, because they fear that when they plunge
into that shining sea they may never come back again, that the individuality
may be lost. A man who thinks would know that many others have plunged into it
and have not been lost, but one does not always think at such moments, but acts
perhaps rather by instinct. One must endeavour so to arrange one’s instinctive
action that it will be reasonable and right action. We s must not
shrink back before the divine, whether it shows itself in ourselves or in any
other. It says here that some have done that; and so, when the victory was
almost won, it was lost. That would be sad. But we should not let ourselves be
deceived by the manner in which it is put.
656.
Often we are
warned that the higher a man rises the further he may fall. There are several
reasons for that. One is that he may misuse the divine force which has come to
him; the other is that he may fall into such a condition as to cause a leak in
the channel which is composed of a number of disciples, including himself. The
Great Ones send out a huge wave of force through such a channel, and cannot
recall it. If the channel becomes defective a great portion of the force may be
lost. It is not always a vast outpouring in one direction – sometimes some of
it goes in one way and some in another, to do different things – and only if
all the various people who form the channel stand firm in their special lines
is success assured. It would be a sad thing if one should fail, and so cause a
leakage, which would be very serious on account of the great pressure of the
force behind, and would result in a fall for that man. Again, for one to shrink
back from good work within one’s power through fear of the responsibility also
involves a fall.
657.
The further a man
climbs the further he may fall, if he falls to the bottom; it would be a very
sad thing that a man should fall back at this high point, but it is very
unlikely that one who had climbed so high would fall to the bottom. We must not
get the impression that a fall even such as is described in our text is fatal.
“Who mounts may fall, who falls will mount; the wheel goes round, unceasingly.”1 There is no fatal fall, because it is God’s will that
every man shall progress; therefore every man will do so, and it is only a question
of the rate at which he moves.
658. 1 The Light of Asia, Book the Eighth.
659.
For such a man to
lose his position would be a great waste of high opportunity, but it would not
throw him back to the beginning. It would mean that he must work deliberately
to develop within himself the consciousness of his own divinity, and learn to
trust it.
660.
That would not be
at all easy, of course, because a man who had lost control of himself at a critical
moment, who had lost his nerve, would find it difficult to regain it. In
climbing, if a man looks down and sees a great gulf below him, he will probably
become frightened and fall, but the man who has never been frightened would be
very likely to go on to the end and not have any fear whatever. The man who has
once lost his nerve through looking down will take a long time to go safely on
his way, but I do not want anyone to think that the man who falls will not
recover. It is a sad pity; he ought to have known better; one cannot help
seeing and saying that; but he will recover himself and go on again sooner or
later.
661.
It is very easy
to say that one should have perfect confidence in one’s divinity, but it is a
more difficult matter when one comes face to face with some of these great
trials; if there is a fall at least one may be sure that the work done still
counts, so there is no possibility of a fatal final fall. It is something like
failing for an examination on the physical plane. It means a good deal of
trouble, but the man still has all the knowledge he gained in working for the
examination. When he is able to try again he is tolerably certain to succeed.
662.
It sometimes
seems very sad when a man who is making good occult progress suddenly dies; one
is apt to say: “What a pity; if he had continued at that rate he would probably
have reached Initiation in this life.” But what happens is karma and is for the
best, and he will not lose what he has gained. The Self retains all it has
achieved. What it will have to do is to bring a fresh physical vehicle into subjection, but it will be very easy
for it to do so up to the point it has reached, and only after that the difficulties
will commence again.
663.
To hear the Voice of the Silence is to understand that
from within comes the only true guidance: to go to the Hall of Learning is to
enter the state in which learning becomes possible. Then will many words be
written there for thee, and written in fiery letters for thee
easily to read. For when the disciple is ready, the Master is ready also.
664.
We have already
seen that the ball of learning begins on the astral plane, the lowest plane
upon which you can learn anything practically with regard to the higher states.
That does not mean that there is nothing to be learnt on the higher levels, in
the heaven-world, for example; there is very much to be learnt, but for the
ordinary man the astral plane is his hall of learning, and when out of his
physical body in that astral world he will receive much of the teaching that
must be given to him. There are very many students who do not quite understand
what it means to be taken as a pupil by a Master. Some seem to expect that if
that great privilege came to them they would be constantly in receipt of
teaching from the Master, that He would especially instruct them with regard to
minute details of their progress. When the Master takes pupils on probation, it
means much more that He watches them in ordinary life than that He specially
teaches them anything. One main object, then, is to have the whole detail of
the pupil’s life and thoughts and feelings before Him, so that He may know
whether He can usefully take that pupil into the closer relationship. He must
know that before He takes a further step, otherwise it might cause Him a great deal of trouble, and it would
not be worth His while from the point of view of the work. While he is on
probation the pupil may be used as a channel for force – that often happens – but
it is only when the closer link is made that he is in constant communication with the Master, and even then he will
not necessarily know of the communication. He may feel sometimes that the force
is flowing through him, and a wonderful experience it is, a great privilege and
delight to be used for the dissemination of the Master’s force, but he will not
be instructed by the Master except on very rare occasions.
665.
In most cases an
elder pupil is appointed to look after the neophyte and to give him such instruction
as is necessary.1 In my
own case, Madame Blavatsky taught me very much on behalf of the Master, but I
was separated from her for some five years and sent out to India when she was
in Europe. Consequently, it was impossible for her, except by occasional
letters and on the astral plane sometimes, to give me any help. Therefore I was
put into the care of Swami T. Subba Row. He was an exceptionally patient
teacher as to all the detail, and so I was greatly helped by him.
666.
l Ante., Vol. II, p. 67, 103.
667.
In those days I
saw my own Master only occasionally, and even when I did see Him it was not
usually anything in the way of teaching that He gave me, but rather
instructions as to something He wanted me to do. But in process of doing the
work one gained a vast amount of knowledge and training. The attempt to do some
service, even without knowing how at first, shows one in what directions one is
lacking. One then sets to work to fill those gaps, so as to be able to do the
next piece of work better; and I think I may say for myself that it was in that
way that I learnt most of what came to me. I would invent a way somehow or
other to do the thing, and then see where the method might be improved, until I
came to know how to put into practice the higher methods such as Swami T. Subba
Row could give me. But it meant a great deal of hard work, of strain, and often
very slow development. Still, it had to be done and it was done, and I think that
is the way all pupils are trained. They will be given a piece of work to do and
in the doing of the work they will learn how to do greater work. But on this great
subject of the relation between Master and pupil I have written at length in The
Masters and the Path.
668.
Various
possibilities of learning open before the pupil. Many of them are equally open
to any of us on the astral plane if we choose to take advantage of them. We
sometimes go to lectures on the physical plane in order to learn something
about Theosophy, because some people learn more easily by having facts told to
them in that way, whereas other people learn more easily by taking a book and
reading on the subject. For those who like the spoken word there are always
lecturers in occultism.
669.
Some of those who
are workers and helpers in the astral world devote most of their time to that
branch of work. Our former Vice-President, Mr. A. P. Sinnett, used to take that
as his share of the astral plane duties. He did not as a rule plunge into the
ordinary work of the invisible helpers, but instead of that he had a department
of his own, and was always to be found giving instruction upon Theosophy to
anyone who in that vast astral world would care to listen. In that way he
brought many , people, both dead and living, into touch with these great
truths, for he happened to have a certain dogmatic method of stating his points
which many people found very useful and easy to follow.
CHAPTER
2
RULES 1 TO 4
670.
C.W.L. – In
the last chapter we considered what is really a preface to the second part of
the book, but now we come to the rules. Up to Rule 12 these are numbered in the
same manner as in Part I: Rules 1 to 3, 5 to 7, and 9 to 11 belong in sets of
three to the ancient palm-leaf manuscript, and Rules 4, 8 and 12 are comments
by the Chohan. Further on the numbering follows a different plan.
671.
In this chapter
we will take Rules 1 to 3, and I will divide up the comment of the Chohan,
which is Rule 4, into its three portions, and deal with them along with the
rules to which they apply.
672.
Stand aside
in the coming battle, and though thou fightest be not thou the warrior.
673.
He is
thyself. Yet thou art but finite and liable to error. He is eternal and is
sure. He is eternal truth. When once He has entered thee and become thy
Warrior, He will never utterly desert thee; and at the day of the great peace
He will become one with thee.
674.
The disciple must
fight. He must throw himself into the evolution that is going on around him. He
must struggle on the side of the spirit. Spirit is gradually learning to use
matter; having mastered it at a certain level it rises out of that to conquer a
higher plane of matter, and to learn to use that. It is in process of
dominating matter at all levels. This is going on all around as well as within
us; so we enlist ourselves in this struggle, to smooth the way of the
evolutionary forces.
675.
We must make the
personality stand aside in this strife for the progress of evolution; he must
not come into the fight at all. The personality must be used, because it is
only through that as an instrument that we can reach other people in the world,
but we must not let the personal self obtrude itself. On each of the planes of
personality one must get rid of the entanglement, while retaining the power. So
we withdraw ourselves gradually from the physical, astral and mental bodies and
yet retain the ability to function in them.
676.
The higher
interpretation of this aphorism applies when the personality has been set
aside, and the man is at one with the ego. Then he learns that the
individuality must be put aside, and looks for the consciousness of the Monad.
The Monad must be allowed to work through the ego.
677.
That the warrior
is eternal and sure may be taken as relatively true of the ego in relation to
the lower self. We may take it as absolutely true with regard to the Monad in
relation to the ego. The ego, as has been said, may often make mistakes at an
earlier stage, but he is far less likely to do so than is the personality. The
Monad makes no mistakes; but on the other hand, if one may venture to speak of
the Monad as though one understood him when really one does not, one might say
that the Monad’s knowledge of conditions down here would probably be somewhat
vague. His instinct cannot but be on the side of right, for he is divine. He is
eternal and is sure, as is said here, but it may be that the views taken both
by the Monad and the ego are often general, and in our efforts to apply them on
this plane we may make errors, because the whole purpose of descent into matter
is to gain the precision and accuracy which result from perfect acquaintance with
lower conditions. Since their evolution is not complete both the Monad and ego
have not yet this accurate knowledge. They are for us the guides; one must not
do other than obey them; but even these guides are themselves unfolding.
678.
On the higher
level the day of the great peace will be the attainment of nirvana. At the
lower level it means the unification of the lower and the higher self.
679.
2. Look for the Warrior, and let him fight in thee.
680.
Look for him, else in the fever and hurry of the fight
thou mayest pass him; and he will not know thee unless thou knowest him. If thy
cry reach his listening ear, then will he fight in thee, and fill the dull void
within. And if this is so, then canst thou go through the fight cool and
unwearied, standing aside and letting him battle for thee. Then it will be
impossible for thee to strike one blow amiss.
681.
That seems a
curious thing to say about the higher self, but it is true; he is raying out
splendidly, but indefinitely. Until one can see the ego in men one has no
conception of how great a being an ego really is, how infinitely wiser and
stronger than the incarnate entity. Still, there is no need for anyone to be
proud or conceited about the fact that he is a very fine person, a magnificent
person, at a much higher level,
for so is every other soul of man. Every one is in reality very much better
than he ever seems to be. The greatest saint can never fully express his ego;
he is always on that higher plane a still greater saint than he can ever be
down here. Therefore we must try to let this higher part of ourselves play
through us. This ego is far finer, far better than the personality, but he puts
forth the personality in order that he may evolve, to become himself more
nearly perfect. He requires that evolution, so we must not make the mistake of
regarding the ego as perfect; he is not. What he needs mainly for his evolution
is definiteness, accuracy. He is magnificent but, if we may venture to say so,
vague in his magnificence.
682.
He desires to
develop through that fragment of himself which is incarnated down here. He
knows how to descend, but until he is himself to some extent developed he does
not know how to guide the lower self. It is through the experiences of the
lower self down here that he will learn how to do the things which he desires. His
desire is evolution; he puts some of himself down, a tip of a finger, as it
were into lower planes; that finger tip learns definiteness, but when it
returns into him at the end of one short cycle of physical, astral, and mental
life, what it takes back is only, if one might put it materially, a small
amount of definiteness. Remember how the group soul has been gradually tinged by
the experience of the different animals.1
(1 See A
Textbook of Theosophy, Chap. IV, for an account of group souls. The subject
is too big to be explained here.) A lion, a cat
or a dog may go through certain experiences and acquire certain qualities which
may be very well marked in it as an individual. There may be enough of courage
to make a remarkably courageous animal of that one cat, dog or lion, but when
you put that amount into a group soul for a hundred there is only a hundredth
part for each, so it needs a great many lives directed along similar lines in
order that the quality may be strongly developed in the group soul as a whole.
683.
Though the ego is
an individual and is quite different from the group soul, yet in a way the same
thing is true of him. He develops accuracy in a personality, but when that goes
back into the ego the same amount has to be spread over the whole causal body.
The amount which was quite sufficient to make one personality very accurate,
when it goes into the ego is only a fractional part of his requirements. He may
need many lives to develop enough of the quality to make it prominent in the
next life, since the ego does not keep a particular piece of himself which is
to be the personality, but out of the whole mass of himself he puts down
something, yet not the same piece twice.
684.
A highly
developed ego, who has already acquired a great deal of accuracy, will
understand the personality, and will work through it intelligently and try to
make it an efficient instrument. But for the ordinary man of the world that is
not in the least so. Therefore the personality must call out to him and then
look for this influence. If the man down here, wanting to help in the Plan,
does this, the ego instantly responds, and immediately pours himself out
through the personality, who should then stand aside and let the warrior fight
in him.
685.
The ego has many
splendid possibilities, which only need awakening. That is one reason for the
great advance which is often made by a rough man who goes to war and perhaps
loses his life for his convictions, or in any case stands a very definite risk
of doing so. To do a big thing like that – to set an ideal above his personal
comfort, above the possibility, of frightful pain, above the possibility, nay,
even the probability, of death, wakens in the ego a very large response.
686.
I have heard
people argue somewhat against that. People have written to me saying: “You say
that a soldier gains spirituality, but how can that be, because the soldier
goes out inspired rather by hatred than by any noble feeling?” Even if it be
true that he has such a feeling against the enemy, if he has volunteered to
fight for what he considers the right, he does a big, noble and unselfish thing,
and that reacts on the ego and awakens it more than almost any other single
action would be likely to do. Sometimes in private life a man has an opportunity
for sacrifice which is greater than the risk of his life; he may, for example,
devote the whole of his time to the uncomplaining and unselfish service of
another, foregoing amusements and change, and watching by a sick bed, in a case
of chronic illness. Such sacrifices are greater even than the dramatic heroism
of the soldier. But they are only few, while in time of war many thousands go
forth and take the large opportunity. The man makes a wonderful effort of
self-sacrifice; then the ego is aroused, and he pours down in response a
splendid flood of devotion, capable of causing still more consistent sacrifice
in another life. An effort of courage is perhaps required; that evokes from the
ego a steady stream of courage, and so the man who loses his life shall find
it, as Christ said long ago. He who has lost his life in such a way as this has
certainly gained a much fuller life for his next incarnation, which will unquestionably
be a bigger personality. The ego will be able to put down more of his power,
and will also be much more able to direct the personality.
687.
Another way in
which “in the fever and hurry of the fight thou mayest pass him” becomes possible
when men are devoting themselves to good works^ and they permit the personality
to come up in them. It ought never to happen with students of occultism, but it
does. There is a vast amount of good work being done in the Theosophical
Society, and quite assuredly those who do it ought to be entirely above any
sort of personal feeling in regard to it; but often they are not. A person
feels: “This little bit of work is mine, and therefore it must take precedence
of other work. It is not that I am doing, it for j my own satisfaction and
therefore do not want to see anybody else doing it; but I want to do it because
I am quite sure they could not do it as well.” Such an attitude is full of personal
aggrandizement. To have any connection with work like ours develops a person, makes
his feelings keener, and ought to make his intellect brighter: the very fact
that it has this stimulating influence tends to accentuate the personality, but
that is no excuse for the folly of permitting it so to do.
688.
The same thing
occurs in other organizations. In my younger days as a priest I had a great
deal to do with church work of all sorts, including the training of choirs. The
people concerned in that work are all labouring directly for the church of God,
supposed to be
devoting themselves to something higher than the average man outside, yet I
think there is no other set of people among whom there is so much squabbling as
there is among church workers and choirs. No one who has had to train them but
will recognize that it is a fact. It is sad but true, and it ought not to be
so. Yet it occurs precisely because they have been working in connection with
something a little above the ordinary level, and in doing that the life in them
has been roused more than is usual.
689.
The disciple has
to take care that his personality does not come up in these good works, because
if it does he will lose sight of the higher guide. The ego can fight in him and
work through him only when he is devoted to the work, not to his personal share
or part in it. He may forget the higher self in a rush of personality, and then
he will not be in a condition to receive his help, to listen to a hint from
him; thus he may for the time shut himself off from the ego and lose the great
benefit of his help. The vagueness of the higher self, unless he is a developed
ego, would perhaps preclude him from indicating a particular line of work, but when
the personality, being more definite, has found the work, the ego can and does
pour himself down into it, and does enable him to do it in a much better manner
and in an altogether grander frame of mind than the personality could attain
unaided.
690.
But if thou
look not for him, if thou pass him by, then there is no safeguard for thee. Thy
brain will reel, thy heart grow uncertain, and in the dust of the battle-field
thy sight and senses will fail, and thou wilt not know thy friends from thy
enemies.
691.
All that is
described here does occur when the personality does not look for the higher
guidance. He does not know his friends from his enemies; he is carried away by
the swirl of passion, and under its influence will believe what is said by
someone who is not in the least a real friend. One sees that often in daily
life; if a person is excited or angry or jealous, he will listen to the
ridiculous gossip of those who call themselves friends but in reality are not
friends at all.
692.
A gossip, a
mischief-maker, is no one’s friend; he is the worst enemy to those to whom he
speaks. It is a very sad thing indeed for one who contacts a person of that
sort, and believes what is said by him. As soon as we hear a person beginning
to speak censoriously about someone else it is best to avoid him as soon as
possible, because we may be quite sure that we shall learn nothing of any good,
and also that the person who speaks wrongly about another to us will speak in
the same way about us to the next person whom he or she happens to meet.
Therefore it is better to have nothing whatever to do with these gossiping
people, and not to be in the least influenced by anything that they say. Often
when a person hears what they say he replies, “I do not believe it; I will not
pay attention to it,” but all the same he is somewhat affected by it; he lets
it recur to bis mind again and again, and wonders whether what was said could
have had any foundation in fact, instead of at once treating it with contempt,
which is the only reasonable attitude to take.
693.
When once one
knows a person well, one ought to be prepared to follow one’s own knowledge of
him, and not be swept away by what is said by others who may know him less.
There are among us different dispositions of all kinds, but broadly speaking
one cannot go wrong if one keeps to one’s own knowledge of what a person is and
thinks and does, until one sees quite clearly for oneself that that person has
in some way changed, and even then one must not take a single example. One must
wait and see, because often for the moment a person is changed by a little
ill-health, or sleeplessness, and then he says and does things that he would
not say or do under other circumstances. So one must not judge one’s friend
hastily by a single word or action, but must wait and see how things really are
with him.1 (1 Ante, Vol. I, Part
III, Ch. 5: Mind your own Business.) To
suppose him to be changed because somebody says he is, is absolutely unfair. When
you have a friend, stand by him and wait until he himself says something or
does something which supports this idea of what he is supposed to be thinking or
doing or saying; do not accept the evidence of other people who may be speaking
under some mistake, made by carelessness or because they do not like him.
694.
Just as a person
who allows himself to be swayed in that way comes not to know his friends from
his enemies and not to understand the facts at all, so also the very same
happens to the man who lets his personality dominate him. If jealousy seizes
upon him he becomes absolutely blinded. His normal senses are of no use to him;
he does not listen to them at all; he makes up his mind beforehand on every
subject and it is quite useless to try to turn him. It is very odd, and it is
sad to see how ready people are to believe evil of others. The evil may be refuted;
it may be clearly shown that there is no foundation for it; but still a certain
suspicion remains.
695.
All this should
not be so, but it comes partly from an excess of the development of the
particular part of ourselves in the evolution of which humanity is at present
engaged. The lower mind learns by discrimination, by distinguishing differences
between this thing and that, and therefore it always pounces first of all upon
differences. Therefore when a man comes into contact with a person whom he does
not know, with any idea which is unfamiliar to him, or with a book which he has
not seen before, the general tendency is to seize first upon the things he
does, not like, those which are different from the things to which he is
accustomed, and then magnify them out of all proportion. The reason for this is
that we have developed this discriminating faculty a little too much, or rather
we have not yet developed the counterbalancing buddhic faculty sufficiently. It
is very well to be able to discriminate. It is a necessity; but we ought to
have as well the spirit of synthesis, which sees likenesses as well as
differences.
696.
The teaching
given in this passage also appears very emphatically in The Bhagavad-Gita:
697.
Man,
musing on the objects of sense, conceiveth an attachment to these; from
attachment ariseth desire; from desire anger cometh forth; from anger
proceedeth delusion; from delusion confused memory; from confused memory the
destruction of .buddhi; from destruction of buddhi he perishes.1 1
Op. cit., II, 62-3.
698.
It is difficult,
I know, for us to realize how the Monad can be divine and yet at the same time
undeveloped, how he can be different at the end of his incarnation in the
individuality from what he was at the beginning. Let us take an analogy,
imperfect as it is. The human body is composed of millions upon millions of
cells. Those are human cells because they are part of the man, and yet if there
be any kind of evolution – and perhaps there is – by which the soul of the cell
can one day become the soul of a human being, surely one would not say that in
the end there had been no evolution, because the cell was human to begin with. That
simile may suggest how the Monad is part of the Logos, yet not unfolded. It is
not safe, I know, to make analogies of that kind from the lower to the higher,
and then press them to fit into every detail, because usually they will not. There
is a great occult saying: “As above, so below,” but the converse of that: “As
below, so above,” is true only with narrow and restricting limitations. I think
we may safely reason down, as the Hindus do, from what they are told
exists above, to what therefore they must find somewhere below, in a general
way. But it is not quite safe to reverse the process, because the arrangements
on the higher planes are obviously greater and wider, though we do not know the
ways in which they are so. We may often mislead ourselves if we say that
because a certain thing happens down here it must also happen up above.
Something which is an expression of the same law must happen up above, but it
may take some form which we should not recognize.
699.
The analogy of
the cells within the body is not quite a safe one to follow far, but there are
various points across which we come in our study which indicate that something
of that kind is taking place. We know that the ensouling life of all the lower
kingdoms becomes in its turn only a vehicle for a still higher life when man is
individualized. The causal body that we are using now was the soul of some
animal from which we individualized, so what is at one stage the ensouling life
may later on become a vehicle. Stated in that way, however, this truth needs reservations,
because although what is in man the causal body was all of the soul that could
be seen with regard to the animal and the plant, yet it is matter on a definite
level, and there must have been life from above, ensouling and vivifying that
matter, unseen. We must remember always that the energy, the spirit, we can
never really see, but only its manifestation in some form of matter. Let us
take this physical body as an example. What is it that is ensouling that? It is
the man in his astral body. That astral body we cannot see; therefore at this
stage it is to us the soul. If astral sight is developed we find that it in
turn is energized by something higher. That proves to be the mental body; and
that in turn is energized by the ego – and so it goes on, all the way up. What
to us appears the ensouling life is never the real spirit, but some
manifestation of it. When we get to the highest that we can, the bubbles of
koilon – in the true aether of space – to our present sight appear to be empty.
Of course they are not so, because there is in them something which has power
to hold the incredible force of the aether apart. Therefore very decidedly there
is something in that apparently empty space. At present we cannot see it, but
perhaps later developments may enable us to do so. Then what we see will not be
the ensouling spirit, but some higher form of matter through which that
ensouling spirit is manifesting. The higher force is never seen at all.
700.
3. Take his orders for battle, and obey them.
701.
Obey him, not as though he were a general, but as
though he were thyself, and his spoken words were the utterance of thy secret
desires; for he is thyself, yet infinitely wiser and stronger than thyself.
702.
We must learn
that whenever there is a conflict between the higher and the lower, we are the
higher. At first we do not feel definitely that it is ourself. Believing that
it is so from our teaching, we must act as though we felt it to be so, and then
very soon we shall find that it is true. Our danger is that we may identify
ourselves with the lower and forsake the higher.
CHAPTER
3
RULES 5 TO 8
703.
C.W.L. – Rules
5, 6, 7 and 8 fall into one of our familiar groups. I will divide Rule 8, which
consists of the comments by the Chohan, into the three portions appropriate to
each of the shorter rules, and deal with them along with those rules, as in the
last chapter. We have thus:
704.
5. Listen to the song of life.
705.
Life itself has speech and is never silent. And its
utterance is not, as you that are deaf may suppose, a cry: it is a song. Learn
from it that you are part of the harmony; learn from it to obey the laws of
harmony.
706.
On Aphorism 5 there
is also a long note by the Master Hilarion, which begins:
707.
Look for it, and listen to it, first
in your own heart. At first you may say, “It is not there; when I search I find
only discord.” Look deeper. If again you are disappointed, pause and look deeper
again. There is a natural melody, an obscure fount in every human heart. It may
be hidden over and utterly concealed and silenced – but it is there. At
the very base of your nature you will find faith, hope, and love.
708.
What is meant is
that underneath all life, and exhibited more or less according to the state of
development of each life, is the great force that moves all things. In
Christianity we have been taught to call it the will of God, or the love of
God, but people very often use these religious terms in a vague way, so that
they lose much of their reality and power. In popular religion there are
several of these expressions which have a certain historical or traditional
connotation, but really do not actually mean much to the people who use them. People
talk, for example, about the grace of God, but I think very often they have but
little idea of what they really mean. Again, when in church the Litany is
recited, people say: “Spare us, good Lord.” That is a most amazing and utterly illogical
and impossible sentence, but nobody ever seems to think of it. They say spare
us “and call Him “good Lord” at the same time – a contradiction in terms. A
good Lord would never need to be asked to spare anybody. To ask that is worse
than wrong, because it suggests evil in God. It is blasphemy even worse than that
of using His name in casual swearing, as people sometimes do in the streets,
though that is bad enough. They are attributing to Him human passions, and
malignity at that, and are asking Him not to exercise His malignity upon them.
709.
In the same way
people speak of the mercy of God. That again contains very much the same idea,
that He might do something quite dreadful to you, but instead He elects to show
mercy. Certainly all such phrases imply an utter misunderstanding of what the
word God means; it is the grandest, the finest word that exists; it means the
Good, and He who is good needs no entreaty to show mercy in a certain case, for
He is always so full of love that the idea of anything else but mercy would be
utterly unthinkable. God will certainly show love to all, irrespective of what
they do. I do not know how people think a loving father would be likely to
feel, if he found his children crawling to his feet and begging him to have
mercy upon them.
710.
We have that
difficulty to fight against when in Theosophy we try to talk about these higher
forces. Those of us who have come through the various churches and chapels
unfortunately have been accustomed to speak about such things freely, but to
think of them as being utterly vague and meaning nothing in particular. People
go to church and perhaps ask for the divine blessing, with a general idea that
God will look after them, or something of that kind. I am afraid it is a very
unscientific conception. What one ought to understand is that a church service
is a means intended to convey a perfectly definite force. This thing – the blessing
of God – is a force absolutely as definite as electricity, as real as the steam
that moves our trains, and it flows through the channels appointed for it,
through the priest or the Bishop. When he extends his hand a definite force
flows from it over the people. There is a very definite raying out of force,
which floods the whole church, and is received and appropriated by such people
as have made themselves ready to receive it. It is true that some may sit there
and not be influenced, but that is only because they have not in any way previously
prepared themselves.
711.
So when people talk
about the love and the grace of God they are usually thinking vaguely about things
which are in reality very definite forces. It is sometimes hard for us to rid
ourselves of this loose method of thought. It is not only those who have come
along the line of the churches who suffer from it, but also those who have not,
have lost something. Those who have come through this line have acquired
in the process certain attitudes and powers of comprehension which those who
have been free-thinkers have not so easily to hand. The orthodox church training
is on the whole a good training, except for its bigotry and narrowness, and for
the conception of God which it so often puts before its people. For the rest, the
ideas of serving God by worship and by praise, and of gathering together so to
worship Him, and to employ in that worship all such beauty as can be provided,
are fine and beautiful, and I think that it is quite possible for them to
co-exist with the widest and most liberal doctrine. They have not so co-existed
for many centuries now, unfortunately, except in the case of a very few people,
here and there. I have long believed that a church would sooner or later spring
up which would combine these things, and now we have it in the Liberal Catholic
Church. Those people who love the old church and her methods, her ritual and music,
and all the beauty and gentleness of holiness, are now able to have all that,
and yet at the same time to have with it a doctrine which is to all intents and
purposes Theosophy.
712.
So when in
Theosophy we use terms corresponding to those which are commonly used in this
vague way, we should understand that they are not cloudy or indefinite in any
sense. If I speak of giving to anyone the blessing of the Master I mean a
definite pouring out of a spiritual influence. It uses as its vehicle matter at
a higher level than the physical plane, in most cases, but nevertheless it
employs matter through which it influences the matter of the causal or mental
or astral body, as the case may be; so let us altogether divest our minds of
the least fragment of thought that this is a vague good influence which does
not mean anything much.
713.
This great force
that moves all things has another side to it, which is the law of sacrifice. Sacrifice
is a grand word, but people generally use it wrongly. They talk about making a
sacrifice when they give up something and it tears the heart to do so. If men
want to know what sacrifice really means in religion, they will have to wipe
that idea out of their minds. They must take an entirely new interpretation of
a word they have known all their lives. They may sometimes think that they now
hold the true interpretation and have set aside the other, when the shadow of
the old idea is still upon them, and it comes up and clouds the mind without
their being aware of it; only gradually will it fade away completely.
714.
The word “sacrifice”
comes from the Latin sacrificio – “I make holy”. To sacrifice a thing is
to offer it to God, thereby making it holy. The idea that when you offer it to
Him you take it away from yourself is a secondary meaning introduced into it;
if you want, as it is so often expressed in the Scriptures, to make yourself a
perfect sacrifice unto God, there must in that be no idea of giving up anything
at all. The truth is, though it sounds paradoxical, that as long as you feel
anything to be a sacrifice it is not really so; it is not made holy at all. You
are giving it but with a grudging hand. When you feel that you cannot do other
than pour yourself out, as it were,^ at the feet of God or of Christ in perfect
devotion; when you have no thought at all of giving up anything, because in the
very nature of things you could not, do otherwise from the way in which you
feel; when what you have within you makes it so that there is nothing else in
the whole world that you could do but yield utterly to Him; perhaps then you
are a perfect sacrifice. It is only when we have altogether forgotten the ideas
that are ordinarily connected with the word that we can make a true sacrifice. It
is a glorious word, but it does not mean to give up; it means to make holy.
715.
The Logos Himself
makes the greatest sacrifice of all, for He pours Himself down into matter. He
limits His power and sheds His glory; truly, “For us men and for our salvation
He came down from Heaven”. Those are beautiful words, but the meaning that is
attached to them in modern days is often far from that; it is often altogether
a degradation of the real idea. When understood, these ideas are seen to be
beautiful and glorious and entirely to be commended and admired – but we must
understand first. So the Christ makes of all sacrifices the greatest, and we,
in so far as we dedicate ourselves to His service, take part in that sacrifice
and make ourselves one with it. If one has once seen the reality behind, one
can do no other than this; but then the world would no longer think of it as a
sacrifice, because it would seem to be following one’s own will. Then the man
goes on working with the evolutionary force, but he has forgotten what he gave.
It is no longer a matter of giving up anything, but of having reached the true
realization of oneself, and of knowing what one is here for. The thought of the
Logos is such as that, and we must be like Him if we would truly sacrifice.
716.
Dr. Besant has
said that the fact that there is no religion in the world which is not full of
ideas of sacrifice shows that there is some great esoteric truth underlying it.
The Law of sacrifice has not been fully studied as yet, although a Master once
said that it is as important as those of reincarnation and karma.
717.
To see that
reality behind things is to listen to the song of life. The song of life is the
force which is all the time running under life. All the different movements in
nature have sound and colour as their expressions and accompaniments – there are
others of which we know nothing, but at least sound and colour are within our
experience. It is possible to learn to hear something of the harmony of nature
and to see something of its beauty and glory and order, and it is in that way
more than in any other that one may come to be quite certain that all things
are working together for good, and that the order which underlies this apparent
disorder is out of all proportion and in every way greater, more important,
more effective. The disorder is nothing but a slight disturbance, foam on the
surface; the real depth of the sea lies beneath, and that obeys the divine law
perfectly, even though on the surface that law may seem to be set at naught.
718.
It is important
for us to try, if we can, to sense the reality which lies behind, to feel that
which is incapable of being turned aside or disturbed in any way. It is a great
comfort, a great consolation, a great security, when once we can get into touch
with this, and feel absolutely sure that everything is marching steadily on its
way, and that therefore it does not matter what happens on the surface, because
it is at worst a small temporary annoyance, a little flutter. All the while we
are moving onwards towards unity with the One. We are all the time part of it;
we are moving towards the realization of that, and the One through us is
developing His manifestation of Himself.
719.
There is a song,
a great chord of harmony, as it were, always sounding beyond the worlds. In
classic days they spoke about the music of the spheres, the idea being that the
sun, the planets and the stars, moving in their courses, produce a mighty
harmony. In the Old Testament, too, we read that “The morning stars sang together,
and all the sons of God shouted for joy.”1 (1
Job, 38, 7.) Many people think of that as a
beautiful expression, but merely poetic symbolism. A common proverb speaks of
things as “too good to be true”; but everything good and beautiful must be
true, because it is good and beautiful. Wherever there is a fine idea, there is
a basis for it; one could not think it unless there were something
corresponding to it on the higher levels. All the highest and noblest and greatest
things are the divine thoughts; our thoughts are high and pure and true and
noble just in proportion as they reach up towards that. We must try to acquire
this idea – not as a poetical conception to play with, but as a real basic fact
– that above all and in all and at the heart of all there is always the
beautiful and the true. The ideas commonly put before us are man’s thoughts about
things; the realities behind things are God’s thoughts about them; as God is
greater than man so are His thoughts higher than our thoughts. Higher does not
mean more austere, or more unpractical, or more distant from ordinary life, but
greater, more beautiful, more glorious.
720.
We are listening
to the song of life whenever we try to find in everything that which is best
and most beautiful. All students of occultism must necessarily be optimists,
because they know that the facts far more than justify the most optimistic view
that we can possibly take. The truth behind is always grand. We misunderstand
it and fall short of it; that is not the fault of the truth, but of our lack of
comprehension. So in many ways – some of them small ways – in daily life we may
listen to this song of life, and when once we do come to hear it we shall not
entirely lose the sound again. It is to be heard on all the different planes;
even if we could hear the entirety of the song on one plane we should still have
only a very small part, one note. As we reach plane after plane we shall always
find more and more of its beauty and glory. The more one hears of it the more
perfect the harmony becomes. If one struck all the notes of an octave at once
one would not get harmony, but discord; but on the higher planes there is what I
can only describe in a somewhat paradoxical way – the possibility that the more
notes you are able to strike the more perfect is the harmony, because there all
things fit into one another in a way which down here one cannot in the least
degree suggest.; If part of a melody is in one key and part in another we get
an effect of disharmony. If we could imagine some kind of projection into space
in which each of 0these parts would work itself out in perfect
harmony within itself, and then a scheme in another direction in which those
parts would blend together, in which each of those harmonies would be one note,
it might give an idea of it; it is not possible to put it into words. But the
effect of it is that you can so project a number of keys, which here would be
discordant, that they make in higher worlds a perfect harmony.
721.
Much modern music
is less harmonious than the older music. It plunges into wild discords and
seeks thereby somehow to produce a finer harmony. It does not succeed in doing
so; but I believe that the people who are working at it are gaining glimpses of
this of which I have been speaking, and are trying to express it. They are
seeking for some method whereby discords will produce harmony. I do not think
it can be done on the physical plane; but I must confess I do not like these curious
later manifestations, and therefore I am probably far from understanding them.
The people who compose all this weird music are probably aiming at something
the astral and mental counterparts of which will not be discords but harmonies;
but at this level they produce an effect which is not harmonious. I suppose
those who have come to appreciate it have learned how to produce the effects in
their higher bodies, and so they like that queer and inharmonious sound.
722.
Many of the
curious modern manifestations of art, not only in music but also in painting,
are definitely struggling towards the future, and they are producing effects
beyond that which can be seen and heard. What can be seen and heard us very
unbeautiful in many cases, but I can well imagine that they are aiming at
something which will be very beautiful when the result is attained. One wishes
that it might be reasonably harmonious on all planes, so that even down here
the thing might be beautiful in itself for those who do not understand the
higher side!
723.
I have heard a
number of people say that one piece of music sounded much the same to them as
another. There are many of us who get a certain amount of vague pleasure from
music, but do not in any way understand it. There are others to whom a piece of music is not only
pleasing to the ear, but to whom it is as definite as speech in a lecture would
be, to whom it conveys a clear form, which they can see and appreciate. I have
heard great musicians speaking among themselves, and I therefore realize that
the thought-form with which a composer writes a certain piece of music can
quite definitely be conveyed to another roan. I met with such a case when I was
in Italy a few years ago. A man wrote a piece of music which was intended to
represent a fountain in a garden, and this fountain had three basins one above
the other. As he wrote his music describing this he had that thought-form in
his mind. I know the same thought-form was conveyed to another musician who had
never seen the fountain or the garden, and had no idea of what the music was
intended to portray; when he played it, it called up the exact picture before
him, so that he knew which parts referred to the different basins of the
fountain and which part was descriptive of the garden. I could see certain correspondences,
but until I had heard what it meant it did not call up the picture to me. That
is a higher musical development; when we are at the level when we can sense a
meaning like that in music, it will convey more than it does at present to most
of us. The same thing is true of a picture. Precisely what it conveys to one
differs from what is indicated to another. Some are like the man in Wordsworth’s
poem:
724.
A primrose by the
river’s brink
725.
A yellow primrose
was to him,
726.
And it was
nothing more.
727.
But to the poet
the primrose suggested a host of beautiful ideas. When this faculty is
definitely established we shall arrive at a condition of thinking in symbols.
The ego does that in his causal body; he thinks in symbols, not in concrete
things, and quite evidently one way of psychic unfoldment is along that line,
although it is very different from the more ordinary form of development.
728.
Many of the newer
forms of art, such as the futurist and cubist pictures – things which are like
nothing in heaven or earth, but may symbolize something at higher levels – are
at present in a transition stage; it is half done work. They always say that
children should not be allowed to see half done work. Some of us are only
children in this respect, so we do not appreciate it; but when it is completed
it may be a great success. The song of life is not one part, but a whole
orchestra; it is a vast number of melodies all run together, and it may be that
the votaries of the new art are reaching up towards another manifestation which
as yet we do not see.
729.
Great changes may
take place in art and music, as well as in religion, social reform and
politics, when the World-Teacher comes. We think habitually of Him as leading
us in religion only. I do not know why we should confine our ideas to that,
because surely there is a great deal of human evolution outside of actual
religious teaching. I do not mean that religious teaching ought not to permeate
our entire life; I think it should, but that very religion may manifest itself
in many different lines. It may therefore be that the Teacher will show us how
these things should be done, that He will inspire not only the priest, but also
the poet, the artist, the sculptor, the musician, and the scientist. When we
get a more modern presentation of religion, one more in harmony with the
particular stage of evolution which humanity has now reached, it may well be
that that new statement will give us a wonderful impulse along all these lines.
Very truly, His message will bring us nearer to the comprehension of the song
of life in all ways. It will show us more of the underlying glory, and beauty,
and harmony and order.
730.
It is important
to realize order. We are now passing through a democratic phase of things, in
connection with which it seems inevitable that there should be considerable manifestation
of disorder; some people, in fact, rather glory in disorder, call it
individualism, and say that every man must go his own way no matter what
happens to the rest. It is necessary that people should learn to be able
to go their own way; it is also necessary that, when they have done that, they
should also learn to subordinate their wills to the Divine Will. Having
developed the power to stand alone, and the powers to act and think, they must
learn to use them only in the right direction. One must have a will to
subordinate to the Divine Will. When a man has no will life is quite easy, because
he lets everything drift and trusts in “Providence”. The people who have
developed a will sometimes assert it against the Divine Will, and really it
seems better for their evolution that people should be strong enough thus to go
wrong in order that they may presently go right, because the people who have
not the will to do either good or evil are not likely to be particularly
useful, nor to go very far.1
1 Ante, Vol.
II, p, 131.
731.
To follow the
Divine Will is to listen to the song of life. The more we seek it the more we shall
discover it. As we reach plane after plane, we shall hear it more grandly and more
fully. It is said here that even now we may form some faint idea, may see some
dim reflection of the splendour of the whole, because this song of life is
within us, and if we look deep down we shall find it. We have the divine spirit,
the divine breath within us. It is crusted over by what we call our human
nature, and so the melody does not readily come through – the spark burns low. But
it is there, and that spark is never separate, as we thought it. It is always
part of the totality of the divine flame, and our duty is to make these lower
selves of ours lamps through which that can shine. There is always within us a
manifestation of the divine which is not soiled or in any way clouded by its
association with matter. If we can realize ourselves as that, matter will no
longer have any power over us; but to do that fully means a very high
development – perhaps even more than Adeptship. Always there is that
manifestation, absolutely unstained, unclouded, untouched; if we can realize even
a little our oneness with that, feel that that is “I”, we shall hear the song
of life always. However we may be surrounded by the struggle and clash of the
lower worlds, that song will always be sung within us; we shall do our work in
the outer world in utter peace and contentment, because we know that within is
the only real truth and all the rest is merely a temporary manifestation. Some
touch with our own higher consciousness or that of the Master is often the
beginning of the hearing of this melody; it brings a sense of that inner life,
of rejoicing, of bliss, of conquest, a feeling that you have been victorious in
a great struggle.
732.
The Master’s note
continues:
733.
He that
chooses evil refuses to look within himself, shuts his ears to the melody of
his heart, as he blinds his eyes to the light of his soul. He does this because
he finds it easier to live in desires. But underneath all life is the strong
current that cannot be checked; the great waters are there in reality. Find
them and you will perceive that none, not the most wretched of creatures, but
is a part of it, however he blind himself to the fact and build up for himself
a phantasmal outer form of horror.
734.
If a man chooses
evil it is because he refuses to look deep within himself. It is scarcely that
he chooses evil intentionally, but as he never goes deep down into himself at
all, he mistakes his astral vehicle for himself, and so lives in his desires,
following the lower path because he wants to satisfy them. It is because he
will not face the facts of life that he is working against the current of evolution.
Long after he has reached the point where he could change over to the higher
life he usually averts his face; it is too uncomfortable for him to realize
that he has gone far on the wrong road, that he will have to turn round and
face a great deal of hard work and trouble and sorrow, arising from the fact
that he has set up an impetus in the wrong direction. It may not seem to be a
very serious matter that there are many people in that state, but if a man
having those characteristics reaches a position in which he has it in his power
to do much good or much evil, he is in very great danger from the point of view
of occult progress.
735.
When one reads
passages like this, one thinks usually of a man who takes up black magic on a
grand scale, but it is equally true with regard to smaller matters. The man who
will not face facts is very liable to be led away into the easier but more
dangerous path. He will do what is easy, instead of what is right. We have to
see ourselves frankly as we are. The man who wilfully declines to do so has
probably reason to fear that if he did see himself face to face he might not
like the prospect. Still, it is possible to err in the opposite way; to fall into
a condition of morbid introspection is really a serious trouble and difficulty,
as we saw in studying At the feet of the Master.1 (1 Ante, Vol. I, Part
II, Ch. 5: Unselfishness and the Divine Life.) The
people who are always pulling themselves up by the roots to see how they are
growing do not make progress. The great thing is to make sure that you are set in
the right direction, that you are trying to work for good, and then go quietly
and steadily on and do the best you can. Do not worry about your own progress. It
is necessary, truly, that you should make progress, but the best progress is made
when you are not thinking of it, when you have lost all thought of yourself in
doing some good and useful work for others.1 (1 Ante,
pp. 55, 162.) Such advance as I have myself
been able to make in the course of the last forty-five years has come
absolutely and entirely from throwing myself into any work that had to be done,
and leaving the question of advancement to take care of itself.
736.
It is true that
the man who blinds himself to the fact that he is divine builds for himself a
form of horror. Our difficulty in dealing with him is that what we meet down
here is the form of horror and not the soul behind. Nevertheless, we have to
try to realize that that soul is there. I believe I have mentioned before that
I had a certain amount of experience as a lay helper in the Church in my younger
days in one of the worst parts of London. In the course of my experience there
I met with people who were perhaps as low and degraded as any one would be
likely to find in the world. They had no thought of gaining any sort of honest
or reputable livelihood. Their only idea of life was to steal and to commit
outrages of various kinds. They knew absolutely nothing more. Those who live
under better conditions have very little conception of life among the real
London poor. I have known five families living in one room – one in each corner
and one in the middle. They got on fairly well in a curious pigsty sort of way,
until the party in the middle took in a lodger, and then there was a fight. In the
newer countries there is scarcely anything resembling the slums of Britain. In
every race there are men more and less advanced, but in Britain we have
produced extreme conditions, because we have not always lived up to our powers
and responsibilities. In some cases we have massacred savage races, have
slaughtered them as wild beasts, have gone out to shoot them as men shoot game.
In many instances those who were so treated have in consequence incarnated in
our own race, and become slum-dwellers. Though they are given the opportunity
of a body of a superior race they are usually unable to take much advantage of
it, especially while their surroundings are so bad.
737.
When people are
living under conditions like that I do not think we can expect anything very
high in the way of morality, or humanity. These people, with a record of crime
behind them, with a heredity of crime from their fathers and mothers, and
living under terrible conditions such as I have described, nevertheless always
had some little spark of something better in them – a little kindness that they
would show towards a sick neighbour, to a child, to a dog. I remember one man
who was a very bad case indeed, and I think the only gleam of anything I saw of
good in him was that he had a strong affection for a dog, and would share his
last morsel with him. The divine spark exists in every one of those people, and
will show through when you least expect it. You know it’ is always there, and
that is something to work upon. If there should ever be a case where you cannot
find any trace of it, be sure all the same that it is there.
738.
While we should
always try to remember the glory that is behind a man, and that it will be in
evidence in some future life, we have yet to face the fact that the external presentment
at present is often very defective. We must try to help the divine spark to manifest,
though we shall find cases in which we can scarcely touch it. It is not given
to every one to find the way. We meet with persons for whom we cannot do very
much. We try; we do our best; it may not be the man’s karma that we should be
able to help him; it may not be our karma to be strong enough to find the way
in that particular case. In these affairs we must always remember the importance
of common sense, and must not permit ourselves to be swept away from that into
helplessness or despair on the one side, or into any kind of sentimentality
which will blind us to obvious facts on the other. It is often said that there
is only one step between the sublime and the ridiculous, and one may sometimes
make that which is noble and beautiful quite ridiculous by pursuing it too far,
or carrying it to an exaggerated length. There are many such instances and possibilities
in connection with our Theosophical teaching and work.
739.
The divine life
is in every one, but in many cases it may be showing itself but poorly and
dimly. We have then to deal with the matter as it stands. On the physical
plane, for our life as a community, we must have certain laws. Those who
offended against those laws, who become what is called habitual criminals, must
be dealt with in some way that will help both them and the community. I know
that some people carry the idea of the indwelling light so far that they say
the criminal ought not to be restrained. That seems to me to be foolish,
because we should then be delivering ourselves over into the hands of the
criminal, and life and order and progress would become impossible for thousands
of people whose opportunity of progress is very much better, who are far more
important for the progress of the world than that criminal.
740.
We must do no
wrong to our criminal. We should treat him as a case, as a sick man, rather
than as a wicked man, because the habitual criminal is a person who is mentally
defective. Clever he may be along certain lines, but he is certainly deficient
in other ways. He is unable to see the necessity for unselfishness and unity
and solidarity, otherwise he could not be the habitual criminal. Those who have
read the works of Prof. Lombroso will remember that, after a long series of experiments,
he came to the conclusion that all habitual criminals were defective in brain,
and that in all cases, clever though they may be, their brains weighed less
than the brains of normal men. He said that certain parts of the brain were not
yet in activity in them.
741.
The usual idea of
taking revenge upon the criminal is surely quite the wrong way to approach the matter.
It seems to me unworthy of a civilized body of people. We must protect
ourselves against the attacks of the criminal classes, but since they are also
men and brothers even though very much younger brothers, we should try in
protecting ourselves to help and educate them, not to be revenged upon them.
There is an idea that other crimes may be prevented by making an awful example
of one person.1 (1 Ante., Vol. I, Part
V, Ch. 4: Cruelty.) That is doing evil
that good may come; history shows that good does not come in that way.
742.
All these forms
of horror are phantasmagoric. They have no existence in the divine reality. They
say in China that evil is but a dark shadow of good. We have produced most of
the evil in the world because we have not worked in harmony with the divine
laws in this life or in past lives. If it were possible that we could all work
in harmony with them, evil would be eliminated. It was necessary that some free
will should be gained in order that we might learn how to use it, but quite naturally
and with no blame attached to anybody we have used our free will wrongly about
as often as rightly, and the consequence of that has been the introduction of
what we call evil into the world. But always it is a mere surface disturbance,
always in the deep waters behind are the great currents of the divine life, and
the evolution which the Logos has mapped out for us. Those are the permanent
realities of life. The other is only superficial, though to us it often seems
of tremendous importance and of very great power. In reality, as compared to
the rest, it is not at all a powerful thing. The great waters are not affected
by anything that we can see. In some mysterious way it is true that “Blindly
the wicked work the righteous will of heaven,” as Southey said. In that sense
it is that 1 say to you: All those beings among whom you struggle on are
fragments of the Divine. And so deceptive is the illusion in which you live
that it is hard to guess where you will first detect the sweet voice in the
hearts of others. But know that it is certainly within yourself. Look for it
there, and once having heard it, you will more readily recognize it around you.
743.
If we can look at
things from the point of view of the ego in the causal body, still more if we
can penetrate to the next plane, the buddhic, we shall see the real meaning of
all this. It is no longer one little part of .the lower side of it all that we
then see, but the whole thing; and we can realize what the proportion is, and
see how really small it is, how “The evil is null, is naught, is silence
implying sound.” That is truer than perhaps Browning knew when he wrote it.
Behind and beyond and above all the evil we may be very sure that the great
current is steadily flowing, that the song of life is to be heard, if we go
down deep enough to hear it, for the soul of things is sweet, and the heart of
being is celestial rest as the Lord Buddha told us long ago.
744.
We have to find
the way to God by the cultivation of the spark until it becomes a flame. It
will then burn away the walls that the individuality has built up, but in
destroying them it will not lose the strength and definiteness which it gained
in building and using them. So the power which it thus gains will enable it
eventually to act not as a spark, but as a sun radiating life and light through
a vast solar system, and then, indeed, man will have become as God.
745.
We may now
consider the Chohan’s comment on Rule 5:
746.
Life itself
has speech and is never silent. And its utterance is not, as you that are deaf
may suppose, a cry: it is a song. Learn from it that you are part of the
harmony; learn from it to obey the laws of the harmony.
747.
Down here on the
surface one sees plenty of confusion, of crying and sorrow and misery and
grasping and overreaching and ill-will, and one might well think that if one
could penetrate to the heart of life one would find it a cry for help, a cry of
misery; but it is not – one will find it is not a cry, but a song. Whatever the
spray on the surface may do, whatever currents and eddies may be seen here by
our outward eyes, the mighty current goes steadily on, and it is that which
counts, that which makes the mark.
748.
The cry for rest
and peace is often all that we can hear in the physical world. When we rise to
the higher planes we realize that the whole current of life which flows from
within is not uttering any cry for rest, but is singing a glorious song of
triumph as it flows steadily onward in the way which God has appointed for it.
You may learn from that song, as is said here – you are part of the harmony and
you may learn from it to obey the laws of the harmony. All this wonderful and
glorious universe is an expression of God’s will.; it moves steadily on as He
means it to move, and all that we have to do, if we would only understand it,
is to make ourselves an intelligent part of that movement, to see what it is
that He wants us to do, and then do it.
749.
There is no
difficulty and there never has been any difficulty in knowing what He wants us
to do, for religion in the world from the earliest times of which we have any
record has taught precisely this with regard to the actions of men. They have
had as ‘many forms of belief, and as many different names for things, as there
have been religions, but all of them are agreed as to what a man should do.
That is the important thing, and it is strange that people cannot be induced to
see that idea and to work with it. They all agree that the good man is the man
of generous heart, the unselfish man, the kindly man who does not oppress
others but tries in all ways to help them on their way – the man who is
charitable to the poor, who will give food to the hungry and drink to the
thirsty and clothes to those who are naked, and will visit those who are sick
and in prison. These are the things of which Christ is reported to have spoken
as deciding the fates of men.1
(1 S. Matthew, 25,
35-40.) In Buddhism, the last of the
religions-founded by His great predecessor, the Lord Gautama Buddha, you will
find exactly the same virtues laid down. When the present World-Teacher came to
us in His incarnation as Shri Krishna He preached the same doctrine. There is a
variation in certain outward forms and names which do not matter, but the
teaching itself has ever been the same. Yet although men have always been told,
have always known what was God’s will, it is very hard to get them to do it.
750.
We read much of
the simple life; the simplest lives of all 1 suppose were led by the hermits of
old, are led even today in India by people who go forth into the jungle absolutely
without anything, and devote themselves entirely to following the higher life.
I am well aware that that often deteriorates some of them, and those who are
supposed to be devoting themselves to the higher life are sometimes in reality
not yet able fully to do so, are not yet at the level where they can spend a
whole life in meditation. Thus there are yogis who have caused yoga to be
criticized, and hermits who have brought disgrace upon the religion for which
they are working. Still, the fact remains that the highest and simplest life of
all is in reality the fullest life – the life which is lived wholly upon higher
planes.
751.
That is not for
all; most of us are on the line of karma yoga, or active service; our business
is to work for the benefit of the world on the physical plane. The man who
retires from the world should be working for it far more decidedly and
strongly, but at the higher level. He does not retire to meditate in a jungle
or a cave merely because he wants to get away from the rest of the world and
save his own soul more easily in that way. He goes because, being already a
soul which is saved, radiant, rejoicing, strong, a spiritual power, he feels
that he can do greater work on higher planes than he could in a city, amid
interferences from the physical plane.1
1 Ante., Vol.
I, Part V, Ch. 2: Love in Daily Life; Ch. 6: Service; Vol. Ill,
p. 74.
752.
Sometimes men
have retired to the jungle merely to avoid the responsibilities and
difficulties of worldly duty; but the man who has transcended worldly duty will
find that it will fade away from him, and when the way thus opens up for him,
he may permit himself to try the higher life of the sannyasi or monk. Yet even
then in this period of the world’s history that monastic life does not seem to
be the way generally indicated. There is so much to do in the world that at
least we must fulfil all our duties there before we may feel ourselves at
liberty to retire from it and leave that work to others. It may be that when
the great World-Teacher comes He will choose those who are to work upon these
different lines. It may well be that among those who are young some may be chosen
to lead the life of the monk. We do not know; but it is quite certain that He
will need loving, active, willing helpers on the physical plane. For the moment
let us do that work, because that comes to our hand to do. If when He comes He
chooses to draw some of us away to do some higher work, then He will give us
the power to do it, but for the moment let us do that, which is obviously our
duty, and do it with all our might as unto the Lord and not unto men.
753.
6. Store in your memory the melody you
hear.
754.
Only fragments of the great song come to your ears
while yet you are but man. But if you listen to it, remember it faithfully, so
that none which has reached you is lost, and endeavour to learn from it
the meaning of the mystery which surrounds you. In time
you will need no teacher. For as the individual has voice, so has that in which
the individual exists.
755.
If you listen you
will hear the great song sometimes; then remember it and never forget what you
have heard, so that nothing that has reached you may be lost; in that way, by
piecing together the fragments of the great song you may gradually learn from
it the meaning of the mystery that surrounds you.
756.
Life is a mystery
to those who do not see it as a whole, and none of us can see it fully until we
become one with the Logos of the system, the Logos of whom all this life is the
expression. Only He can see it fully. We, as minute fragments (I know that is
not philosophical, but it comes nearer to the fact than any other expression, I
think), as tiny parts, of His consciousness, may identify ourselves to a
greater or less extent with that great consciousness. And just in proportion as
we do so shall we be able to see this, to sense it, to know it. Each one of us
who is trying to hear the song of life is trying to piece together the
fragments which he sees here and there.
757.
Probably the
whole of nature is the expression of something which is simple; a very few
simple forces under different conditions account for all we see around us; but
we are not yet in a position to see exactly what these forces are and how the
conditions work.1 (1
Ante, p. 162-3.) It seems at first strange,
therefore, that the further we inquire in a scientific way into nature the
greater is the complexity we find. You put on higher and higher powers to your
microscope, for example, and you find that what seemed only a simple little
speck is in reality a wonderfully complex organism. Until recently chemists
used to think of an element, such as gold or iron, as a simple thing, but years
ago, by clairvoyant sight, which goes far beyond the power of the microscope,
we saw that it was a most complex object. We saw, for example, that what is
commonly called a chemical atom of gold contains three thousand five hundred
and forty-six of the ultimate physical atoms, and that they are moving in
groups round their own centre of gravity in close imitation of the solar
system.
758.
So it would
appear that the more deeply we investigate the more complex we find everything.
Yet ultimately that is not true, because if we go further and further still we
at last find that all is built of bubbles in koilon – built of nothing – and
the whole material universe is in a way an illusion. Indeed, the Indian
books told us this, long ago – that there is an ultimate simplicity behind all
the complexity. We cannot speak with certainty because as yet we have not seen
it, but it seems so probable that we may almost take it as a certainty that
that same rule will hold good everywhere: that while the complexities are quite
infinitely greater than we have thought them to be, yet behind all that lies
absolute simplicity.
759.
7. Learn from it the lesson of harmony.
760.
You can
stand upright now, firm as a rock amid the turmoil, obeying the Warrior who is thyself and thy king. Unconcerned in the battle save to do his bidding,
having no longer any care as to the result of the battle, for one thing only is
important, that the Warrior shall win, and you know he is incapable of defeat –
standing thus, cool and awakened, use the hearing you have acquired by pain and
by the destruction of pain.
761.
The great
Venetian Master is describing here the state at which the man ought to have
arrived when the higher self is the warrior, the one who fights. When the man
recognizes that he is that warrior in truth, that he is that higher self, and
that it is divine and within the Logos, then he becomes unconcerned as to the battle of life, except to do
the bidding of that higher self.
762.
At first in our
struggle in the world, in our endeavour to do our work and fulfil our duties,
we are very much concerned about the result. We feel that unless we are able to
work for it the right will not win. The right will always win in the end. It
would be sad that any one of us should fail to do his part towards securing
that end, but we may be-sure that whatever is done the right must eventually triumph,
and so long as we do the bidding of the higher self, so long as we are making
our utmost effort, the fact that that utmost effort appears to fail should not
trouble or concern us. But we must be very sure that we are making the utmost
effort and that we are not using the certainty that the right will win as
an excuse for laziness.
763.
Thousands of
people said with regard to the great war: “O well, the right will win; why
should we do anything?” Yes, the right did win; but it was a very sad thing for
those who, having had the opportunity to help, deliberately refused. On them
lies the karma of a great opportunity lost, and also the karma of all the
additional evil that happened because of the delay. If more people had come
forward boldly and been willing to sacrifice themselves the right would have
won much sooner and many lives would have been saved. Those who hung back were
responsible for the lives of the additional people who had to die. I suppose
there are many people, though it seems hard to believe it, who would rather
send someone else to die for them than die themselves. It is a low stage in
evolution, but there are those, apparently.
764.
It is absolutely
certain that in the great struggle of life the right will win, and also that
all will evolve to perfection some day, somehow, not perhaps in this chain of
worlds but in some other. Yet those who take that as an excuse for laziness,
and say: “All will come out well; I need not exert myself; the ego will fight
somewhere on some higher level; it does not matter what I, as a personality,
do,” will be making very sad karma for themselves, because they are delaying
the final triumph of good in this cycle of evolution.
765.
There is a great
difference between knowing that the warrior within you must win, and the stage
before that when you do not know for certain. In the latter case you feel only
vaguely that he must win, and you are very much concerned about your part in
the battle; this is a necessary stage, even though it is a mistake. But he who
certainly knows attains to perfect calm even in the midst of failure – not the
calm of inactivity, but of the divine will in the higher self. From the point
of view of the great consummation no one’s work is insignificant. All the
little efforts taken together make the mighty whole, but yet each man’s part in
it is so small a part that he must not be unduly proud with regard to it. The
right must win, but the question is whether we are going to form part of this
conquering host now or whether we are to be one of those who are to be left. We
must be among either the lifters or the lifted; each man must be one of those
who are working for the world, or one of those for whom the work is being done.
766.
The real Self
will win; it is incapable of defeat. When the personality is thrown off and the
warrior within the man fights he must win; when you have identified yourself
fully with him, you stand cool and awakened, and you watch the contest in which
you are taking part precisely as though you were not taking part in it. You try
through it all to listen to that song of life; you use that hearing which you
have acquired by pain and by the destruction of pain. So long as you have the
pain, and feel it as such, you are still fighting, you are only on the way; but
by the destruction of that you come into that state in which you have another
sense, as it were, which enables you to hear and to see all the while what it
is that lies behind. Amidst all the turmoil and the strife you hear the song of
life; amidst the wild confusion you see the mighty current. You have come to
know that this pain is only a temporary thing; you pass beyond it so that it is
no longer woe to you; it is no longer suffering. You know its meaning, and its
power to hurt you is therefore dead.
CHAPTER
4
RULES 9 TO 12
767.
C.W.L. – We
come now to the group of Rules 9 to 12. Once more we may put together each of
the short rules with that portion of the Chohan’s comment which goes with it.
768.
9. Regard
earnestly all the life that surrounds you.
769.
Regard the
constantly changing and moving life which surrounds you, for it is formed by
the hearts of men; and as you learn to understand their constitution and
meaning, you will by degrees be able to read the larger word of life.
770.
Most people spend
their time regarding not the life but the form which surrounds them. They do
not dwell to any extent upon the thought of the indwelling life. That is why
they can be so rough and careless about vegetation, cutting down beautiful
trees, and turning a delightful country-side into a dreadful manufacturing
centre or an ugly city, without a thought for the preservation of as much natural
beauty as possible at the same time. That is also why they can be so incredibly
callous in their dealings with our younger brothers of the animal kingdom, and
even with one another.
771.
It is also the
reason why the evil in the world weighs so heavily upon the feelings of the
better kind of people. If they looked beneath the surface of things and saw
what is happening to the indwelling life, and how even the most distressing
events are used to assist the life on its road to divine happiness, they would
be less troubled. The disciple must turn his attention to the life in everything.
The first thing to recognize in all life is that it is an expression of the
Logos Himself. It is true that in much of the life around us we find many
things that are repellant, things which we know as evil, and yet they too bear
their part in the progress of the world, and because of that we may look
everywhere for the manifestation of the Deity Himself.
772.
There is always
some human good in every person, except, perhaps, in the case of a personality
that has definitely broken away from the higher self. That is a thing which
sometimes happens, though very rarely indeed. It sounds dreadful, and so it is,
but it has been grossly exaggerated. The idea of what used to be called the lost
soul was harped upon a great deal in early Theosophical literature, and two or
three statements referring to quite different conditions were sometimes all
taken together, and the mixture mislead a number of people, making them think
that lost souls were quite numerous.
773.
There is a
certain set of people in the world who are intensely attracted to anything
gruesome; they always want to make the worst of anything and everything. This
is quite strongly marked in the lower classes in England. One would judge from
the fare that is provided by the newspapers that it is common also elsewhere.
If they have bad news to tell, they seem to take a delight in telling it as
vividly as possible, and adding numerous gruesome details to the tale. I
suppose many people possess that temperament in varying degrees, and it is not
confined to the lower classes, though it comes out very crudely in them.
774.
I believe that we
had in the Theosophical Society some people who were somewhat of that temperament,
and they picked out very carefully all the references to subjects of this sort,
to the eighth sphere and the possible loss of the soul, and wove out of them
all a terrible story. Then they confused with that the remark of Madame
Blavatsky’s that we are elbowing lost souls by millions every day in the
street. That is a statement which in any case would require a certain amount of
modification. To elbow a million people would take one rather more than a day. It
is not an idea which can be taken literally, but is a picturesque way of speaking
of the two-fifths of humanity who will drop out of our evolution in the middle
of the fifth round. They can be described as lost souls only as distinguished
from those who will pass on safely.
775.
They will be lost
to this particular chain of worlds, but as has been explained, there is no eternal
punishment for them; they will rest in drowsy contentment and be quite happy
because they do not know anything better. They are not in the least to be
pitied, unless it be because they will have another long cycle of lives to live
in the next chain of worlds, and that is tiresome, as we all know. For those to
whom it comes it is the best thing – far better and easier and pleasanter than
it would be for them to remain in our evolution, when they are not fitted for
it, and thus to be pushed on at the cost of very considerable strain, which
would probably eventually break them down altogether. They have not wasted
their time, because all that they have learned and acquired in this particular
chain of worlds will stand to their credit and there is some progress for them
in their interchain devachan. They will therefore take a high place in the next
chain of worlds, because they will begin in advance of the new egos of that
chain.
776.
Those, then, are
the millions whom we jostle. That has nothing to do with the isolated cases in
which the personality breaks away from the individuality. That is a dreadful
thing, but it is very much better to regard it not as a colossal catastrophe,
but only as an exaggerated case of something that is constantly happening, for,
as I have explained,1 (1 Ante., Vol. II, p.
284.) at the end of each incarnation something
is usually lost, though much may also have been gained. The loss of an entire
personality would imply a life of most dreadful evil. Even then the ego does no
evil intentionally, but he sometimes lets his personality get out of hand. He
is responsible for that; he should not have allowed it; though that for which
he is responsible is weakness rather than direct evil. Still, the ego of the
man is going on. It has fallen back very terribly, but it does start afresh;
though perhaps not immediately, because it seems to be stunned at first. After
such an experience an ego would always be peculiar. He would always be
dissatisfied, and would have recollections of something higher and greater
which now he could not reach. It is a fearful condition, but still the man who
casts himself so far back as that has to take the karma of it, and realize
ultimately that he has brought it upon himself.
777.
I do not know for
certain what further possibilities of loss there may have been in earlier days
of the world’s history. As things stand now it seems quite certain that the
very worst that can happen to any ego is that he shall lose the whole of one
personality. That is a serious matter indeed, and might throw him back from a
fairly advanced civilization into almost a savage condition, but it could not
now throw him back into the animal world. I am not prepared to say that there
may not have been a time when it could have done even that, but it is not
possible now, so far as we can see.
778.
It is not so very
long ago, as occultists consider time, since a great many of our present
humanity left the animal state. When the time of the shutting of the door from
the animal to the human kingdom was drawing near, a great effort was made to
get as many through as possible, to give the very last chance to every one. The
Lords of the Flame came down from Venus expressly to stimulate things just at
that period or a little before it, and all the efforts that were put forth then
were chiefly with that aim in view, to give the opportunity to as many as
possible to make the change from the animal to the human kingdom before the
door was finally closed. Just as in infinitely smaller matters people make a
special effort, when there is a big chance opening before them, whether it be
to go to a bargain sale at a shop, or to pass an examination, so there seems to
have been something of the same kind on an infinitely vaster scale, at the time
of the last opportunity of leaving the animal kingdom and entering into the
human in this particular incarnation of our chain of worlds.
779.
There must then
have been many who were not so very much above the animal kingdom, who only
just scraped through. Several hundred of the incarnations of such people must
have been spent in quite the lowest kind of savage condition, and with hardly
any interval between them; they were practically in physical life all the time
and only very gradually developed any astral possibilities. There may have been
some of those who might almost as well not have got through, and at least such
as those will be practically certain to drop out in the middle of the fifth
round. Still they will have had a considerable experience of human life – from
the middle of the fourth to the middle of the fifth round – so in the next
chain of worlds they will come in not quite at the beginning. They will have
passed through the primary classes and will be able to start again as very
decent savages. People as low as they could not do anything to throw themselves
very far back in evolution. They have not the power to make much progress,
their advance must necessarily be slow; but on the other hand they have so
little brain power that they could not throw themselves very far back.
780.
Much is said in
some ancient scriptures about people sinking back into the animal kingdom. We have
no direct evidence of any cases. There are other ways in which men may come
into touch with animal consciousness and suffer very terribly through it, as I
have explained in The Inner Life,1 (1
Op. cit.. Vol. II, Section 1.) but to reincarnate as an animal
is not possible now. We are now too far removed from the dividing line to be
able to throw ourselves back across it, whatever may have been possible in the
distant past. Not even the most determined black magicians can do it. We saw
something of those beings in activity during the great war, because some of the
Lords of the Dark Face of Atlantis came back into incarnation. That accounted
for many of the horrors that took place. The karma which those people made for
themselves was unquestionably ghastly. I have once or twice seen glimpses of
the future karma of people who were much less guilty than some of those; it is
a sight one does not forget – a hideous nightmare. There are people far short
of these great meteors of crime who yet lay up for themselves futures of horror
– those who beat children, and those who vivisect animals. At their future one
looks with a shudder; but these are far worse. These have done the same thing
on a colossal scale, and for insane selfishness have sacrificed half a world. Yet
they do not become animals. In those rare cases in which a personality has
broken away, it lives a life somewhat like that of Margrave in Bulwer Lytton’s A
Strange Story – the absolutely selfish man, without conscience, without a
soul behind to guide him. He will be a terribly evil man, and may carry on his
evil to a second incarnation. It was stated by Madame Blavatsky that such a personality
may in some cases take another incarnation by seizing upon a baby body; there
is no body provided for him, but he may seize upon that of some child who has
just died, and revivify it and live in it, and so gain a second life. She spoke
very little of these subjects, but when she did allude to them it was with a
lively horror impressive to see. It was clear to us who heard her that she had
herself at some time been brought into contact with cases of this kind, because
she shrank from speaking of them at all.
781.
We understood
from what she said that a second human reincarnation for such a thing was not
possible, but that it might happen that this decaying personality, which still
had a certain amount of the ego torn away and vivifying it, might then descend
into the animal kingdom. She told us once a very ghastly story indeed of the
way in which such a thing, still consciousness, might drift backwards in what
she called devolution. She said, I remember, that some snakes were inhabited by
such entities as these, and that some of these things were conscious that they
had once been human. It is a horrible thing: it sounds a kind of nightmare, but
we may be comforted by the fact that it is an exceptionally rare thing, that
such a condition could be reached only by a determined devotion of life after
life to positive evil.
782.
We have only a
sprinkling of really wicked people in the world, and even they mostly excuse
themselves in some way. The burglar who steals your plate has generally some theory
that property is improperly distributed, and that he is only taking the share
which the Government or someone else ought to have given him, that he is taking
it from somebody who is unfairly in possession of a quantity of wealth which
really ought to be distributed to all. People very rarely do a wrong thing
knowing it to be wrong. They always excuse themselves in some way. They may see
afterwards that the excuse was rather flimsy, but I believe that at the time
when a man does the wrong thing he practically always justifies himself somehow.
Much more than that is needed in order to attain to the horrors of being a lost
soul. The man must devote himself quite definitely and intentionally to doing evil,
must set himself against the current of evolution.
783.
Such hideous
possibilities are becoming rarer; humanity is making progress and gaining more
and more knowledge, and it becomes less and less possible as time goes on for
people of the dark side to obtain recruits. Even now they are really relics of
the past. We have heard much of vampires and were-wolves; such creatures did
exist and still are occasionally found. I have seen examples of both, but do
not expect to see any more. It is becoming less possible that men should be
able to sink into those depths. Instead of becoming vampires people now fall
into the grey world; that is a condition which we have apparently, introduced
instead of vampirism. It is better, certainly, though it is bad enough.
784.
Life in the grey world
after death is due to the entanglement of the astral body with the etheric
double.1 (1 Ante, p. 321.) There are people who have no clear belief in life
beyond death, who yet hunger for continued existence. They would vaguely tell
you that they believed in an after-state, but it amounts in reality to a very
strong doubt. As no life but the physical means anything to them, they cling desperately
to the physical body; so much so that after death the etheric matter cannot be fully
drawn away from the dense physical matter, as it is in normal cases. Then you
have a person for quite a long time after death in a condition which is neither
one world nor the other. He retains an amount of etheric matter which prevents
him from using his astral senses fully, so that he does not, as he should, slip
into the astral world, and on the other hand he cannot keep hold of the
physical world, because he has lost his grasp of that, though there is still
some of the etheric matter left round him. Thus he is suspended in what is
sometimes called the grey world. In this condition he obtains only little glimpses,
occasional impressions of each world, but he is in a very unsettled condition,
struggling always to obtain full life somewhere. All that might fall from him in
a single moment if he would let it, but often it is a long time before he can
do so.
785.
The Chohan says
that the changing life about us is formed by the hearts of men. It is true that
our outward conditions result from our inward thoughts and feelings. Sometimes
people complain about the state of society, government, politics, religion,
trade and education, but these very well express the inner condition of the
people who swarm in our cities. It is all formed by the hearts of men. And even
the less immediately caused human conditions of suffering and joy, such as
geological and climatic changes, even such as earthquakes and floods, become
our environment on account of karma which is due to our own feeling and
thinking. We thus put ourselves into our place in nature, according to our
inward nature, our hearts, and then we are apt to misunderstand it because we
look at the forms instead of at the life.
786.
A great deal of
what seems to most men actively evil may yet have its good side. A physical
plane example of this world be a terrible earthquake, like that which
devastated a great part of Sicily and Calabria in 1908, and killed over a
hundred and fifty thousand people, some suddenly, but others, I am afraid, with
a great deal of suffering. Many people would look upon that as an evil. It is
not evil for the world. It upheaves and changes the place of a great deal of
the earth’s crust, and renovates the soil, and in that it distinctly does good
to the world. Look at Mount Vesuvius, in Italy, and you will see how after a
certain time all the volcanic matter which is thrown out becomes the very
finest fertile soil. But it destroys human life at the time. A thunderstorm, an
earthquake, a great flood, are not evil at all. They may release some men from
their physical bodies, but surely that does no harm to them, in any case; all
that arises in such catastrophes is a matter of karma, and in the long run it
assuredly works out for their good.
787.
The Theosophist
ought to understand quite clearly that death is not in itself an evil, but is
very often given as a reward. Our general attitude in this matter is due to
wrong religious teaching. There is implanted in every one of us the desire for
self-preservation, the instinct to try to save our physical body from injury or
destruction. That is a very wise and necessary instinct. We ought to protect
our physical bodies, to make them last as long as we can; because, if one may
venture to express it so with all reverence, the Logos has taken the trouble to
put us into this incarnation, it is clearly our duty to make of it as much as
we can.1 1
Ante, p. 177.
788.
But there
sometimes comes an opportunity when the very noblest use that we can make of
our incarnation is to risk it, even to throw it away, as happens to a soldier
who goes forth on a forlorn hope, knowing that he must be killed, and yet that
his death is a necessary part of a great scheme which will end in victory. Such
a man puts his incarnation to the noblest use when he lays it down voluntarily,
when he throws it away; but for most of us and under ordinary conditions our
duty is to take all reasonable precautions, and try to make our bodies last as
long as we can; otherwise we cause a great deal of trouble by shortening our
lives.
789.
Some people have
been a little foolish in their confidence in the protection which they expect
the Masters to give to them. They say: “As long as I do the Master’s work I
need not take any precautions against infection when I visit people who are
ill. I am sure He will take care of me. I will plunge into the water although I
cannot swim; I am sure He will support me.” Perhaps He will, if He thinks it
worth while; but what right has anyone to put Him to the trouble of doing that
which with a little ordinary common sense he might have done for himself? If it
be our work to visit those suffering from infectious diseases, I think instead
of blindly trusting to the Master to protect us, we ought to save Him trouble
by taking ordinary precautions. We ought to do all we can on our side. If He
chooses to supplement that, it is His affair. It would be very wrong of us to
calculate upon it beforehand. Such interventions do happen, but we have no
right to expect them. I have seen strange things myself along those lines, but
I should never willingly put the Master to the trouble of having especially to
protect me against anything, when I can reasonably guard myself.
790.
The instinct of
self-preservation is for the advantage of the race. It is a right thing, but
the brave man is always ready to risk pain and danger and even life itself for
higher objects. The man who knows that death is not the greatest evil will be
very willing to risk it for the sake of averting a greater evil – just what
hundreds of thousands of our fellow-men did in the war. We know that death is
not the end of everything, as people so often think, and for us a catastrophe
like that of Messina is not terrible simply because a large number of people
were suddenly thrown out of their bodies on to the astral plane. When I was in
America there was a great fire in a theatre in Chicago, in which a large number
of women and children were killed. Some of our members came to me and asked: “How
can it be that Providence really governs the world, when all these innocent
women and children have been killed?” I said to them: “Do you think that only
men ever deserve the reward of a rapid release from the earth?” That was a new
point of view to them, that this might really be a kindness releasing them from
troublesome conditions of various kinds, so that they might start again in
better circumstances. So we should not regard that great earthquake as an evil,
merely because it suddenly threw a number of people on to the astral plane. The
cases of those who were imprisoned and died slowly were comparatively few.
There were some who were burned to death, and some who were buried among the
ruins. Those would seem to us cases of very terrible suffering, but even then
we must apply our Theosophy in the extreme cases as well as in the ordinary cases
and realize that the great suffering of an occasional individual probably wiped
out from his account karma which might have taken twenty ordinary lives to cancel.
Therefore, while we should feel the greatest pity for the people who suffered
in that way, and should do all in our power to help them, still we are not to
mourn over them as though the whole thing were useless. It is a short but
drastic way of getting rid of the result of a great deal of evil – truly
terrible, but yet, when it is over, see how much has been gained.
791.
We have compared
painful experiences roughly – it is not wise to press an analogy too far – to
the slow natural curing of some serious disease in one case, and the curing of
it in another case by a surgical operation. The surgical operation is dreadful
to pass through but when it is over the trouble ought to be done with. A slow
cure might mean in the aggregate even more suffering, distributed over many
years. I suppose we must take terrible pieces of karma as karmic surgical
operations. We do not sympathize, in the ordinary sense of the word, with the
dead, because we know that they are far better off than before. With the
relations who mourn their loss we do sympathize. But even then let us correct
the mistake which causes people to feel horror at these things, and to think
that God can no longer be good since He permits them. The experiences are
terrible indeed but the result of the whole process is invariably good.
792.
We must rise
altogether above personal points of view to see how all is working together for
good, and how the life in others is threading its way through the maze of karma
to the feet of the Eternal. The Chohan says we must read the larger word, take
the larger view, of life. Doing this, we shall never classify people in the
smaller way. We shall not, for example, think of religious men merely as
churchmen and dissenters, but as devotional men. So also we shall think of
statesmen not merely as tones or radicals. We shall take wider views, and
regard our fellows as men of thought, or of love or of will, according to the
type of human conscious activity that dominates their lives. We shall qualify
them according to their rays; adopting this deeper classification, we get
nearer to the heart of reality, and find ourselves better able to understand
life.
793.
It is very
difficult to understand fully all the different types, but we should try to do
so. The Adept does understand quite fully, and sympathizes with every possible
type; but it takes an Adept to do that. Our duty is to try; however impossible
the point of view of the other man may seem at first, one must try to
understand it. This does not for a moment mean that one must adopt his outlook;
we have just as much right to our own point of view as this other man has to
his, but he has also just as much right to his standpoint as we have to ours. A
man who can sympathize with those who entirely and radically differ from
himself has already made a considerable step towards understanding at least a
section of the world in which he lives.
794.
It is very clear
that what the Master says here is a definite command for the disciple – we must
learn to understand every type of person as fully as we can; and whenever we
can use influence in any way to get people out of their ruts, that is a good
thing to do. It must always be done with understanding, however, for sometimes
we may not be able to get a person out on our side of the rut; we may actually
throw him into a less desirable condition by what we teach him. I have known
that to happen.
795.
Those whose
memories go back to the older Theosophical literature will perhaps remember
that it was not very sympathetic to the Church. Madame Blavatsky herself was a
little impatient of the orthodox presentation of religion. She had evidently
seen a very great deal of the effect of ignorant religious belief in cramping
the minds and souls of the people, and sometimes she made quite a severe attack
against the narrow religious beliefs that were taught. I think she did not
always stop to tell people that there was another and higher side to it all. She
was a deadly foe to superstition in any and every form, and she was more
concerned in shaking the people out of their superstitions than with providing them’
with anything else Probably those people needed just that shaking out, and
required to be treated in that drastic way. Probably they could not have been
brought immediately to our outlook on life.
796.
I knew Dr. Besant
when her attacks on Christianity were even more slashing than Madame Blavatsky’s.
She would address large numbers of freethinkers in the Hall of Science in London,
and when they had a Christian evidence man or a clergyman defending orthodoxy,
it was interesting to listen to her, for she was probably the greatest debater
of the time. I have heard her debate before and after she came into Theosophy. The
Theosophical debate was much more charitable than the previous type, but it was
not nearly as interesting. She pointed out very gently and kindly the weak
points of the other side, and dropped inconvenient questions as much as she
could, out of consideration for the feelings of the other party. When first I
heard her debate she pushed her advantage to the full, and made it much more
interesting, though not pleasantly so for her opponent.
797.
Her power is just
as great today, but she uses it so much more mercifully that one does not see
it in debate to anything like the same extent. She has now what perhaps in her
free-thought days she had not, this faculty of understanding everybody. She has
that very wonderful power; but she has acquired it by definite work. She has
grown into it by making herself understand other people and by putting herself
in their places. In her free-thought days, when I first heard her debate, she
certainly did not put herself in the place of her opponent, whom she sometimes
reduced to stuttering imbecility by the faultless logic and the violence of her
attacks.
798.
The man who wants
to understand all, who wants fully to learn this larger view of life, must also
identify himself with the lower kingdoms, must understand nature as a whole as
far as he can. He must enter into a sympathetic attitude towards the great
Devas, the nature-spirits, the spirits of the trees and of the country-side. We
seem to have lost that in these modern civilizations, though here and there we
find a poet, an author or an artist who has it. Because they had it, such men
as Ruskin and Turner could write and paint as they did.
799.
In ancient Greece
we looked at things very differently from the way in which people regard them
now. Everything in nature meant much more to us then than it does in these
days, except to the few who are artistic. We thought less about money and
business, and we enjoyed nature more. It is well to understand such a point of
view as that. In the development of the lower mind, and in sharpening it on the
business and practical side of life our modern races have lost very much,
though unquestionably they have also gained a great deal – the faculty of
managing a great many things at once and also that of concentration under exceedingly
difficult circumstances, amid the fearful noise and racket and tear of this
civilization. We had nothing like that in Greece; we could not travel about so
quickly, but we saw very much more when we did travel.
800.
I think we should
try to recover the ancient outlook to some extent, by entering into the life
and glory and beauty of the world which is all around us. The surroundings that
man makes in these times are rarely beautiful, but in the days when men
understood nature more, they did not spoil her forms nearly so much. The Greeks
could build temples which were not out of place amidst the most beautiful
natural surroundings. Perhaps we also will learn to combine beauty with
usefulness; for example, we may learn to errect a building like a cathedral to
be used as a factory; but in the meantime it is one of the weak points in this
civilization that it is out of sympathy with nature in all her deeper aspects,
so that we need cultivation to acquire what was inborn in the Greeks – sympathy
with nature. When one reads Ruskin’s Queen of the Air one begins to
understand a little of it.
801.
Let us try to
make all-round progress. We have all lived in races of the past which made
beauty their principal influence – which had leisure and largeness of life. We,
therefore, have it all in the ego. Our present life crushes it down to a great
extent, but it needs only to be appealed to, and it will break through the
barrier. That can be done, and it is worth doing even if only from a selfish
point of view, for we should then enjoy life far more fully.
802.
There are some
people who feel disharmony with nature, who say that we are surrounded by “evil
influences”, and that the world is full of scorpions and snakes and tigers.
There is no inherent wickedness in a snake or a scorpion or a hornet, but they
are all exceedingly easily irritated, and entirely – as we should say if they
were human – unscrupulous as to the methods they employ. They simply run amuck,
and sting or bite every one near by, if they happen to be a little annoyed; but
you cannot call them wicked creatures, because they are not doing this with
malignity. They are very full of life, so they plunge about and injure anyone
who happens to come in their way.
803.
It is the same in
the astral and etheric regions as well. There are plenty of the lower types of
nature-spirits who are not wicked, not seeking to do evil, but are very
unpleasant creatures to deal with – the sort to be avoided. Fortunately it is
easier to avoid these things on the astral plane than in the physical world,
because a strong wish is sufficient there to drive them away from you.
Creatures of that sort will take advantage of you if you lay yourself open to
their influence. Many of them, as I have before explained, are delighted to
find a man in a royal rage. They do not in the least care why he is angry – I
am not at all sure that they know that a man is involved – but when they find a
vortex of vivid coarse vibrations which happen to suit them they plunge in and
enjoy it and stimulate it, and in every possible way make more and more of it.
804.
Vibrations of
cruelty are greatly enjoyed by some of these creatures, and there is no doubt
that they are eager to seize upon one who has this vice, and stir him up to
greater cruelty than the man himself would ever have thought of. If you let
anger take hold of you, you may do and say all kinds of things you would not wish
to do in the least. The same is true of cruelty: certainly it is also true of
jealousy, envy and hatred. When a man plunges into any one of these passions,
it is as though the astral body suddenly became alive and vindictive, because
it is seized upon by a quantity of these creatures. It is very difficult for us
to feel at all kindly towards them. We naturally think of the bad effect that
they produce upon us. Yet the poor thing is only enjoying himself after his
kind. That does not, however, excuse our letting him get hold of us; we ought
to have risen above it. But we have to remember that all kinds of
intensifications of that sort do take place, and when we are studying our
fellow-men we must constantly make allowances for them.
805.
There are vast
forces moving round us of which most men have very little idea. We all know
that in a general sort of way. We know that forces such as public opinion press
upon us without our feeling them but we do not quite realize, perhaps, the
tremendous strength of the law of evolution and the many and diverse ways in
which it is acting all about us. God hides Himself in matter, but He is not
dead because He hides Himself there; all the time His activities, His forces,
are playing upon all His creatures. When they are acting strongly on a man they
stir him up, and that is somewhat like the stirring up of a pool. All the water
is put into motion, and whatever there is in the pool is churned up and brought
to the surface. The pool may become very muddy for the time being by the
process, but by it one learns what was lying at the bottom; it is better that
the water should be stirred up, even if there is mud, than to let it stagnate
and go hopelessly to the bad. So sometimes all this disturbance which is a part
of His divine life brings out in people qualities which are undesirable.
806.
It might be
suggested that it would be better for a person if he had not been stirred up,
but that is not so. He has for the time being been made more alive – disagreeably
so, but it is better that the unpleasant qualities should come to the surface.
Then he will know of them, and his friends, who see them too, may help him;
whereas otherwise they might remain unnoticed, and might produce seriously bad
effects when an opportunity occurred for their being stirred up later on. So
sometimes it is the very divine force itself which brings forth activities
which seem undesirable. We may be very sure that He who doeth all things, doeth
all things well. He knows what He is doing, and when He stirs up foul matter of
some kind it is in order that it should be expelled, though at the time it does
not always look well or hopeful for evolution. We have constantly to remember
that every man we see is on a different rung of the ladder of evolution, so
that what for one is very good, even necessary, is precisely that which would
be harmful for another. We have to watch, and learn how to be entirely
impartial and not to judge hastily, whatever happens. All lives are in the
Logos and are quite definitely part of His life; so it follows that all these
things are really His aspects and expressions. In that way we have kinship with
all these manifestations, and a duty towards them. We may have opportunities of
helping one and not another; we must take what comes in our way to do.
807.
10. Learn to
look intelligently into the hearts of men.
808.
Study the
hearts of men that you may know what is that world in which you live and of
which you will to be a part.
809.
In this Rule the
word heart is used symbolically; we must look into the whole nature of man as
far as we can; not only into his feelings, which are usually represented by the
heart, but into his mental processes as well. We are required to try to
understand him deeply, and to do that we must search for the manifestation of
the ego in him.
810.
When we see men
round us acting in ways different from our own we often exclaim: Whatever could
have made the man do such a thing as that? We could not conceive of ourselves
doing that particular thing under any circumstances, and we cannot see why our
fellow-man should do it. Most of us have rather given up many such riddles long
ago, because they seem almost impossible to understand. I cannot understand,
for example, why huge crowds should go to see a boxing-match; I cannot see what
is the interest in it, because to me the whole thing is a brutal exhibition. If
it were a question of paying, I should prefer to pay to go away somewhere not
to see it. If I think over it carefully and try to reason it out, I find that
perhaps the attraction is an exhibition of skill – of a certain brutal and
degraded sort, but nevertheless it is skill – and perhaps there is also the
idea of courage and staying power.
811.
In the same way
numbers of people stand about the corners of the streets, guffawing and talking
in coarse and raucous voices. What pleasure they get out of it I do not
understand in the very least; still, there they are, and they constitute a
large section of human beings, whom we ought more or less to try to understand.
812.
People do all
kinds of strange things. Sometimes they fail into ecstasies of jealousy over
nothing in particular. At others, one sees people acutely affected by what
somebody else says about them. You apply reason, and say that it does not in
the very least matter what other people say, because it does not do them any
harm. But the fact remains that they are very strongly and seriously affected.
We ought to understand why, to some extent, if we can. I quite admit it is out
of the question in many cases; still manifestly it is our business to try to
understand our fellow-men.
813.
Some people might
say that it is sot an interesting study. It is not interesting for us
personally, if we are thinking about that; but it is interesting from the
larger point of view. Since we think of ourselves as having evolved a little further
than these people, it is very clearly our duty to help them, but without
understanding our help will be futile. It is very true that the things in which
most of these people are interested do not interest us, but that is only a symptom
of our having grown a little beyond them in the age of the soul. The soul
grows, and people become more rational as they advance. Small children do all sorts
of things that we cannot understand. Boys and girls of thirteen or fourteen
have a set of motives which are somewhat nearer to ours, but still we do not know
why they do what they do. We have to go back to our own youth before we can
realize at all what they are doing and how things will strike them. It is
always difficult; I know that well, because I have had very much to do at one
time and another with boys and young people. If you put an idea before them in
a certain way, in the hope that they may perhaps take it as you take it,
sometimes they do, but often they approach it from quite another point of view,
and decide upon it for reasons which would never have occurred to you.
Sometimes you can make out what they are aiming at, but sometimes you cannot. Schoolmasters
and other people who have much to do with boys and girls ought to make it part
of their business to try to understand their bizarre lines of thought and
feeling, because then they are more likely to avoid offending the young people.
814.
That is an
extreme case, but you have to do the same thing with the adult people round you.
If you are desirous to help them you must try to put yourself in their place;
that is what is meant here by learning to look intelligently into the hearts of
men. They have their prejudices and you have yours; it is highly probable that
the prejudices are different in some ways, and so you have to discover the
other person’s point of view and make allowance for it. Endeavour to find how
he arrives at his position and why his particular prejudice exists, so that
perhaps you may be able to help him to surmount it.
815.
Prejudice is
indeed very subtle. It is so strong and so ingrained generally that the man does
not know it is there; he does not believe that he requires any help, and it is
therefore often difficult to give it without offence. Still, it is a very great
advantage to a man if he can be helped somehow to get rid of his prejudice. In
order to succeed in that work and do it skilfully, you must find out just why
the man thinks this or that, and how his prejudice arose. Your own prejudice in
the matter will have to be put aside resolutely; otherwise you will be dragging
him from one false point of view to another.
816.
Most of the
causes of people’s strange interests arise in their astral bodies. The mental
body is only in process of being developed. This fact can be seen in all the
phenomena that surround us in the mental plane after death. When the average
better class man passes into the astral world he is fully capable of taking an
intelligent part in the life of that plane, though some do and some do not, and
some soon get the matter of their bodies rearranged, and thereby become greatly
limited in capacity. The astral body has its faculties well developed; they are
ready for use, though many people do not know what they ought to do and how
they ought to use them. When those who have made some study of these matters
pass to the astral plane, they find themselves in a vehicle which expresses
them more fully than did the physical body; but when they reach the
heaven-world it is generally not so.
817.
There we usually
find them working inside the mental body, and so very much shut up in it
that it is really more of a shell for them than an expression of their life.
That is what is meant by all that is written so strongly in the older books as
to the fact that men in the heaven-world are shut away from all the rest. It is
often spoken of as though it were a reserved part of the mental plane. It is
not that, but each man has shut himself up in his own shell, and therefore he
takes no part in the life of the mental plane at all; he does not move about
freely and deal with people as he does in the astral plane. The only openings
in his shell through which life outside can reach him are those windows which
he has made for himself by developing his mental body on certain lines. Whatever
the man has done with his mental body lays him open to mental influences.
Whatever it is, he will reap the result during his heaven-life, and he can to
some extent communicate with the outside world through that. But the results
.which he will be able to produce upon the inhabitants of that plane will be
much less on the whole than those which they will produce upon him, because it
is often only through very narrow channels that he is able to express himself
at all on that plane.
818.
That very fact,
which for a long time in the earlier days of our Theosophical study we did not
understand, shows that the mental body of the average man is only partially developed.
When we come to look at the manifestations down here in the physical world we
find that the same thing is true. Probably every one has experienced these
limitations in other people; we can find them in ourselves if we wish, but we
see these things more readily in others than in ourselves. When you talk to
strangers about Theosophy, for example, you will find that some of them take it
up with great eagerness, and others do not know what you are talking about.
They listen to what you say, and they say: “Yes, yes,” but they are obviously not
interested. The usual reason for this difference between people is that some of
them have met ideas of this sort in previous lives and others have not. I think
we should be justified in considering that all people who have been civilized
for some thousands of years have certainly met with these ideas in earlier
lives. Anyone who had a birth in ancient India or ancient Egypt, or who was
sufficiently respectable to enter the Mysteries in Greece or Rome, will already
have had some touch with these ideas. Some will have gone deeply into the matter,
and by doing so will have developed that part of their mental bodies which is
able to think of ideas such as these. Others cannot understand, and they do not
care about it. All they want is to have a good time, as they put it. Apart from
these grosser and lower desires their brains are of no use to them. If you
could get them to read a page about Theosophy they would not remember it.
819.
The brain must be
educated along the line in which we want it to work, and that is precisely what
we do in Theosophy. Those people who take it up readily and eagerly do so
partly because it answers many questions which they have been asking
themselves, and partly because they have thought to some extent along such
lines in other lives. Their brains are already opened so far as that part of
them is concerned; it is very hard work for the person whose brain is not yet
at all opened, as regards the philosophical part of it, to try to understand
Theosophy. You give him a simple explanation and he probably assimilates only a
very few of the broad ideas. The fact is that men need a great deal of
preparation. The average man cannot see anything in it. I am not for the moment
talking about his being clever or stupid, but simply of the fact that he is not
conversant with this line of thought. He requires a good deal of preparation. He
gains this for the most part through religion, and in religion he ought to be
gradually trained. A fully developed religion ought to be able to meet all
classes of people. All religions in the beginning do that, but as time goes on some
of them lose one part and some another, and sometimes they crystallize along
undesirable lines.
820.
If we are to try
to understand men we must remember the extent to which they are developed or
undeveloped. We must remember that the mental body is not as yet fully
developed, and therefore necessarily the causal body, which is higher, is still
less developed, so that it is hardly working at all in the lower classes.
Sometimes people who have studied Theosophy and have therefore understood a
great deal about life and developed their minds along that line, are apt to
rest upon their laurels and think that they have done all that is needful in
the development of the mind. But often that is not the case, and sooner or
later they must undertake some form of intellectual work or mental training.
821.
What we should
like to study in every man is the working of the soul, yet it is not every one
who gives us that opportunity, and in our endeavours to understand we must bear
that in mind. On the one hand we must always expect the highest from every man;
we must confidently assume that he will do what we feel he ought to do, because
the fact of our taking that mental attitude will very much help him to do it.
Again and again one sees that if a man who has, perhaps, been mixed up in shady
transactions is treated honourably, and shown that honour is expected from him,
he will rise to it. On the other hand, if we meet him with suspicion, he will
probably soon deserve that suspicion. Yet too much must not be expected from
people; we should assume that they are going to do the highest,’ and should try
by our thought to help them to do it, but when they fail we should not be
impatient or angry with them, because evolution is a very slow process and a
man can manifest only as much as he has developed.
822.
There is never
any use in feeling annoyance because someone falls below our standard; we
should not blame a man for being what he is, for being at the stage at which he
has arrived in evolution. When a person is developed to a high standard and
then fails in some way, one may feel: “That is a pity; because he knows so much
better than that,” but there is no reason or use in being annoyed. While we
must think the best of our fellow-men and must always try to help them to rise
to the best that is in them, yet we must take it philosophically if they fail
to do that. We must not show annoyance or impatience, but just try to help them
where they are. That, I think, is the lesson we are meant to learn when we are
told to look into their lives and hearts, and try to understand them.
823.
There now comes a
long note by the Master Hilarion, which we may take up with advantage bit by
bit. He says:
824.
From an
absolutely impersonal point of view, otherwise your sight is coloured.
Therefore impersonality must first be understood.
825.
We commonly speak
of being impersonal when we mean being just or balanced, when we do not bring
into our decision anything of our own likes or dislikes, when we act as a judge
does on the bench. But the Master means more than that. He holds impersonality
to mean the condition in which the personality is for the time entirely
transcended, so that not only do we in the personal life regard everything with
perfect impartiality, but also we look at things from the point of view of the
ego. That is a much more difficult achievement; to do it fully would mean
having the causal body fully developed. Humanity at large is still developing
the lower mental body. Students of occultism are trying to do something more
than that, but as yet there are comparatively few among them who can use the
causal body with any kind of certainty. In the beginning the student must
therefore reason, out for himself what the view of the soul would be,
and then follow it, eliminating everything else.
826.
It is hard to be
impersonal. If there is a dispute between two people, one of whom is a personal
friend whom you know very thoroughly, while the other is a stranger, it is
scarcely humanly possible to avoid a certain amount of bias in favour of the
friend. The reason for that bias is quite a good one – you know more about that
person, and the more you know of him the better you come to understand him and
the more you will make allowances for him.
827.
We can hardly
help being a little prejudiced in favour of a friend. I do not think we always
realize how very much we are the creatures of circumstances and surroundings.
We happen to be born in a certain suburb of a certain big city. We grow up to
know a certain small circle: out of that small circle we choose some friends.
Presently one may move away and then acquire new friends in other places, but
in the beginning the friendships which we form are a question generally of
where we happen to be. If we had been born in another suburb, we should
probably have had quite a different set of friends.
828.
Sometimes people
who have been brought together fall in love and marry. They cannot understand
that if they had happened to be born somewhere else they would probably have
felt just the same to some other person. There is much in propinquity. I know
karma comes in, too, in many cases, but these matters are quite often the
result of propinquity. We are strongly influenced by our human as well as by
our other surroundings. Therefore it is difficult to make this research into
the hearts of other men, and finally into our own hearts.
829.
We are in the
habit of thinking of everything as it happens to affect us. Many people are
incapable of taking the wider view, and seeing how it affects the nation as a
whole. We have plenty of instances of that in these days when almost everybody
has a vote. Quantities of people can think only how the result of the election
is likely to affect them personally; they seem incapable of understanding that
there is a duty to the community. It is not that they wilfully put the thought
of themselves before the thought of the community, but that it never occurs to
them that there is a wider point of view.
830.
There are three
ways in which the soul may be developed and may influence our lives, as I have
explained before.1 (1 Ante,
Vol. II, pp. 332-3. Vol.
Ill, p. 47.) One is that of the great
scientists and philosophers of the world, who have developed not only the lower
mind, but to a considerable extent the higher as well, so that a great deal of
its more abstract kind of thought, its wonderful comprehensive way of thinking,
comes down into what they think, although they cannot perhaps express it in
their writing. Those who have an attraction for that way, will have to pass
through the stage of being the great scientist or philosopher; the buddhic
development will come much later.
831.
Secondly, through
the higher emotions, such as strong affection, devotion or sympathy, it is possible
to awaken the buddhic principle to a great extent, without developing
especially the intermediate causal body, yet not without affecting it, since
all buddhic development reacts very powerfully on the causal. The method of
working of most of our students is to use the higher emotions and work from
them upon the buddhic vesture. I do not mean that they are yet developing a
buddhic vehicle in which they can permanently live. That would be an eminently
desirable thing to do, but it is perhaps beyond the reach of most as yet; but
the use of the higher emotions unquestionably evokes vibrations in the buddhic
matter. It stirs up the as yet unformed buddhic vehicle so that many of its
vibrations come down and brood over the man’s astral body; thus one may gain a
considerable amount of influence from that plane before the vehicle is at all
fully developed.
832.
There is also
another and more obscure path in which the will is called into activity; just
as the astral body reacts on the buddhic and the lower on the higher mental
vehicle, so does the physical somehow react on the nirvanic. I know very little
indeed of how it works. But the way of most students is through devotion to the
Masters and keen sympathy with their fellow-men.
833.
Intelligence is impartial: no man is your enemy: no
man is your friend. All alike are your teachers. Your enemy becomes a mystery
that must be solved, even though it take ages: for man must be understood.
834.
If you have
friends you may indeed be very thankful, but in this particular matter you look
on them impersonally, as from above, and say: “These are my friends; why have
we as souls been thrown together?” Then probably you will find that either
there are points of great similarity between you, or you are complementary to
each other – you go well together in your vibrations and so make a satisfactory
whole.
835.
In the same way,
from this impersonal point of view no man is your enemy. If anyone foolishly
puts himself in that position, you say: “Why should he be doing this? He could
not have these feelings towards me unless somewhere in the past I myself had
given him cause for it. Let me see if I can discover the cause, and whether
there is any way in which his attitude can be changed.”
836.
Your friend becomes a part of yourself, an extension
of yourself, a riddle hard to read. Only one thing is more difficult to know –
your own heart. Not until the bonds of personality be loosed can that profound
mystery of self begin to be seen.
837.
However well one
knows a person, even after many years of friendship, one yet sometimes touches
a layer of his consciousness which is strange. It has been said, and I think with
great truth, that no human being ever perfectly knows another, not even after a
long life together.1 The
Adept must know. That is one of the great comforts of being associated with the
Masters; we are so absolutely certain that They know much more about us than we
know about ourselves, that They really know us all through. We see in ourselves
weaknesses and failings, and we try so far as we can to deal effectively with
them; but we may also have other failings that we have not seen, which may come
out in great emergencies or moments of strain. It is then a comfort to think
that, if there be such things, the Master knows about them, and He will sooner
or later bring to the surface anything that we do not know already, and will
thus help us to remove it. Those whom He draws nearer to Himself in the
relation of discipleship at least have this consolation, that they cannot be
hopelessly bad, even though well-justified modesty may make them think poorly
enough of themselves.
838. 1 Ante, Vol. I, Part V, Ch. 2: Love in Daily Life.
839.
At all stages of
inner progress the necessary work must be done by us, and with our own will behind
it. Even the Master himself cannot do it for us, though He can and does help us
by His magnetism, affection and sympathy, as well as by indirect influence which
He gives through various pupils of His. He can help us along the way only if we
make such karma as allows Him to do it. We must make ourselves fit for the
opportunity and then, when it is given, by taking it thoroughly we shall become
ready for the next one.
840.
Without this the
Master has not the right to help, because He also is under the great law of
karma, and however willing He may be to lift us straight up to the Adept level,
He cannot do it. But that we shall receive His invaluable help on the road as
soon as we deserve it is very certain; for even He is a friend in the common
acceptance of the term. He cannot give us something which we have not earned;
He can really help us only when we have become one with Him.
841.
Not till you
stand aside from it, will it in any way reveal itself to your understanding.
Then, and not till then, can you grasp and guide it. Then, and not till then,
can you use all its powers, and devote them to a worthy service.
842.
The Master is
clearly thinking here of the higher self, the ego in his causal body, grasping
and guiding the lower self. As we have seen before, all of this is to be
understood at different levels, according to whether you are dealing with those
who are pupils or with the Adept Himself. For some the task is that the ego in
his causal body shall learn to control and direct the personality down here.
For others it is that the Monad shall take hold of and direct the ego. And when
that has been achieved, which is the case of the Adept, even then He will still
have to take whatever it may be that is next higher to that Monad and convert
the Monad to be a perfect expression of that.1
843. 1 Ante, p. 196. 27
844.
11. Regard
most earnestly your own heart.
845.
For through
your own heart comes the one light which can illuminate life and make it clear
to your eyes.
846.
Unless you
recognize God within yourself you can never find Him outside. Through your own
heart comes the one light which can illuminate life and make it clear to your
eyes. Its evocation can be very much helped from without. Your Master Himself
cannot give you that light, though He can help you to awaken it within yourself;
it must come from within, and it is within, whether you know it or not.
847.
It surely ought
to be a very great blessing and encouragement to us when we find so strongly
emphasized in Theosophical teaching the fact that the Divine is within us and
we are essentially part of it. We forget it many times, and allow ourselves to
fall away from the consciousness of it, so that temporarily we take short views
and are unable to grasp the width and the depth and the glory of His plan.
People forget, or perhaps never knew, that they are one with the Divine, and
that it is only by coming nearer and nearer to the expression of that Divinity
that they can ever attain real development or happiness, or indeed any truth
which shall put them right with the rest of the world. It has been universally recognized
by all mystics that it is only through the God within that we can come into
touch truly with the God without. The Master has said in another place: “If you
cannot see it within yourself then it is useless to look elsewhere.”
CHAPTER
5
RULE 13
848.
C.W.L. – At
this point in Part II of Light on the Path the numbering of the rules
undergoes a change. We have no longer sets of three aphorisms from the old
manuscript, followed by a comment by the Chohan. Rule 13, to which we have now
come, is given by the Chohan.
849.
13. Speech
comes only with knowledge. Attain to knowledge and you will attain to speech.
850.
The Master
Hilarion’s note on that says:
851.
It is
impossible to help others till you have obtained some certainty of your own.
852.
One may study the
Theosophical system thoroughly, look at it from all points of view, compare it
with other ideas which attempt to account for the state of affairs we see in
the world, come to the definite conclusion that it is very much the best
hypothesis before the world, and consequently accept it as true. I suppose one
cannot quite call that knowledge, but it is at least a full and reasonable
conviction upon which one can act with certainty.
853.
If we examine the
orthodox Christian statement we see at once that it lacks stability and is inconsistent;
though it professes to account for everything it can hardly be said to offer a
satisfactory theory. That is why many Christians fear to think. When we come to
the Theosophical explanation of life, however, we see that we are on firm
ground. Suppose someone comes from outside as an inquirer; he may feel that
some of our statements are too strong, direct and positive, and may ask: “What
evidence have you that these things are so?” He may doubt the accuracy of some
particular statements. But no one could deny, taking the philosophy as a whole,
that it is at least a coherent theory, and if it be true it does account for
everything. That in many cases is all that can be claimed for scientific
theories. We have before us a certain number of facts; the hypothesis has to
account for those facts; here is one which is clearly better than the others,
which explains better than the rest all that has been observed; therefore we
accept that as provisionally true.
854.
When I came to a
knowledge of Theosophy I was already a priest of the Anglican Church, yet I
doubted a great many of the dogmas put forward by the Church, and always
avoided preaching any dogma, but taught morality and illustrated it. Here in
Theosophy was a reasonable theory, and because it was so reasonable I was very
willing indeed to take it. I had then little proof, yet even at that stage I
had as much proof for it as we have for a vast number of the facts in
astronomy. I had as much evidence for it as we have, for example, for many
widely-accepted theories in chemistry or physics. Certain experiments are
explained by those theories, but there are a good many other things which are
not yet explained.
855.
Then came for me
the further step of meeting Madame Blavatsky, seeing in relation with her certain
things which proved some of her contentions. Of course that did not necessarily
prove the truth of all the rest, but very soon, within three years after coming
into the Society, I knew of my own knowledge of the existence of the Great
Teachers whom she had described. To find that much true was very good evidence
towards the truth of the other statements, especially as they all fitted in so beautifully
and made so perfect a system.
856.
Later, I became
able to investigate for myself many of these questions, and so far as I have
yet gone I have found no error in any of the great truths which she laid before
us. In her books she gave a vast mass of teaching; as to the meaning of some of
it I am not yet in a position to speak from direct knowledge. There are also
some statements which I cannot yet understand; but the more I have learnt
myself the more I have realized how much she knew. Therefore, while she
admitted that there were many mistakes in her books, I have given up looking
for them. At first, when we came to anything we did not understand, we thought
it was one of the mistakes; later we found the mistake was with ourselves – we
had not fully understood. Errors exist, no doubt, and when we know a great deal
more we shall probably come across them. I suspect certain statements of
belonging to that class, but am unwilling to assume that they do until I know
it to be so – one prefers to take her statements with great respect.
857.
Having definite
knowledge ourselves, it is true that we can speak with greater conviction.1 (1 Ante, pp. 309-10.) I have had that said with regard to myself. People
have said that they found my conversation convincing. Others without direct
knowledge but far more eloquent than I have put these matters from their point
of view; and yet people have said: “Yes, but do you know it?” I have
replied: “Yes, I do, but how do you know I do, although I tell you it is so?” “We
do not know,” they would answer, but somehow we feel when a man is speaking of
that which he himself knows, and when he is speaking of that which he has
merely read and studied.” There are all sorts of analogies for the idea that it
is impossible to help others till you have obtained some certainty of your own.
If you want to lift a person out of stormy waters your own feet must be on the
rock.
858.
When one soul
knows, it conveys its certainty to other souls, and they recognize that
certainty; even though down on the physical plane and with the physical brain
they probably could not give any reasons, they feel it when a man really knows.
It would be impossible for a man to help others along the line of higher
development, or to draw pupils nearer to their Masters, unless he knew for
himself.
859.
This difference
is clearly marked in the Theosophical Manuals, most of which were written by
Dr. Besant. The first three – The Seven Principles of Man, Reincarnation and
Death and After – were written before she could see any of these things,
for herself. She very soon recognized that The Secret Doctrine, wonderful
as it is, was most difficult for the average student, and that he would not get
out of it one-tenth of what was there unless he could have some preliminary
study to prepare for it. So she set to work with her characteristic energy and
prepared certain epitomes for her people, simply writing them from her own
study of the books, and from answers to questions which she had asked Madame
Blavatsky. I doubt whether any other person could have taken The Secret
Doctrine alone and got out of it what she did. She has a wonderful power of
welding things together and making them clear. However, by the time she got to
the fourth Manual, which was Karma, she was beginning to see the working
of these things for herself. Then I wrote The Astral Plane and The
Devachanic Plane, and she wrote the seventh Manual, Man and His Bodies. By
the time she wrote the last she had fully learnt to see for herself. There is a’
distinct difference in style in both Karma and in Man and His Bodies.
Both those Manuals show that she knew what she was talking about at first
hand. In the other books she was quoting, and although she wove in the
different quotations with wonderful skill, the first three Manuals contain a
great deal which is not quite clear, and is difficult to understand. She has
often said she would like to rewrite them, but she is always writing other
books, and has never had time. Also she has had the idea that they are historical
documents, to show what we knew and what we did not know at that stage.
860.
In the early days
most of us had a very incomplete idea of the scheme of things; there were many
gaps in our theories. Mr. A.P. Sinnett’s Esoteric Buddhism was the first
effort to make a fairly complete and orderly statement. That book was based
entirely upon a vast number of letters which were received by Mr. Sinnett
through pupils of the Master Kuthumi. At first we attributed all the answers
directly to the Master Himself, but afterwards we found that they came, if one
may put it so, from His office, from His entourage. There was a vast amount of
information in the letters, which were largely answers to questions propounded
by Mr. Sinnett. It was out of those that Mr. Sinnett’s earlier books were
written.
861.
It is Dr. Besant
who has done most of the work of tabulating Theosophical knowledge for us, who
has arranged facts and made them so that he who runs may read. In those earlier
days we had to study much harder in order to grasp Theosophical truths. But one
can see the difference between even her work, splendid as it was, at a time
when she was guided only by the books, and when she saw the things for herself.
Madame Blavatsky saw many things for herself, but her mind, so far as we could
understand it, for it was a very gigantic mind, worked somewhat differently
from ours. If one may say it with respect and reverence, it was of an Atlantean
type in that it massed together vast accumulations of facts but did not make
much effort at arranging them. Swami T. Subba Row said that The Secret
Doctrine was a heap of precious stones. There is no question that they are
precious stones, but one must classify them for oneself; she did not attempt to
do that for us, for she did not feel the need of it at all.
862.
In the course of
my own study I have repeatedly come upon ideas which were quite new to me, and
have noted them down, thinking of them not exactly as discoveries, but as ideas
that were fresh to me; perhaps months afterwards, or a year or two later I have
looked back at Esoteric Buddhism or The Secret Doctrine, and have
found that the idea which I thought to be new was distinctly implied in that
book – perhaps not stated in so many words, but certainly implied. Certainly
many ideas which we have recently thought to be new ought to have been deduced
by us. I can see how those truths follow from the other ideas, and I wonder now
how I could have been so stupid as not to have made the deduction. The same experience
occurs in quite a striking way at each Initation; the key of knowledge which is
then communicated is an absolutely obvious thing. We say to ourselves: “Well,
what have I been doing not to see that myself?” But we never do; nobody does
until it is told to him. We need no proof for the statement; it speaks for
itself, it is absolutely self-evident. There the fact was, staring us in the
face all our life long, and we never saw it. If one ever had any pride in one’s
intellectual development, it is very soon broken up on this line of experience.
863.
Only the Masters
are capable of giving full help to anyone. Their knowledge is universal,
and it extends into all higher worlds as well. They appear not to need all the
knowledge stored within Their brains as we do, but are able to turn a certain
faculty on to anything that is wanted and by the use of that faculty, then and
there, to know all about it. It might be that there was some information which
the Master wanted; He would not need to read it up as we should, but He would
turn His all-seeing eye on that subject and thereby absorb the knowledge
somehow. I think that is what must be meant by getting rid of ignorance. It is
obvious that one could never obtain all knowledge along the lines on which we
gain knowledge. It is distinctly stated that the last fetter which the Arhat must
cast off is avidya – ignorance.1 (1 Ante, Vol. II, p. 364.) When we asked: “What does that mean? About what must
he know?” we were told: “About everything in the solar system.” One shrinks
back appalled, because one has some little experience of the lower planes of
this world, and one has also established consciousness at various higher
levels. I can definitely say that though this is the Path along which universal
knowledge is gained, yet as one advances one becomes more and more oppressed
with the sense of universal ignorance; every time one rises to higher levels,
though one does understand the things one has been trying to understand, one at
the same time sees rising up and stretching away in front of one wider and
wider fields of which one is ignorant. The more a student gains the more he realizes
how very much more there is to learn, and how little, beside that, is all he
thinks he has gained. Even that is only half the difficulty, for every
additional elevation gives a new point of vision with regard to all the things
one already knew, and so one has to learn them all over again from that new
point of view.
864.
The attempt is
not a hopeful one along any line which we have as yet learnt to follow. If we
are to have the universal divine knowledge there must be some altogether
different way of grasping it, which will open before us as we go further on. I
take the whole matter philosophically now, because there is nothing else to be
done. I learn all I can along our present lines, and as I gain new methods I use
them, but I see I shall never really attain the higher goal along these lines. There
must be some entirely new method of acquiring knowledge, and I think we get a
little guidance as to what that may be from the buddhic consciousness of which
I have already spoken; in that one no longer has to collect facts from outside,
but one plunges into the consciousness of all these things, whether they be minerals
or plants or devas, and understands them from inside. Then one finds that it is
all a part of one’s own consciousness somehow. Along that line it may possibly
be worked out.
865.
When you have learned the first twenty-one rules and have entered the
Hall of Learning with your powers
developed and sense unchained, then you will find there is a
fount within you from which speech will arise.
866.
The hall of
learning refers in the beginning to the astral world; at a later stage the
Master probably means something very much higher than that by the same
expression.1 In the first
place, when only astral experiences are available to the aspirant, there is a
great deal that he can learn in the astral world. It is altogether a new thing
for him; new faculties unfold and he finds vistas opening before him in
different directions, enabling him to approach everything from that new point
of view. To begin with there is the extra dimension. Besides that, there is the
power of seeing through every material thing. Further, the observer translates everything
through his emotional vehicle, and that is very different from trying to sense
things through a physical body. So there is much to be learnt and to be done in
that higher world, because it is there that people most of all need help; it is
there that we have all the newly dead in their many different conditions and stages
of development, so it is chiefly there that work for those in trouble can be
done out of the physical body.
867. 1 Ante, Vol. II, pp. 89-91.
868.
There comes a
later stage when the man becomes free in the mental plane in the same way as
most of us are free in the astral when we are away from the physical body.
Pupils of the Masters are taught especially to develop the mental body until
they are able to use it as easily as the astral body; then they are taught how
to make the mayavi-rupa, that is to say, a temporary astral body, not the
astral body naturally attached to the man, but a temporary materialization on
the astral plane which only those can make who have learnt to travel about in
their mental vehicles.1 1 Ante,
Vol. II, pp. 121, 274.
Vol. Ill, p. 264.
869.
The next stage is
to learn to use the causal body freely. Then, whatever lower vehicles the man
may be using he retains this new consciousness to some extent. He cannot use
the full faculty of the causal body through the astral or the mental, because
they form a veil, a limitation; but still he will have the memory of his causal
experience with him. If he has also broken through that which acts as a veil
between the astral and physical bodies, he will physically remember everything
that he does in the higher worlds, so that his existence will be continuous. In
the causal body itself his consciousness will be unbroken, not only through sleeping
and waking, but through life and death, because that is a permanent
consciousness. When a man enters into the next higher hall of learning, the buddhic
plane, he will have direct acquaintance with all that comes before him. He will
be able to enter within others, and in another way to draw them inside himself,
and so will understand them fully.
870.
When a man has
his powers developed and his senses unchained at these high levels he certainly
will have a very great deal that he can say. At the same time he will always
find himself hampered by a serious difficulty in expression. He sees and knows;
and because of that he can say a great deal more than the man who does not know
for himself, and can put it very convincingly; and yet with all his effort, and
even with all his success as far as certain people are concerned, he will never
be free from the consciousness that he is not expressing half of what he has
seen. No words will impart to another what has been experienced in a realm
beyond words.
871.
People who are
full of devotion now and then, rise into a condition of ecstasy in which they
glimpse the higher planes. When one has once touched that condition he will
immediately recognize it in the descriptions attempted by some of the Christian
saints, and also by Hindu yogis. St. Teresa speaks of such experiences; St.
John of the Cross, St. Francis of Assisi and others also mention them once or
twice. These Christians reached a condition which they described in Christian
terms, whereas a Theosophist would describe them in more Theosophical terms. He
would speak of it in reference to the Masters; they spoke with reference to the
Christ.
872.
It is a great thing
to obtain that touch of the reality behind phenomena, or rather that nearer approach
to the reality beyond the forms, because a fragment of personal experience
counts far more than a very great deal of instruction by hearsay; when we have
some touch of personal experience we find that there is a fount of speech which
arises within us. We feel we have something different to say, something which
we must say, which is laid upon us as a charge that we shall give to the
world – that we shall bear witness of these splendid realities. The Master says
that when you come to know these things for yourself you will find this fount
within you from which speech will arise. You will feel that you must and ought
to tell the great things which the Lord hath done for you to put it in the
Christian form.
873.
One does not wish
indiscriminately to thrust one’s experiences upon people, but one has the feeling
that those who have really definite first-hand knowledge of any sort ought
always to be willing to bear testimony to it. Those who have personally seen
and met and remembered some of the great Masters, should, I think, always be
willing to bear witness to that fact, because the outer world is constantly in
the attitude of saying, when they hear of such happenings: “Well, is there
anyone who has seen these great Beings?” I do not wish to degrade the idea of a
Master by bringing it before those who cannot understand it, but if any such
people, even at a public meeting, ask: “Have you seen any of these great Masters?”
I say in reply: “Yes I have, but it is not a matter which I care to discuss in
a public meeting.” It is quite likely that in such a gathering there might be some
who would mock at the idea; even though they said nothing, they might be in a
condition of disbelief. While all that makes not the slightest difference to
the Masters, it is only fair that we should remember that it does make a great
difference to the blasphemer. The man who mocks at great people such as These
makes for himself an especially evil form of karma; that I have seen over and
over again. So if sometimes it seems that we hold back these things, our real
reason for doing so is not only the natural repugnance that we feel towards
subjecting names which to us are sacred to the ridicule of the ignorant and the
foolish, but it is also out of consideration for the ignorant and foolish
themselves, that they may not heap up for themselves very unpleasant
experiences in the future. I cannot thoroughly explain that, but I do know that
it is so. I have seen it again and again, far too often for it to be a mere
coincidence, or the result of any kind of accident.
874.
No man has the
right to ridicule any religious teacher; he may not believe in him or feel it
his duty to follow him, but at least no man of fine feeling would ever ridicule
the religious belief of another. The man who does so is doing what is wrong on
general principles, irrespective of the nature of the teachings given.
875.
It is well,
perhaps, that a general caution should be sounded in all directions that one
should not adopt a scornful attitude with regard to anything, because there may
always be some fragment of truth even in what seems to us incredible and
incomprehensible. Every effect – even a superstition – has a cause, and though
in the form in which it now presents itself to us it may be ridiculous, we
shall find, if we follow it back, that there was something of truth in it at
the beginning, and there is still something behind it.
876.
After the
thirteenth rule I can add no more words to what is already written.
877.
The Master
Hilarion means that the notes made the Venetian Chohan comprise all that He
feels it is safe to say. He then concludes His notes with the words:
878.
My peace I
give unto you. ∆
879.
These notes
are writen only for those to whom I give My peace; those who can read what I
have written with the inner as well as the outer sense.
880.
“My Peace I give
unto you“, we saw in Part I, can only be said by the Master to the disciples
who are as Himself, or to others who have attained the buddhic level and are
one with Him by virtue of attaining that consciousness.1 1
Ante, pp. 286-9. 28
881.
Suppose people
exchange among themselves a salutation of that sort: “Peace be with you,” and
the reply: “And on you be peace.” What do they give to one another? We may
imagine them to stand at the same level, and from each of them goes a strong
wish or thought of peace to the other. That would be a real gift, a quite
definite material thing. But that happens also whenever one sends out a thought
of affection towards somebody one loves. One quite definitely transfers a
little part of one’s astral body to him as the vehicle of the thought-form; one
may also transfer higher matter as far as the buddhic plane if one has developed
up to that level.
882.
It is well to
realize that one is actually giving something material in these cases. Often
people do not think that the wish is anything. When they send out a good wish,
it is just as material a gift as a book or jewel would be, only it is composed
of mental and astral matter. It is a gift the poorest can give as well as the
richest.
883.
Suppose one
receives the blessing of a priest: “The peace of God which passeth all
understanding be upon you.” That again is quite a definite phenomenon. The good
wish of the priest which one may receive as well, would be only an
infinitesimal fragment of what comes from him. When a priest gives a solemn
blessing in the name of God he is exercising his function as a priest; he is
drawing spiritual power from that reservoir which the Christ set apart
precisely for that purpose. It is from the very same reservoir which is drawn
upon when the Eucharist is celebrated, only this is drawn from a different
layer, and gives a different kind of force. There have been Great Ones who have
chosen to found a special section of the reservoir, filled in the first place
by Themselves, and afterwards kept full by Their particular followers. This the
Christ Himself did in His descent in Palestine. Therefore peace and blessing of
a very much higher order than one man can give to another flows over the
congregation through the will of the priest. It is not his \own, but comes from
that higher source.
884.
If one receives
the blessing of the Bishop one has a higher stage of the same thing, a fuller
outpouring. The Bishop, when he gives his blessing as such, makes three crosses
instead of only the one which the priest makes. He does that to express the
threefold force which he sends out. I do not mean to say that being a Bishop he
would not give that force if he made only one cross, but the reason for his
making the three signs is that he has at his disposal a threefold variety of
the same force at a higher level than that given by the priest. If one of our
great Masters said to a person “Peace be with you,” He would throw upon him a
still wider and higher peace.
885.
The blessing of
the Christ Himself is the highest that this earth can give. The Lord of the
World truly stands yet above, but it does not come in His way so much to give
blessing as to give strength. I think we may say the blessing of the
Bodhisattva is the highest of that religious type which this world can give us.
How much each one is able to receive of that peace and blessing depends not in
the least upon the Bodhisattva, but entirely upon the individual. His power
pours forth like the sunshine; earth-born clouds may get in the way of the
sunlight, may obscure the action of that divine force, but it is there
nevertheless – a glorious and wonderful power.
886.
Most people are
in one way much too materialistic and in another not nearly materialistic
enough, in their feeling about these higher facts. We have so much materialism
clinging about us that unless we can definitely see or at least feel a thing
ourselves we can hardly credit its existence. Yet on the other hand we are not
material enough in our ideas. People should understand that when we speak of/
the blessing outpoured by the Great Ones, even that of the Christ Himself, we
mean something as definite as electricity or a jet of water. It is through
matter that spiritual force manifests itself to us, so when we receive a
blessing it is an actual, definite power, which can bring us nearer to the
Deity.1
887. 1 Ante, pp. 349-50.
CHAPTER
6
RULES 14 TO 21
888.
C.W.L. – Rule
14 is once more a comment by the Chohan, not so much upon what has gone before
as in preparation for another set of three aphorisms, which are numbered 15, 16
and 17.
889.
14. Having
obtained the use of the inner senses, having conquered the desires of the outer
senses, having conquered the desires of the individual soul, and having obtained
knowledge, prepare now, O disciple, to enter upon the way in reality. The path
is found: make yourself ready to tread it.
890.
It seems strange
when we are past the middle of the second part of this book to be told that
only now are we entering upon the way in reality. It is, of course, a higher
stage of the way that is referred to. Just as we speak of the probationary path
first, and then the Path proper after the first Initiation has been passed, so
here the Chohan speaks of entering upon the way in reality. The same idea is
applicable at different levels. The Arhat enters on a new way, that of the
nirvanic plane, a greater reality than that of the buddhic plane, and the Asekha
or full Adept enters a yet higher path, a still fuller reality.
891.
There seems no
end to this Path. We cannot speak with certainty as to anything final. We can
say that the ladder reaches before us till it is lost in glory far beyond our
understanding, and we know quite certainly that there is evolution before us
lasting for millions of years yet. What is the final end, who shall say? But
that we shall reach the consciousness of our solar Logos, we know. For us that
might well seem an end, yet I have no doubt that beyond that stretch further
glories; but as to the finality we can say nothing. Even if such things could
be laid before us in our present stage of development it is quite certain we
should not understand them.
892.
When the Chohan
speaks of having conquered the desires of the individual soul He means the
desires which the ego himself may have. They are not such as we term desires
down here. At a high stage of the Path two fetters must be cast off which are
called ruparaga and aruparaga and they are interpreted “desire for life in a
form” and “desire for formless life”. When one reaches the consciousness of the
ego one finds that he has before him two varieties of life – that in his causal
body, which is life in a form, and the buddhic life, which is life without a
form in any ordinary sense of that word.
893.
The ego has thus
experiences of a consciousness in a form and a consciousness without form, and
they are both wonderful beyond all words, because the ego’s life in form is
life among his peers, among other egos, and when he is conscious at that level,
he is enjoying the companionship of all the brightest intellects that the world
has ever produced, including the great Angel kingdom as well as the human
kingdom. The life of the ego on his own plane is glorious beyond any conception
possible to the personality. If one could imagine an existence in the company
of the great men of the world – artists, poets, scientists, and even our
Masters themselves – and add to all that an understanding of Them unattainable
down here – then only would one begin to have some idea of the life of the ego.
894.
When one advances
that far in development, one can see that it is a life of intense attraction,
and for a man having that possibility before him to put it all aside and say: “I
have no longer the slightest desire for this,” would be a stupendous sacrifice.
895.
It would be an
even greater renunciation if beyond and above that he had the formless life at
his disposal – the life on the buddhic plane – which has not only that
companionship, but actually becomes one with all that, and with a great deal
more. Then he would say: “I have no desire even for that life; I am absolutely
free from desire. If the Logos sends me, through our Masters, into one of these
lines – life in form or life beyond form – most happily, most gratefully will I
accept the work and try to do my best, but I have no desire for one or for the
other, and am equally willing to be sent down into physical plane work.” I
suppose few people have the least idea what an awful plunge the physical plane
life is after such experience. To come down to this lower level even under the
most desirable conditions, the most beautiful surroundings, is to fall back
again into darkness out of a marvellous light; it is to be confined, to be
bound and helpless, because all the faculties of the higher worlds are so fine that
they cannot be used down here.
896.
It was said in
one of the earlier letters from the Masters, of those who had touched the
nirvanic level, that when they came out of it they were in a condition of
profound depression for many weeks. I can imagine that to be true of some of
our Indian brothers who in high ecstasy – in samadhi – had experienced that,
and on coming down again to the physical life had found it a condition
profoundly depressing. Those who are pupils of the Masters and have had
experience of the higher levels have been taught not to allow themselves to be
depressed by descent into any limitation or surroundings.
897.
He who has
sacrificed himself for service must be willing to surrender everything
completely, when it is necessary. He must be ready to be sent down into any
kind of surroundings, to give up altogether for the time that life in the
higher forms and that formless life which is higher still. Only so can he cast
off entirely those two fetters. It is the Arhat who has to do this. One may
gain the Fourth Initiation and yet have touches of desire for those higher
realms, so we need not despair unnecessarily. But it does mean a high
development, a strong sense of the necessity for service, to be entirely
unattached to such bliss. The temptation is very far beyond anything one could
possibly imagine.
898.
15. Inquire
of the earth, the air, and the water, of the secrets they hold for you. The
development of your inner senses will enable you to do this.
899.
In this rule we
have the original aphorism in the first sentence and the Chohan’s comment in
the second. I have already spoken with regard to what is indicated here – that
we have to come into closer communion with nature, if we want really to understand
her. All religions so far as we know, even including many of the rites of
savage tribes which can hardly be thought of as religions at all, have a theory
of cosmogony, of the way in which the world or the solar system came into
being. There is a reason for that. It has been strongly impressed by the
World-Teacher upon the sub-races of people to whom He came at different times
that they should try to understand the universe of which they form a part.
900.
The more we
understand of the whole plan of evolution the more we can live in harmony with
it, and become able to work with it even in minute detail. I am afraid it is
impossible for people who have not had the experience fully to grasp all that
is meant here by coming more closely into touch with nature. The writer is not
talking vaguely, but with very perfect and intimate knowledge, when He says: “Inquire
of the earth, the air, and the water, of the secrets they hold for you.” Those
secrets would help men to understand this great and wonderful evolution. Even a
little knowledge of them would at least save people from the danger of being
self-centred. Many people very distinctly have been self-centred, because they
have the absurd idea that all these kingdoms were created especially for
mankind. If there are vegetables, well, it is stated in the Bible that God gave
them to man for food; if there are animals, they assume (although I do not
think it is distinctly stated) that God intended them to be man’s servants,
that they exist only to serve him, and, apparently, many of them, only to be
eaten by him. That is not what is stated in the Bible; it is the herbs and
fruits of the trees which are there said to have been given to man for his
meat. There has been very strongly this idea that everything existed for the
sake of man – that the air was made that he might breathe it, that the water
existed that he might use it to drink or to wash with, and that everything
pivoted round man as a centre. But all that is not so by any means.
901.
The same people
think of the moon as useless, except to light their way at night. If that was
the intention it has been very inefficiently carried out, because half the time
it does not do that at all; but still they persist in saying that the sun
exists to light them by day and the moon to light them by night. Men have
always talked like that, and when we know the facts it certainly strikes us as
curious. We are the highest of the animal evolution. We hold ourselves to be a
kingdom apart from the animal, but the fact remains that we are the highest of
these creatures which have dense physical bodies. There are vast numbers of
entities higher than ourselves who have mental and astral vehicles, and others
which use physical bodies to the extent of the etheric matter, though only
during temporary materialization.
902.
If we were to
choose one evolution apart from the rest and say that the solar system exists
for that special one or even to say that our earth exists for that one alone,
then we should have to take the great deva evolution rather than the human,
because it certainly reaches much higher and is altogether more splendid than
our own. There are a great many other lines which have finished their physical
experience on other chains of worlds and are now utilizing the higher planes of
this world. Those evolutions which are at the stage of the buddhic plane, for
example, do not interfere at all with the three lower worlds in which we are
evolving. Since they are already at that height where their lowest level is the
mental plane, which to us is so high, it may well be that they are far more
important than we.
903.
So far as we have
been able to test it, or to see, no space anywhere is being wasted, or is unoccupied.
I remember a statement made once at a spiritualist meeting which I attended,
before I knew about Theosophy. The communicating entity said that to his sight
the room was packed densely with what he called spirits, and furthermore beyond
that room there extended on into the sky a dense mass of higher entities – whom
he called angels – of various sorts, pouring down and rising up again. He said,
“The whole air, as far as I can see, is densely packed with these higher
beings.” He represented them all as being focused upon the particular circle in
which we were sitting, and I have no doubt that a certain set of entities may
have been attending to that, but apart from that, and always, all space is
being utilized for evolutions which have nothing to do with us or with our set
of parallel schemes at all.
904.
The whole of
space is absolutely full of life. More than three-fourths of the earth is covered
with water; men cannot live in it, but that vast space is nevertheless very
fully occupied with life. The solid earth is also full of a kind of life that
moves through it as we move through air, without being conscious of
obstruction. That is at a level lower than humanity; it is cleverer in some
ways, but on the whole lower, and so utterly different from ours that what is
their normal evolution would be evil for us. Much of this life could not be
explained in ordinary language at all, but one can sense it by getting away
from one’s body and going in among it and observing it. I should not advise
people to do this, however, until they have the higher faculties and the other
qualities which have been mentioned, because they might get themselves into
serious danger, especially among these lower forces which are tremendously
strong, but are not guided by any considerations which we understand – what we
would call moral considerations do not exist at all among some of those
evolutions. It is all quite different from anything of which we have any
knowledge, but all this we must know before we ourselves can reach the level of
the Divine and become one with that, because all of this is the life of the
Logos just as much as is the life within ourselves, and to understand Him we must
understand it all.
905.
16. Inquire
of the Holy Ones of the earth of the secrets they hold for you.
906.
The comment upon
this is:
907.
The
conquering of the desires of the outer senses will give you the right to do
this.
908.
The Holy Ones of
the earth are certainly, among others, our Masters. I think that here He means
also the great Angels. We may come into touch with them and may learn much from
them, but also we may learn – we have learnt – much from our own Masters, for
They, through Their disciples, have taught us much knowledge which otherwise we
should have been a long time in reaching for ourselves. They told us in the
beginning that it was our business to verify for ourselves the things They taught
us. That is what we have been doing, and it is in that way that we have in many
of the later Theosophical books much more detail than was given in the earlier
books, which depended very largely upon what had been told us.
909.
To inquire from a
Master does not always mean to go and ask a question. There are other ways
besides that. There are cases in which we have done precisely that thing. We
have formulated definite questions, and when the opportunity occurred have put
those questions, one might say by word of mouth, except that on the higher
planes there is no word of mouth in the ordinary sense; we have sometimes put
those questions to a Master in a moment of His leisure and have received
definite answers to them. There are many things in every-day work about which
we should like to have the benefit of His wider insight, yet we could not think
for a moment of troubling Him to give an answer. As has been explained before,
it is possible for a pupil to lay his thought beside that of the Master and so,
without appealing to the consciousness of the Master to see what He thinks on
any given subject.1 (1 Ante, Vol. I, Part
I, Ch, 1: The Occult Path; Part II, Ch. 4: Be True all through.) That makes no call upon Him whatever. It is simply
that by drawing back up the line of communication we can put our thought beside
His. It means that one has oneself thought out the question first and come to
some conclusion that seems the best; then one lays that conclusion beside the
Master’s thought on the subject, to see whether there is any difference. If
there is, one promptly alters one’s own thought, knowing that He is much wiser
and that His thought is accurate.
910.
Thus there are
ways of consulting the Master, without troubling Him at all. Still, there are
other cases where that is not a suitable method of communication, where we have
absolutely to wait for an opportunity to ask a question and get an answer; but
certainly in order that one may inquire of Them he must first of all bring
himself to the point where he will cause no disturbance in coming near to Them.
911.
It is the duty of
some of us to go every night when we fall asleep to the houses of our
respective Masters for orders, to see whether there are any special
instructions for us. Sometimes there are. But sometimes we find the Master
obviously busy, deeply engaged; then we do not thrust ourselves upon His notice,
but go quietly away and go on with our ordinary regular work. Any pupil, of
course, would do that. He would study first the Master’s convenience, and when
he considered that he had something important to report he would not think of
himself, but of the Master. But sometimes newer recruits are very full of the
importance of something that they have been doing, or that they want to ask,
and they wait about and thrust themselves on the attention of the Master, so
that He turns aside for a moment from what He is doing.
912.
The older pupil
is always most careful as to what sort of thought and feeling he sends along
the lines of communication between himself and the Master, so that there shall
be no slightest jar. This needs a certain amount of care on the part of the
pupil, because there are very often jars which the pupils cannot help. In a
great city, for instance, there must often be surroundings which are very unpleasant;
in a crowd during the busy time of the day, in the midst of a perfect
pandemonium of noise, all sorts of clashing and crashing vibrations impinge
upon a person to some extent. One may guard oneself to some degree, and must
indeed take good care that no such vibrations, if they do affect one should be
transmitted to the Master.1
(1 Ante, pp.
187-8.) It is not that the Master could not deal
with it all by a single thought, but one does not want to cause Him a single
thought; His time is so precious, the outpouring of His force so valuable, that
the pupil does not want the smallest amount of it to be wasted. He lives for
the work, as the Master does, and it is part of his duty to see that the very
great beneficence which his Guru has extended towards him in making him an
outlying part of Himself, does not cause the least trouble. It is easy to
prevent these disturbances from reaching Him, when one has reached the stage of
knowing how to do it. In the meantime, it is the conquering of the desires of
the outer senses that gives one the right to come into such touch with the
Masters that he can inquire from Them.
913.
17. Inquire
of the Inmost, the One, of its final secret which it holds for you through the
ages.
914.
The Inmost, the
One, for the personality, is no doubt the ego, but for the ego it is the Monad.
What it is for the Monad I do not know certainly, because I cannot yet see the
Monad. One can see the triple atma, which is the threefold manifestation of a
Monad, and from that a great deal may be deduced; but face to face I have not
seen it. Our Masters have, but what They see and what They know They cannot
fully tell us; that is quite clear. The Monad is said to be a spark of the
Divine Fire, but also we believe that in the primal manifestation of the system
the Logos poured Himself out through His seven Ministers – “the seven spirits
before the throne of God.” I do not know, but I imagine, that for the Monad,
who must have come out through one of those glowing colours on his way from the
divine Fire, that great Minister or Planetary Spirit through whom he came forth
might well be the Inmost – and so we reason on to yet higher beings. These
things are not comprehensible to us, and not to be stated in words. In some way
which means very little to us and yet in meditation may mean a great deal, God
puts part of Himself down into matter, and divides that part so that it becomes
spirit and matter – two manifestations of the same thing, and yet having done
that He remains behind it all, unlimited, omnipresent, unaffected. The Inmost,
the One, has held secrets for us through the ages because always from the very
beginning the inner self, the Monad, has known certain things. We do not know
what things the Monad knows from the beginning. The Monad is a spark of the
divine Fire, and the Logos, who is the divine Fire, knows all.
915.
The comment on
the seventeenth rule says:
916.
The great and
difficult victory, the conquering of the desires of the individual soul is a
work of ages; therefore expect not to obtain its rewards until ages of experience
have been accumulated. When the time of learning this seventeenth rule is
reached, man is on the threshold of becoming more than man.
917.
That sounds
rather excessive, but we must presume that He who writes knows whereof He
writes. We must remember that all this has to be taken at two levels. When it
is a question of the desires of the personality and of their being laid aside
in favour of the aspirations of the soul it surely is not such a difficult
matter. Putting aside the desires of the individual soul for those of the Monad
behind is a very much higher thing, and when it is said that it may take ages
one is prepared to admit that it might well be true; and yet when you have once
accomplished this at one stage, to do it over again at another and higher stage
ought not to present any insuperable difficulty, because what has to be done is
the same thing, though from an entirely different point of view. It will, no
doubt, take ages for those who slowly tread the broad main road of human
progress, but generally only a few lives, as we have seen, for those who now
enter the Path, and breast the mountain-side.
918.
When one gets a
glimpse behind the veil into the plans of the Hierarchy one finds that They habitually
talk in large figures. They lay their plans with a wonderful, almost deadly,
certainty, and it would seem that nothing whatever can interfere with them.
They lay out Their future in blocks of ten thousand years or so, and They say:
“In this ten thousand years we will get such and-such work done.” And They do
it. Yet that work does not at all necessarily spread itself evenly over that
block. It seems to me, from what I have observed, that there might be a plan
laid out in which a certain amount was to be done in the first two hundred
years, so much in the next, and so on, so that by the end of a thousand years a
certain definite goal was to be achieved. It would seem that in those smaller
divisions of two hundred years the prescribed proportion of work is not always
achieved; yet what They have calculated to get done in the course of the larger
block of one thousand years is always done. When the work moves slowly at first
it hurries in the end.
919.
The people or the
nations to whom the opportunity to do the work is first offered do not invariably
take it, but there is always an understudy being prepared. If a man or a nation
fails, the next line is brought up and the work is done, though it may be
delayed a little. The British Empire had a trial of that nature in connection
with the great war. As a whole it rose to the emergency and proved itself
worthy. Had it not done so, another great nation was being prepared to take its
place, but it would have done the work a century or two later, because it is a
long way behind. Now, because we have so far risen to our opportunity (and I
hope we shall continue to do so till the end), that other nation will have a
longer time to develop, and therefore will progress more soundly and more easily,
and will not have such a strain put upon it in its development as it would have
had if we had failed.
920.
The Theosophical
Society, and also each member in it, is in a somewhat similar position. Any
member who proves himself good in the general work, or shows signs of being
good in the near future, will be tried with some of the efforts which are being
made in connection with the founding of the sixth subrace of our Aryan race. In
all this there is, of course, no conscription or compulsion; all will evolve to
perfection sooner or later, and we can take just as long as we like. The wisest
policy is to do the very best we can in a steady way, not putting ourselves
under a strain which we cannot permanently endure. It is a considerable
advantage in doing any of this work to know to which of the rays one belongs. Most
of us in the Theosophical Society are on one of the five rays, numbered three
to seven, but many are in process of transferring themselves to the first and
second rays, in order to work under the two great Masters who founded the
Society, and who are to be the Manu and Bodhisattva of the Sixth root-race,
which will be established in some seven hundred years’ time. Many of our people
will be born into that race, but there are others who will prefer to work on in
the fifth race, and help in bringing it to the perfection that is still before
it. Others will prefer to go with the great geniuses who will certainly come
into the fifth root-race at its highest point, rather than to follow the two
Masters into the pioneer work of the new race.
921.
In Australia and
America, and some other places, there is now a special opportunity for those
who wish to help in the development of the sixth sub-race, because it is
rapidly coming into existence there, while there are only isolated members of
it in the older countries. Many of those who were killed in the great war have
already been reborn, though there is nothing so far to indicate that they are
abandoning their former countries in order to-come to the newer lands. Those of
the new race type who remain in the old countries will probably have more difficulties
to face than the others, because of the pressure of old ideas and conservative
customs.
922.
In all these
undertakings, no one is ever indispensable. As to our own Theosophical
movement, we may be very sure that the Great Ones behind will take care of it
as a whole. Only lately, since I have had to take up again a good deal of
church work, I have found how very closely „ that organization is being
directed, how very intimate may be the relation between those who guide the
Church down here and the real Head of the Church behind, if those who are
working down here make themselves channels such as they should be. That in many
cases they have not done so, but have worked for their own selfish power and
interest is lamentably true, and those who have done that have thereby shut off
from themselves a vast tract of spiritual power, usefulness and-efficiency
which they might have had. But it is only quite lately that I have found out
how tremendous are the possibilities and how ignorant most people are of them,
and I am quite sure from what I have already seen that the same thing must be
true in many other quite unsuspected directions.
923.
I shall never
again be surprised to find traces of the work of the Great White Lodge in
anything that is good anywhere, whether it be small or great, for They miss no
opportunities, not even the smallest; wherever there is anything of good in any
movement, just to the extent of that good it is being utilized. There may be
much in the movement that is not good; that is regrettable, and that has to be
put aside, but it does not appear to interfere with Their employment of every
ounce of good that does exist in it. There may be bigotry, persecution, pride,
self-seeking and many other qualities that are undesirable in some movement or
person. Thirty years ago I might have thought that those qualities would
probably prevent their possessor from being utilized at all. They do stand
seriously in his way, and prevent him from making any real progress, but if
there is any good quality in that person, to the extent of that good quality he
is being used.
924.
This method of
the Brotherhood is most encouraging. We are all very conscious of being so far
from perfect ourselves that we might perhaps think: “How can a Master make use
of anything in me, when I so often make mistakes? “ But it is our duty to do
our best and then whatever there is of good in us He will use. At the same time
this lays upon us a still greater duty: to get rid of that which makes it
difficult for Him to use us. He will use us as much as He can; let us make it
easy for Him by making ourselves perfect channels.
925.
There are many
lines of development for human beings, and it takes many lives to develop the
characteristics of any line perfectly. I have spent most of this life in developing
the psychic side of my nature, in learning how to see clairvoyantly, and
writing about it. I met in our Society, and have worked with, Sir William
Crookes; that man spent his life in the study of chemistry, and he knew it perfectly.
Over and over again I have felt: “If only I had your knowledge, or if you had
my clairvoyance, what work we could do! “ It seems a pity that one cannot have
in one life both these forms of development. It takes a lifetime to attend to
each. He spent his life studying chemistry; and he will come back into his next
incarnation not with the detailed knowledge but with the faculty that will pick
all that up almost automatically. I have spent this life in developing the
psychic side. I do not know how much I shall be able to transmit into-my next
body, but I will carry over as much of it as I can. Then I will start along one
of these other lines, if the work will permit me to do so; but in the meantime
those who are willing to do our special work are set to do it, and we have not
much time for other things. We must attain all things one by one; they will
come, because we do not lose one when we drop it and take up another. So if in
this life we happen to have the Theosophical development, then in the next life
the opening up of the intellect and of high devotion may come much more easily
because in this life we have had this training, and there will be the further
great advantage that we shall be practically certain not to misuse them when we
get them.
926.
We must push on
rapidly. We may be much nearer than we know to the higher development. If we
have to spend a life or two in acquiring those capacities, what is that? There
is plenty of time before us, so let us set our aim high, and try to develop all
we can in the way of spirituality, intellect and inner knowledge. We are
digging through a wall of ignorance and prejudice that we have built round
ourselves in the course of many lives; we are like a man trying to escape from
a prison. He goes on digging; he does not know at what moment the pick will go
through the wall; when the reward is due it will come suddenly. We have many
things yet to attain, but perhaps the development will come quickly; for that
we must follow in Their footsteps and learn what They would have us learn.
927.
Rule 18 is once
more a comment by the Chohan. It warns the aspirant never to lose his caution
and watchfulness, but always to be afraid of himself, as a Roman philosopher
put it, even though he has ceased to be afraid of anything else.
928.
18. The
knowledge which is now yours is only yours because your soul has become one
with all pure souls and with the inmost. It is a trust vested in you by the
Most High. Betray it, misuse your knowledge or neglect it, and it is possible
even now for you to fall from the high estate you have attained. Great ones
fall back, even from the threshold, unable to sustain the weight of their responsibility,
unable to pass on. Therefore look forward always with awe and trembling to this
moment, and be prepared for the battle.
929.
That great ones fall
back even from the threshold seems impossible; the more nearly you approach
their level the more incredible it appears, because anything like selfishness
would seem quite impossible to the man at that stage. However, it must be so,
because it is said by one who knows that of which He speaks. The thought of
self is very subtle and turns up in unexpected guise at levels where there
should be no such thing. Therefore we shall do well to heed the warning, and
not too soon think that we are safe from the attacks of selfishness. That is
the only fetter that can hold us back, but it has many forms, and is very
subtle indeed.
930.
The last three
aphorisms once more form a series; in number 19 there is a preparatory comment
by the Chohan:
931.
19. It is written
that for him who is on the threshold of divinity no law can be framed, no guide
can exist.
932.
The disciple at
this stage is utterly beyond the need of outside teaching. He has read the book
of nature on all the five planes of human evolution. He is at the point of conquest
of the last fetter – avidya. Henceforth the law of his life comes utterly from
within himself. Therefore no comment is possible. Says the Chohan:
933.
Yet to
enlighten the disciple, the final struggle may be thus expressed:
934.
Then come the
three rules:
935.
Hold fast to
that which has neither substance nor existence.
936.
20. Listen
only to the voice which is soundless.
937.
21. Look only
on that which is invisible alike to the inner and the outer sense.
PEACE BE WITH YOU